Cyberlink PowerDirector Help Power Director 15.0 User’s Guide Director15 UG ENU

User Manual: cyberlink PowerDirector - 15.0 - User’s Guide Free User Guide for Cyberlink PowerDirector Software, Manual

Open the PDF directly: View PDF PDF.
Page Count: 444 [warning: Documents this large are best viewed by clicking the View PDF Link!]

User's Guide
PowerDirector
CyberLink
Copyright and Disclaimer
All rights reserved.
To the extent allowed by law, PowerDirector IS PROVIDED “AS IS”,
WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EITHER EXPRESS OR IMPLIED,
INCLUDING WITHOUT LIMITATION ANY WARRANTY FOR
INFORMATION, SERVICES, OR PRODUCTS PROVIDED THROUGH OR IN
CONNECTION WITH PowerDirector AND ANY IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF
MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE,
EXPECTATION OF PRIVACY, OR NON-INFRINGEMENT.
BY USING THIS SOFTWARE, YOU AGREE THAT CYBERLINK WILL NOT BE
LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, OR CONSEQUENTIAL LOSS
ARISING FROM THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE OR MATERIALS
CONTAINED EITHER IN THIS PACKAGE.
The terms and conditions here under shall be governed and
construed in accordance with the laws of Taiwan.
PowerDirector is a registered trademark along with other company
and product names mentioned in this publication, used for
identification purposes and remain the exclusive property of their
respective owners.
Manufactured under license from Dolby Laboratories. Dolby and the
double-D symbol are registered trademarks of Dolby Laboratories.
Confidential unpublished works. Copyright 1995-2005 Dolby
Laboratories. All rights reserved.
For DTS patents, see http://patents.dts.com. Manufactured under
license from DTS Licensing Limited. DTS, the Symbol, & DTS and the
Symbol together are registered trademarks, and DTS 5.1 Producer is a
trademark of DTS, Inc. © DTS, Inc. All Rights Reserved.
International Headquarters
Mailing Address CyberLink Corporation
15F., No. 100, Minquan Rd., Xindian Dist.
New Taipei City 231, Taiwan (R.O.C.)
Web Site http://www.cyberlink.com
Telephone 886-2-8667-1298
Fax 886-2-8667-1385
Copyright © 2016 CyberLink Corporation. All rights reserved.
i
Contents
..................................................1
Introduction
................................................................................................1Welcome
.................................................................................................1Latest Features
.................................................................................................2DirectorZone and CyberLink Cloud
.................................................................................................3PowerDirector Versions
................................................................................................5System Requirements
..................................................6
PowerDirector Editing Modes
................................................................................................7Full Feature Editor
................................................................................................8Easy Editor
................................................................................................10Slideshow Creator
.................................................................................................12Setting Music Preferences
.................................................................................................13Customizing Slideshows in the Slideshow Designer
..................................................18
PowerDirector Workspace
................................................................................................18Rooms
.................................................................................................19Media Room
.................................................................................................20Effect Room
.................................................................................................20PiP Objects Room
.................................................................................................21Particle Room
.................................................................................................21Title Room
.................................................................................................21Transition Room
.................................................................................................22Audio Mixing Room
.................................................................................................22Voice-Over Recording Room
.................................................................................................22Chapter Room
.................................................................................................22Subtitle Room
CyberLink PowerDirector Help
ii
................................................................................................22Library Window
.................................................................................................24Explorer View
.................................................................................................24Searching the PowerDirector Library
.................................................................................................25Filtering Media in the Library
.................................................................................................27Library Menu
................................................................................................27Expanding the Workspace
................................................................................................28Preview Window
.................................................................................................29Preview Player Controls
.................................................................................................30Taking a Screen Snapshot
.................................................................................................30Preview/Display Options
.................................................................................................32Zoom In/Out
.................................................................................................33Undocking the Preview Window
.................................................................................................33Playing 360° Media Files
.................................................................................................34Previewing in 3D Mode
................................................................................................35Editing Workspace
.................................................................................................36Timeline View
.................................................................................................47Storyboard View
..................................................49
PowerDirector Projects
................................................................................................49Setting Project Aspect Ratio
................................................................................................50360° Video Projects
................................................................................................52Exporting Projects
................................................................................................52Reusing PowerDirector Projects
................................................................................................55CyberLink Cloud Projects
..................................................57
Importing Media into
PowerDirector
................................................................................................57Importing Media Files
.................................................................................................58360° Media Files
.................................................................................................593D Media
.................................................................................................61Importing PowerDirector Projects
................................................................................................62Capturing Media
iii
.................................................................................................62Capturing from a DV Camcorder
.................................................................................................64Capturing from an HDV Camcorder
.................................................................................................64Capturing from a TV Signal
.................................................................................................65Capturing from a Digital TV Signal
.................................................................................................65Capturing from a Webcam
.................................................................................................65Capturing from a Microphone
.................................................................................................65Capturing from a CD
.................................................................................................65Capturing from an AVCHD Camcorder
.................................................................................................66Capturing from an Optical Device
.................................................................................................66Capture Desktop with Screen Recorder
.................................................................................................66Captured Content
.................................................................................................67Quality Profile Setup
.................................................................................................67Capture Settings
.................................................................................................67Capture Preferences
................................................................................................68Downloading Media
.................................................................................................68Downloading Photos From Flickr
.................................................................................................69Downloading Content from DirectorZone/CyberLink Cloud
................................................................................................71Detecting Scenes and Extracting Audio
.................................................................................................71Detecting Scenes in a Video Clip
.................................................................................................73Extracting Audio from a Video Clip
..................................................74
PowerDirector Plug-ins
................................................................................................74Using the MultiCam Designer
.................................................................................................75Importing Media
.................................................................................................77Synchronizing Clips
.................................................................................................78Creating Recorded Content
.................................................................................................80Changing the Recorded Content
................................................................................................82Using the Theme Designer
.................................................................................................83Overview
.................................................................................................83Adding Theme Templates/Sequences
.................................................................................................86Adding Media Clips
.................................................................................................88Importing More Media Files
.................................................................................................89Editing Media Clips
CyberLink PowerDirector Help
iv
.................................................................................................91Editing Background Music
.................................................................................................92Editing Title Text
.................................................................................................92Replacing Background Images
.................................................................................................93Adding Transitions Between Sequences
.................................................................................................93Previewing and Saving Movies
.................................................................................................94Editing Created Movies
................................................................................................95Editing Video in the Action Camera Center
.................................................................................................96Fixing Video Clips
.................................................................................................98Creating Action Effects on Video Clips
.................................................................................................104Action Camera Center Settings
.................................................................................................105Changing the Action Camera Center Content
................................................................................................106Using an Express Project
................................................................................................107Recording Your Desktop with the Screen Recorder
.................................................................................................109Setting Capture Area
.................................................................................................115Configuring the Screen Recorder Settings
................................................................................................116Creating Blends in the Blending Effect Designer
.................................................................................................117Blending Image Presets/Templates
..................................................122
Arranging Media in Your
Production
................................................................................................123Adding Video Clips and Images to the Timeline
.................................................................................................124Adding Video Clips and Images
.................................................................................................125Adding Color Boards and Backgrounds
................................................................................................128Adding Audio Clips
.................................................................................................130Syncing Audio
................................................................................................133Syncing Clips by Audio
................................................................................................133Using the Magic Movie Wizard
................................................................................................134Using the Slideshow Creator
..................................................135
Editing Your Media
................................................................................................135Content Aware Editing
.................................................................................................136Using Content Aware Editing
v
................................................................................................140Splitting a Clip
................................................................................................141Unlinking Video/Audio Clips
................................................................................................142Trimming Video and Audio Clips
.................................................................................................142Trimming a Video Clip
.................................................................................................146Trimming an Audio Clip
................................................................................................148Setting a Media Clip's Duration
................................................................................................149Setting TV (Video Clip Interlacing) Format
................................................................................................149Adjusting Video Clip Aspect Ratio
................................................................................................150Stretching Images
................................................................................................151Cropping Images
................................................................................................152Changing the Shape of Media
................................................................................................153Fixing and Enhancing Images/Videos
.................................................................................................154Applying ColorDirector Color Presets
.................................................................................................154Advanced Fixes and Enhancements
................................................................................................155Utilizing Keyframes on Media
.................................................................................................158Adding Keyframes
................................................................................................161Muting Audio
................................................................................................162Advanced Audio Editing
................................................................................................162Time Info
................................................................................................163Magic Fix
................................................................................................163Magic Cut
..................................................164
Using the Tools
................................................................................................164Using the Power Tools
.................................................................................................165Crop & Zoom Video
.................................................................................................167Adjusting Video Speed in the Video Speed Designer
................................................................................................171Motion Tracker
.................................................................................................172Tracking the Motion of Objects in Videos
.................................................................................................176Adding and Editing Trackers
.................................................................................................178Adding Motion Tracking Effects
CyberLink PowerDirector Help
vi
................................................................................................182Action Camera Center
................................................................................................182Blending Effect
................................................................................................183View Designer
.................................................................................................184Customizing Direction of View
..................................................189
Adding Effects
................................................................................................189Blending Clips on the Timeline
................................................................................................191Adding Video Effects
.................................................................................................193Modifying a Video Effect
................................................................................................194Using Magic Motion
.................................................................................................195Magic Motion Designer
................................................................................................196Using Magic Style
................................................................................................197Using the Freeze Frame Effect
..................................................198
Creating PiP Effects
................................................................................................198Adding PiP Objects
.................................................................................................199Creating Custom PiP Objects
................................................................................................200Using the Paint Designer
.................................................................................................201Creating a Paint Animation
................................................................................................204Modifying Media in the PiP Designer
.................................................................................................206Mode Selection and Zoom Tools
.................................................................................................206Modifying PiP Media Size and Position
.................................................................................................207Modifying PiP Media Properties
.................................................................................................211Adding Motion to PiP Media
.................................................................................................215Utilizing PiP Keyframes
.................................................................................................219Saving and Sharing PiP Objects
..................................................221
Adding Particle Effects
................................................................................................223Modifying Particle Effects in the Particle Designer
.................................................................................................224Mode Selection and Zoom Tools
.................................................................................................225Adding Objects, Images, and Backgrounds
.................................................................................................226Modifying Particle Object Range and Position
vii
.................................................................................................227Modifying Particle Object Properties
.................................................................................................232Adding Motion to Particle Objects
.................................................................................................232Utilizing Particle Keyframes
.................................................................................................234Saving and Sharing Particle Effect Templates
..................................................237
Adding Title Effects
................................................................................................239Modifying Titles in the Title Designer
.................................................................................................240Mode Selection and Zoom Tools
.................................................................................................245Adding Text, Particles, Images, and Backgrounds
.................................................................................................246Modifying Title Effect Position
.................................................................................................247Modifying Title Text and Image Properties
.................................................................................................255Applying Animation Effects to Title Text
.................................................................................................258Adding Motion to Title Text
.................................................................................................261Utilizing Title Effect Keyframes
.................................................................................................264Saving and Sharing Title Templates
..................................................266
Creating Custom Masks in the
Mask Designer
................................................................................................267Mode Selection and Zoom Tools
................................................................................................268Selecting Masks
................................................................................................270Creating Custom Masks
................................................................................................279Modifying Mask Size and Position
................................................................................................280Modifying Mask Object Settings
................................................................................................281Adding Motion to Masks
................................................................................................284Utilizing Mask Keyframes
................................................................................................288Saving and Sharing Masks
..................................................289
Using Transitions
................................................................................................289Adding Transitions to a Single Clip
................................................................................................291Adding Transitions Between Two Clips
................................................................................................292Using Audio Transitions
................................................................................................293Setting Transition Behavior
CyberLink PowerDirector Help
viii
................................................................................................294Modifying Transition Settings
................................................................................................295Modifying Alpha Transitions in the Transition Designer
.................................................................................................297Creating New Alpha Transitions
.................................................................................................297Modifying Alpha Transition Properties
.................................................................................................310Saving Alpha Transitions
..................................................313
Mixing Audio and Recording
Voice-Overs
................................................................................................313Adjusting Audio Clip Volume Levels
.................................................................................................313Mixing Audio In-Track
.................................................................................................314Mixing Audio in the Audio Mixing Room
.................................................................................................315Adding Fade Effects to Audio Clips
.................................................................................................316Restoring Audio Clip Volume Levels
................................................................................................316Recording Voice-Overs
..................................................318
Adding Chapters
................................................................................................318Adding Chapter Markers
................................................................................................318Setting Chapter Thumbnails
..................................................319
Adding Subtitles
................................................................................................319Adding Subtitle Markers
................................................................................................320Importing Subtitles from a File
................................................................................................320Extracting Subtitles from an MKV File
................................................................................................321Editing Subtitles
................................................................................................322Syncing Subtitles
..................................................323
Producing Your Project
................................................................................................323Utilizing Intelligent SVRT
................................................................................................324Produce Window
.................................................................................................325Outputting to a Standard 2D File
.................................................................................................328Producing a 360° Video
.................................................................................................329Outputting in a 3D Format
.................................................................................................332Outputting to a Device
ix
.................................................................................................334Uploading Video to Online Media Sites
.................................................................................................343Uploading a 360° Video
.................................................................................................345Batch Produce
..................................................347
Creating Discs
................................................................................................348Importing Additional Disc Content
................................................................................................350Selecting a Disc Menu
................................................................................................352Editing Disc Menu Properties
.................................................................................................352Configuring Disc Menu Settings
.................................................................................................353Editing Disc Menu Text
.................................................................................................353Setting Disc Menu Music
.................................................................................................354Adding a First Play Video
.................................................................................................355Setting Disc Playback Mode
.................................................................................................355Specifying Buttons Per Page
.................................................................................................356Modifying Menu Object Properties
................................................................................................357Customizing Disc Menus in the Menu Designer
.................................................................................................358Mode Selection, Zoom Tools, and Context Menu
.................................................................................................359Setting Menu Opening and Background
.................................................................................................361Adding Title Text and Images to Menus
.................................................................................................362Modifying Text Object and Image Properties
.................................................................................................368Adding and Editing Menu Buttons
.................................................................................................370Enabling 3D Depth in Disc Menus
.................................................................................................370Saving and Sharing Disc Menu Templates
................................................................................................372Burning Your Production to Disc
.................................................................................................372Burning a Disc in 2D
.................................................................................................374Burning a Disc in 3D
.................................................................................................377Configuring Burn Settings
.................................................................................................378Erasing Discs
..................................................379
PowerDirector Preferences
................................................................................................379General Preferences
................................................................................................380Capture Preferences
................................................................................................381Confirmation Preferences
CyberLink PowerDirector Help
x
................................................................................................382DirectorZone Preferences
................................................................................................383Editing Preferences
................................................................................................385File Preferences
................................................................................................386Display Preferences
................................................................................................387Hardware Acceleration Preferences
................................................................................................388Project Preferences
................................................................................................388Produce Preferences
................................................................................................389Improvement Program Preferences
................................................................................................390CyberLink Cloud Preferences
..................................................391
PowerDirector Hotkeys
................................................................................................391Default Keyboard Hotkeys
.................................................................................................392Application Menu Bar Hotkeys
.................................................................................................395System Hotkeys
.................................................................................................395Capture Hotkeys
.................................................................................................395Edit Hotkeys
.................................................................................................396Designer Hotkeys
................................................................................................397Customizing Keyboard Hotkeys
.................................................................................................398Hotkey Sets
..................................................400
Appendix
................................................................................................400Intelligent SVRT: When Is Used?
................................................................................................401Licensing and Copyright Information
.................................................................................................403Licenses and Copyrights
..................................................415
Technical Support
................................................................................................415Before Contacting Technical Support
................................................................................................416Web Support
................................................................................................416Help Resources
1
Introduction
Introduction
Chapter 1:
This chapter introduces CyberLink PowerDirector and the digital video editing
process. It also outlines all of the latest features, available versions, and reviews the
minimum system requirements for CyberLink PowerDirector.
Note: this document is for reference and informational use only. Its content
and the corresponding program are subject to change without notice. For
more helpful tips on using the program, please visit our members forum or
see the video tutorials at http://directorzone.cyberlink.com/tutorial/pdr.
Welcome
Welcome to the CyberLink family of digital media tools. CyberLink PowerDirector is
a digital video editing program that lets you create professional-looking videos and
photo slideshows, complete with music, voice-overs, special effects, transitions,
and much more. You can then output your project to a file, camcorder, portable
device, upload it directly to various online video sharing web sites, or burn it to a
disc, complete with stylish menus.
Latest Features
Below is a list of some of the latest features within the CyberLink PowerDirector
program.
·Utilize CyberLink's True360 technology to produce your own 360* virtual
reality videos.
·Create a conventional video using 360° footage in the View Designer*.
·Create unique looking videos by blending clips directly on the timeline or with
the Blending Effect Designer.
·Use the Mask Designer* to create custom masks with motion using your
imported images and title text.
·Additional action effects for the Action Camera Center*, including stop
motion, and zoom and pan.
·More tracking effects on moving objects in the Motion Tracker*.
·Performance and usability improvements for the Screen Recorder.
2
CyberLink PowerDirector Help
·More performance and usability improvements for the Title and PiP Designer.
·An improved TrueTheater algorithm for even smarter and sharper video
enhancements in Fix / Enhance.
·Support for portrait video projects that use the 9:16* aspect ratio.
·Perform simple video trimming and image cropping within the Easy Editor.
·Added ease in/out to create smoother rotating and scaling titles and PiP
objects in the Title/PiP Designer.
·Use clip markers for more precise video editing in the timeline.
·Increase the timeline scale for even more precise audio syncing.
Note: * optional feature in CyberLink PowerDirector. Check the version
table on our web site for detailed versioning information.
DirectorZone and CyberLink Cloud
You can upload/download effects and templates, and back up media, preferences,
projects, and more with the DirectorZone and CyberLink Cloud* features.
Note: * optional feature in CyberLink PowerDirector. Check the version
table on our web site for detailed versioning information.
DirectorZone
DirectorZone is a free web service that lets you search for and download theme
templates, PiP objects, paint animations, title templates, particle objects, sound
clips, and disc menus created by other users of CyberLink PowerDirector.
To access the benefits of DirectorZone, you can sign in by:
·clicking the Sign in to DirectorZone link in the top right corner of the
CyberLink PowerDirector window.
·clicking the button at the top of the window to open the PowerDirector
preferences, and then on the DirectorZone tab. See DirectorZone Preferences
for more information.
3
Introduction
Also, be sure to periodically click the button to check out the latest
DirectorZone Bulletin and view the Popular templates on DirectorZone. Just click
in either of these sections in the Notifications window to view the bulletin or
download these templates. Or go to http://directorzone.cyberlink.com to find out
more information on the features and benefits of the DirectorZone web service.
CyberLink Cloud
CyberLink Cloud is a cloud storage service from CyberLink where users can upload
and download their effects and templates, PowerDirector projects, produced video
clips, and more. CyberLink Cloud allows users to back up media, preferences,
projects, etc., and ensure their working environment is the same on multiple
computers.
Note: CyberLink Cloud is a subscription cloud storage service that is
included with some CyberLink products, and is available for purchase
through our web site. For more detailed information, see http://
www.cyberlink.com/products/cyberlink-cloud/.
PowerDirector Versions
The features that are available to you within CyberLink PowerDirector are
completely dependent on the version you have installed on your computer.
Supported file formats, editing features, disc-making functions, and other features
vary depending on the version that you have.
To view the PowerDirector version table, please go to our web site: http://
www.cyberlink.com/products/powerdirector-ultra/compare_en_US.html
To determine your version of CyberLink PowerDirector, click on the CyberLink
PowerDirector logo in the top right corner or select ? > About CyberLink
PowerDirector.
PowerDirector Live
PowerDirector Live is a subscription based version of CyberLink PowerDirector that
provides all the editing features you expect, and adds the CyberLink Cloud storage
service and more.
With a PowerDirector Live subscription, you get:
4
CyberLink PowerDirector Help
·All the award-winning features of the Ultimate version of CyberLink
PowerDirector, including the production of 4K ultra HD video and stunning 3D
movies.
·The ability to back up program preferences, projects, project media, and (PiP
object, paint animation, title effect, particle effect, disc menu) templates on
the cloud storage space CyberLink Cloud.
·Guaranteed updates to the latest versions of CyberLink PowerDirector
Ultimate.
PowerDirector Live is the must-have solution for on-the-go video editors who want
easy access to their media and the latest up-to-date editing technologies.
Updating PowerDirector
Software upgrades and updates (patches) are periodically available from CyberLink.
CyberLink PowerDirector automatically prompts you when either is available.
Note: you can prevent CyberLink PowerDirector from auto checking for
updates/upgrades in General Preferences.
To update your software, do this:
1. Click the button to open the Notifications window.
2. Check the N ew U pdates and Upgrade Info sections.
3. Select an item in these sections to open your web browser, where you can
purchase product upgrades or download the latest patch update.
Note: you must connect to the Internet to use this feature.
5
Introduction
System Requirements
The system requirements listed below are recommended as minimums for general
digital video production work.
System Requirements
·Microsoft Windows 10, 8/8.1, 7 (64 bit OS
recommended)
·1024 x 768, 16-bit color or above
·2GB required (6GB or above
recommended)
·Intel Core™ i-series or AMD Phenom® II
and above
·128 MB VGA VRAM or higher
·7GB required
·Burning drive is required for disc burning
purpose
·Windows compatible sound card is
required
·Internet connection also required for initial
software & file formats activation
Note: please consult the CyberLink web site (http://www.cyberlink.com/
products/powerdirector-ultimate/spec_en_US.html) for the most recent
system requirements information. * optional feature in CyberLink
PowerDirector. Check the version table on our web site for detailed
versioning information.
6
CyberLink PowerDirector Help
PowerDirector Editing
Modes
Chapter 2:
CyberLink PowerDirector has six separate editors to fit your editing requirements.
When you launch the program from the start menu, or the CyberLink PowerDirector
shortcut on the desktop, you are prompted to choose one of the following editing
modes:
Note: before selecting your preferred editing mode, be sure to set the video
aspect ratio for your project (16:9, 4:3, or 9:16).
·Full Feature Editor: select this option to enter the classic editing mode of
CyberLink PowerDirector, where all of the program's features are available to
you.
·Easy Editor: if you are new to the editing process and not sure how or where
to get started, then the Easy Editor can help. The Magic Movie Wizard takes
you through a step-by-step process to import, style, adjust, and preview your
finished movie, in just a few steps. You can then edit the created production,
output it to a video file, or burn it to a disc.
·360° Editor*: select this option to create a 360 virtual reality video. See 360°
Media Files for information on importing these types of media files, or 360°
Video Projects for information on how to edit them.
·Express Project: select this option to choose from a number of project
templates that will help you speed up the editing process. See Using an
Express Project for more detailed information.
·Theme Designer: in the Theme Designer* you can customize the theme
templates used in the Magic Movie Wizard to fit your specific project. See
Using the Theme Designer for more information and detailed steps on using
this feature.
·Slideshow Creator: with the Slideshow Creator you can instantly turn your
photos into a dynamic slideshow. Follow the steps in the Slideshow Creator to
import your photos, add background music, and stylish slideshow templates.
Once done, you can preview the slideshow, before outputting it as a video file
or burning it to disc.
7
PowerDirector Editing Modes
Note: select the Always enter the full feature editor option at the bottom
of this dialog to skip this window at startup. You can always reset this
selection at any time in Confirmation Preferences.
Full Feature Editor
In the Full Feature Editor of CyberLink PowerDirector you have the freedom to
perform every function and use every feature that is available in your version of the
program. The path you take to create your video production is up to you. Use the
features you are familiar with to make your movie, or experiment to create
something new.
In the Full Feature Editor there are four main modules available to you:
Module
Description
Capture
Capture media in a number of formats, from a variety
of different sources. See Capturing Media.
Edit
In the Edit module you can edit and trim your
imported media, arrange it in your video production,
add effects, titles, PiP objects, transitions, music,
chapters, subtitles, and much more. See the relevant
section of this help file that corresponds with the
editing feature you'd like to use.
Produce
In the Produce module you can output your created
production to a video file in a variety of formats
(including 3D formats), a device (camcorder, mobile
phone, or other portable device), or upload it to
YouTube, Facebook, DailyMotion, or Vimeo. See
Producing Your Project.
Create Disc
Use the features in the Create Disc module to design
discs with menus, and then burn your video
production in a variety of different formats in 2D or
3D. See Creating Discs.
When CyberLink PowerDirector launches in the Full Feature Editor, it automatically
opens in the Edit module. You can easily switch among the available modules to
perform your required task.
8
CyberLink PowerDirector Help
Easy Editor
If you are new to the editing process and not sure how or where to get started, then
the Easy Editor can help. The Magic Movie Wizard takes all of your media and
creates a completed video production in just a few steps.
To create your video production using the Magic Movie Wizard in the Easy Editor,
do this:
Note: if you want more creative control than the Magic Movie Wizard
provides, you can also use the Theme Designer to create your video
production. The Theme Designer allows you to customize the theme
templates used and choose the exact images, video clips, and background
music you want in your production. See Using the Theme Designer for more
information.
1. Select Easy Editor when prompted which mode you prefer at startup. The
Magic Movie Wizard displays.
Note: if you are in the Full Feature Editor, you can quickly launch the Magic
Movie Wizard by clicking on the button above the timeline and
selecting Magic Movie Wizard.
2. In the Source window, click to import all of the media you want to use in
your video production. Select Import Media Files to import a number of
individual video or image files, or select Import a Media Folder if all of your
media is in a specific folder on your computer's hard drive. CyberLink
PowerDirector will import all of the supported media file formats in the
selected folder.
Note: click to remove any unwanted media files from your production.
3. Before proceeding to the next window, you can perform simple trims on
video clips and crop any imported images as follows:
·hover your mouse over a video clip you want to trim, and then click on
its thumbnail to open the Trim window. See Performing a Single Trim for
information on how to trim video clips.
·hover your mouse over an image you want to crop, and then click on its
thumbnail to open the Crop window. See Cropping Images for information on
how to crop images.
9
PowerDirector Editing Modes
4. Once you are done importing, trimming and cropping, click Next to continue.
Note: once you proceed, you can always click the Previous button to return
to the Source window to import more media or trim/crop the imported video
clips/images.
5. In the Style window, select from the available movie styles. Each style you
select will result in a different outputted video. Select Free Download* to get
more style templates. See DirectorZone for more information.
Note: the style templates with the 3D icon produce a 3D effect in 3D mode
and when outputted in 3D video productions. * optional feature in CyberLink
PowerDirector. Check the version table on our web site for detailed
versioning information.
5. Click Next to continue.
6. In the Adjustment window, click to add music to your production.
Then use the available controls to do the following:
·use the button to add more music files to the background music
playlist. Use the and buttons to set the order of the music in the
playlist. The total duration of all the music added is noted above the playlist.
·Mix audio level between music and the video's audio: use the slider to mix the
audio level, by deciding whether to have more background music or the
original video's audio in the production.
·Specify the movie duration: here you can specify how long your movie will
be. Select Original duration if you don't want the Magic Movie Wizard to make
any edits to your imported media; Select Set output duration to manually
specify how long you want the movie to be in the field provided; Select Fit
duration to background music if you want your video production to match
the duration of the music you imported into the playlist.
7. Click the Settings* button to use the sliders to customize the criteria the Magic
Movie Wizard uses to cut your movie. Click OK to save the settings.
Note: * optional feature in CyberLink PowerDirector. Check the version
table on our web site for detailed versioning information.
8. Click Next to continue.
9. In the Preview window the Magic Movie Wizard generates a version of your
production. If available, enter a Starting title and Ending title for your
10
CyberLink PowerDirector Help
production in the fields provided, and then use the available player controls to
preview it.
Note: if you are not satisfied with the current video production you can click
the Previous button to return to previous windows to add/remove music,
select a different style, change the criteria settings, duration, or import more
media. You can also click the Reorder M edia button (if available) to
shuffle the media files in the created production for a different look, or the
Edit in the Theme Designer button if you want to customize the style
template used. See Using the Theme Designer for more information.
10. Click Next to continue.
11. You are done. To finish and close the Easy Editor, choose one of the following:
·Produce Video: click to enter the Produce module where you can output your
production to a video file, device, or upload it to a video sharing web site. See
Producing Your Project.
·Create Disc: click to burn your production to a disc, complete with a
professional looking disc menu, in the Create Disc module. See Creating Discs.
·Advanced Editing: click this option if you'd like to perform some more
advanced editing on your production in the Edit module.
Slideshow Creator
The Slideshow Creator is the easiest way to create a dynamic slideshow with your
photos.
To create a slideshow in the Slideshow Creator, do this:
1. Select Slideshow Creator when prompted which mode you prefer at startup.
The first Slideshow Creator window displays.
Note: if you are in the Full Feature Mode, you can launch the Slideshow
Creator by adding photos to the timeline, selecting them, and then clicking
on the Slideshow button above the timeline. See Using the Slideshow
Creator for more information.
2. In the Source window, click to import all of the photos you want to use in
your slideshow. Select Import Image Files to import a number of individual
photos, or select Import an Image Folder if all of your photos are in a specific
folder on your computer's hard drive. CyberLink PowerDirector will import all
of the supported image formats in the selected folder.
11
PowerDirector Editing Modes
Note: you can right-click on a photo and select Set 3D Source Format if
required. For more information, please refer to Setting 3D Source Format.
You can also click to remove any unwanted photos from your
slideshow.
3. Click Next to continue.
4. In the Style & Music window, select a slideshow style. Each style you select will
result in a different slideshow.
5. In the Style & Music window, click the button to add background
music to your slideshow. After adding music, click the Music Preferences
button to customize the music duration and add fades. See Setting Music
Preferences for a detail description of the available preferences.
6. In the Style & Music window, click the S lideshow Prefer ences button to set
your slideshow preferences as follows:
·Duration: use this option to set the length of your slideshow. Select Fit photos
to music to have the length of the slideshow match the duration of the added
background music. Select Fit music to photos (if launched in Full Feature
Mode) for the length of the music to match the duration of the slideshow, i.e.
its specified length on the timeline.
·Sequence: use this option to set the order of the photos in the slideshow.
Select Timeline order (if launched in Full Feature Mode) to have the sequence
match the order the photos are currently displayed in the timeline. Select
Date/time taken for the photos to display in chronological order based on the
date and time they were taken.
·Detect faces: some slideshow templates include this option. When selected,
the Slideshow Creator will scan and detect the faces in the photos included in
the slideshow. The faces in the photos will then become the area of focus in
the created photo slideshows.
·Click OK to save your changes.
7. Click Next to continue.
8. In the Preview window, the Slideshow Creator generates a version of your
slideshow. Use the available player controls to preview it.
12
CyberLink PowerDirector Help
Note: if you are not satisfied with the current slideshow, you can click the
Previous button to return to previous windows to select a different style, or
import more photos. Also, if available, click the Replace Background
button in the Preview window to replace the background image used in the
slideshow, or Customize to fully customize your slideshow in the
Slideshow Designer. See Customizing Slideshows in the Slideshow
Designer for a detailed description of all the available options for your
selected slideshow style.
9. Click Next to continue.
10. You are done. To finish and close the Easy Editor, choose one of the following:
·Produce Video: click to enter the Produce window where you can output your
slideshow to a video file, device, or upload it to a video sharing web site. See
Producing Your Project.
·Create Disc: click to burn your slideshow to a disc, complete with a
professional looking disc menu, in the Create Disc window. See Creating Disc.
·Advanced Editing: click this option if you'd like to perform some more
advanced editing on your slideshow in the Edit window.
Note: if you select the Advanced Editing option, the Slideshow Creator
adds your created slideshow to the timeline in the Edit window as a
combined video file. If you'd like to do further editing on this slideshow
(combined video file), just select it and click the Customize button above
the timeline to edit in the Slideshow Designer. If you would like to remove
the slideshow effects added by the template and display each individual
photo in the slideshow on the timeline, just right-click on the file and then
select Remove Slideshow Effects.
Setting Music Preferences
If you are using background music in your slideshow, click on the Music
Preferences button in the Style & Music window of the Slideshow Creator to
configure the preferences as follows:
1. In the Trim audio section you can trim the length of the music file you added
as background music as follows:
·use the player controls to find the desired start point for the music, and then
click .
13
PowerDirector Editing Modes
·use the player controls to find the desired end point for the music, and then
click .
·drag the markers on the music timeline to set the desired start and end times
manually.
2. Select the Fade-in option to have the background music gradually fade-in at
the beginning of the slideshow.
3. Select the Fade out option to have the background music gradually fade-out
at the end of the slideshow.
4. Click OK to save your changes.
Customizing Slideshows in the Slideshow
Designer
In the Preview window of the Slideshow Creator, click on the Customize button to
open the Slideshow Designer to modify the selected slideshow style.
Note: if the Customize button is not available in the Preview window, the
slideshow style template you selected cannot be customized in the
Slideshow Designer.
14
CyberLink PowerDirector Help
A - Preview Area, B - Editing Area, C - Slide Area, D - Extra Tools Area, E - Selected Slide
The editing options and tools that are available in the Slideshow Designer, depend
on the slideshow style template you selected. The following outlines the editing
options available for the style templates that utilize the Slideshow Designer.
Camera/Cell Slideshow
When customizing a Camera or Cell slideshow in the Slideshow Designer, you can
perform the following functions:
15
PowerDirector Editing Modes
·in the slide area, click on a specific slideshow slide to view and edit it.
·in the preview area, click and drag a photo to an alternative cell.
·in the editing area (Unused photos), click the Add Photos button to import
additional photos for use in the slideshow.
·in the editing area (Unused photos), indicate the maximum number of photos
that are displayed on a slide.
·in the editing area, drag and drop the photos from Unused photos to the cell
in the preview area where you want it on the slide. You can also highlight a
cell by clicking it and use the buttons to add or remove selected
photos.
·in the preview area, select a cell with a photo and then click on the button
to set the focus of that cell on a specific portion of the photo. Manually resize
and drag the box to set the desired focus area.
·in the extra tools area, click the Remix button to generate a new version of the
slideshow.
·in the preview area, use the player controls to preview the slideshow.
Motion Slideshow
When customizing a Motion slideshow in the Slideshow Designer, you can perform
the following functions:
·in the slide area, click on a specific slideshow slide to view and edit it.
·in the editing area (Cropping area), use the Magic Motion Designer to
customize the motion on the slide. See Magic Motion Designer for detailed
instructions on using all its features.
·in the preview area, use the player controls to preview the slideshow.
Highlight Slideshow
When customizing a Highlight slideshow in the Slideshow Designer, you can
perform the following functions:
·in the slide area, click on a specific slideshow slide to view and edit it.
16
CyberLink PowerDirector Help
·in the extra tools area, select whether you want to edit the foreground or
background photo.
·in the editing area (Cropping area), resize and drag the box to the area of the
photo you want highlighted on the slide.
·in the preview area, use the player controls to preview the slideshow.
3D/Balloon/Frozen Space/Outer Space
Slideshow
When customizing a 3D, Frozen Space, or Future slideshow in the Slideshow
Designer, you can perform the following functions:
·in the slide area, click on a specific slideshow slide to view and edit it.
·in the editing area (Cropping area), resize and drag the box to the area of the
photo you want highlighted in the photo on the slide.
·click the Replace Background button if you want to import a custom image
to use as the slideshow's background.
Note: the slideshow background cannot be replaced for slideshows using
the Balloon template.
·in the preview area, use the player controls to preview the slideshow.
Time-Lapse Slideshow
When customizing a time-lapse slideshow in the Slideshow Designer, you can
specify the following settings:
Note: to create a time-lapse slideshow, you need to prepare the photos for it
ahead of time. This feature works best with a series of photos taken with a
camera that supports time-lapse photography.
·Duration of each image: in the field provided, specify how long you want each
of the imported images to display. Each image can display for as long as 99
frames, or as short as for 1 single video frame.
·For each displayed image, skip: when importing a large number of images
that were taken over a period of time, you may find the need to remove some
17
PowerDirector Editing Modes
of the images to reduce the slideshow's duration. In the field provided, enter
the number of images you want to remove for each displayed image in your
slideshow.
18
CyberLink PowerDirector Help
PowerDirector Workspace
Chapter 3:
This chapter outlines the CyberLink PowerDirector workspace, and all of its features.
The workspace in the Edit module is where you will spend most of your time when
using CyberLink PowerDirector, so getting familiar with everything it has to offer is
recommended.
A - Rooms, B - Import Media, C - PowerDirector Plug-ins, D - Library Window, E - Expandable
Workspace, F - Preview Window, G - Zoom In/Out, H - Undock Preview Window, I - 3D Display
Configuration, J - Enable/Disable 3D Mode, K - Preview Quality/Display Options, L - Take Snapshot,
M - Preview Player Controls, N - Editing Workspace, O - Range Selection, P - Function Buttons, Q -
Timeline Ruler, R - View Entire Movie, S - Track Manager, T - Timeline/Storyboard View
Rooms
The various rooms in the Edit module of CyberLink PowerDirector are where you
can access all of your media, effects, titles, and transitions when editing your video
production. You can also gain access to controls for recording and mixing audio,
adding chapters or subtitles. By default, the library window displays the Media
Room.
19
PowerDirector Workspace
Media Room
The Media Room provides access to your media library and the PowerDirector plug-
ins. The media library contains your video, audio, and image files. You can also
access a number of useful color boards and backgrounds for use in your video
productions, or view your library of saved and express projects.
Click to access the PowerDirector plug-ins. See PowerDirector Plug-ins for a
detailed description of the plug-ins and their available features.
Managing the Media Library
Use the button to manage the media in your media library. You can sort the
media, change the media thumbnail icon size, or select Details to view file
information instead of a thumbnail.
Note: if you cannot find this button when in the media library, you may need
to resize the preview window to reveal it. See Expanding the Workspace for
more information.
Other media library management options include:
Note: see Library Window for more information about the library menu
options available in all rooms.
·Export Library: select to export your entire media library as a file for backup,
in the PDL (PowerDirector Library) format.
·Import Library: select to import a media library PDL file, exported from
another project or version of CyberLink PowerDirector.
·Empty the Library: select to empty the entire contents of the media library.
·Remove All Unused Content from Library: select if you just want to remove
the media that is not being used in the current project.
Content Aware Details
When in the Media Room, you can select the Content Aware Details* option from
the library menu to view the analysis results for all the video clips analyzed and
20
CyberLink PowerDirector Help
edited in Content Aware Editing. Clips that were previously analyzed are indicated
by the green (good parts) and light brown (bad parts) dots in the specific columns.
Note: * optional feature in CyberLink PowerDirector. Check the version
table on our web site for detailed versioning information.
To analyze video clips in this view, select them in the Analyze column and then
click the Analyze button.
To edit a video clip using Content Aware Editing, click . If the video clip has
not yet been analyzed, CyberLink PowerDirector will do this first before opening the
Content Aware Editing window. See Content Aware Editing for more detailed
information on this feature.
Effect Room
The Effect Room contains a library of special effects that are used on the video files
and images in your project. For more information, see Adding Effects.
Note: the video effects with the 3D icon produce a 3D effect in 3D mode and
when outputted in 3D video productions.
PiP Objects Room
The PiP Objects Room contains a library of PiP objects, or graphics, that you can
add on top of the video or images on a video track. You can place PiP objects onto
any track in the timeline. The PiP Objects Room also includes paint animation
objects and access to the Paint Designer.
Note: the PiP objects with the 3D icon produce a 3D effect in 3D mode and
when outputted in 3D video productions.
There are four main types of objects in the PiP Objects Room:
·static graphics.
·motion graphics that move through clips.
·decorative borders that are added to frame your video.
·hand drawn paint animation objects you create in the Paint Designer.
21
PowerDirector Workspace
For information on adding PiP objects, see Adding PiP Objects. For information on
the hand drawn paint animation objects you can create in the Paint Designer, see
Using the Paint Designer.
Particle Room
The Particle Room contains a library of effects you can place on a video track to
add a particle object (snow, clouds, smoke, etc.) on top of a video or image on a
video track.
Note: the particle effects with the 3D icon produce a 3D effect in 3D mode
and when outputted in 3D video productions.
You can modify particles in the Particle Designer. For more information, see Adding
Particle Effects.
Title Room
The Title Room contains the library of title effects that when applied to your project,
add credits or comments to your production. For more information, see Adding
Title Effects.
Note: the title templates with the 3D icon produce a 3D effect in 3D mode
and when outputted in 3D video productions. See The Difference Between
3D and 3D-Like Effects to learn more about both types of effects.
Transition Room
The Transition Room contains transitions that you can use on or between clips in
your project. Transitions let you control how media appears and disappears in your
project, and changes from one clip to the next. For more information, see Using
Transitions.
Note: you can create your own custom transitions, or edit existing alpha
transitions, using the Transition Designer. See Modifying Alpha Transitions
in the Transition Designer for more information.
The transitions with the 3D icon produce a 3D effect in 3D mode and when
outputted in 3D video productions. See The Difference Between 3D and 3D-Like
Effects to learn more about both types of effects.
22
CyberLink PowerDirector Help
Audio Mixing Room
In the Audio Mixing Room you can use controls to mix all of the audio tracks in
your project. For more information, see Mixing Audio and Recording Voice-Overs.
Voice-Over Recording Room
In the Voice-Over Recording Room you can record a voice over for your video
production, while you are watching it play back. For more information, see
Recording Voice-Overs.
Chapter Room
In the Chapter Room* you can automatically or manually set chapter markers for
your project. Setting chapters on your final disc allows viewers to jump from the
menu page to the chapter markers you have set in order to navigate through your
disc. For more information, see Adding Chapters.
Note: * optional feature in CyberLink PowerDirector. Check the version
table on our web site for detailed versioning information.
Subtitle Room
In the Subtitle Room you can add subtitles to your video production manually or
through the import of a TXT, SRT, or MKV file. For more information, see Adding
Subtitles.
Library Window
The library window contains all of the media in CyberLink PowerDirector, including
your video, images, and audio files. When you are in other rooms (Effect Room, PiP
Objects Room, etc.), it contains the effects, titles, and transitions you apply to your
media.
The media content and available buttons that display in the library window depend
on the room you are currently in.
Click the button above the library window and then use the slider to adjust the
size of the media thumbnails in the library.
23
PowerDirector Workspace
You can also resize the media thumbnails by selecting a default size from the library
menu.
24
CyberLink PowerDirector Help
Explorer View
Select the button to display the explorer view within the library windows.
In the explorer view you can use tags to categorize the media, templates, and
effects in your library. This lets you quickly browse through and filter what is in
each room.
Note: you can also use tags to filter the express projects in your library.
See Using an Express Project for more information on express projects.
In the explorer view you can:
·click on to add a new tag in a library window.
·select an existing tag and then click to delete a previously created tag.
·filter the media in the library window by selecting an existing tag.
Searching the PowerDirector Library
If you are looking for specific media, effects, or templates in a library window, use
the search function to find it.
To search in the library, do this:
1. Enter in a keyword in the search field located on top of the library window.
2. CyberLink PowerDirector filters the content in the library window based on the
keywords entered.
25
PowerDirector Workspace
Note: click on to clear the search results.
Filtering Media in the Library
Use the available drop-down menus at the top of the library window to filter the
media that is displayed. For example, when viewing the media in the Media Room,
use the Media Content drop-down to display just your media content, the available
color boards, backgrounds, your saved projects, or to select a tag. Select Express
Projects to view a library of project templates you can use. See Using an Express
Project for more information.
If you'd like to filter the media files that are in the library by file type, use the three
buttons above the library window. Click these buttons to hide media so you can
more easily find what you are looking for.
26
CyberLink PowerDirector Help
27
PowerDirector Workspace
Library Menu
Click on to access the library menu. In the library menu you can sort the
content in a room by name, date created, file size, and more. You can also select all
the content in the room or change the media/effect thumbnail display size. Other
options that are available in the library menu, but are dependent on the specific
room you are in.
Note: if you cannot find this button when in the media library, you may need
to resize the preview window to reveal it. See Expanding the Workspace for
more information.
Expanding the Workspace
The look and layout of the CyberLink PowerDirector workspace is fully expandable
and customizable based on your personal preference.
28
CyberLink PowerDirector Help
Simply drag the borders of the preview window and timeline to resize them to your
liking. This allows you to get the most out of your display device space and
customize the size of the preview window and timeline as you work.
Note: you can also undock the preview window for a much larger timeline
and library view. See Undocking the Preview Window for more information.
Preview Window
While creating your video production, you can preview it in the preview window
using the available player controls.
29
PowerDirector Workspace
Preview Player Controls
With the player controls you can preview your production as you edit, including
playing your project from the current timeline position, or pausing and stopping
playback.
Click the Clip button to play back only the clip that is selected in the timeline, or
Movie to play the entire video production. When viewing media in Clip mode, the
cross hairs and grid lines/TV safe zone (if enabled) are visible to help with the
placement of the selected clip in the video display area. When in Movie mode,
these items are hidden.
Note: you can set PowerDirector to auto switch the playback mode to
Movie mode in Editing Preferences.
Use the button to select a seek by method (frame, second, minute, scene,
subtitle, chapter, segment) and then use the buttons on either side of it for a more
precise step through of your current production.
30
CyberLink PowerDirector Help
You can also click and drag the playback slider, or enter in a specific timecode in
the time field, and then press the enter key on your keyboard to quickly find a
specific scene.
Click the button to undock the preview window for a larger view of your
production. See Undocking the Preview Window for more information.
Taking a Screen Snapshot
While previewing your project, you can take a still 2D screen snapshot and save it as
a BMP, JPG, GIF, or PNG image file. You can also take a still 3D* screen snapshot
(just enable 3D mode) and then save it as an MPO or JPS image file. To do this click
the button on the player controls.
Note: * Optional feature in CyberLink PowerDirector. Check the version
table on our web site for detailed versioning information.
Before capture, you can set the image file format (or the default image file name)
on the File Preferences tab. See File Preferences for more information.
Preview/Display Options
CyberLink PowerDirector includes some preview and display options that help
make your editing experience easier. Click on to set the preview quality, show
the TV safe zone, display grid lines, or enable dual preview.
Note: you can set the default settings for these options in Display
Preferences.
Preview Quality
Click , select Preview Quality, and then a preview quality from the list (Full HD*,
HD*, high, normal, low) to set the resolution/quality of the video used when
previewing your movie in the preview window. The higher the quality you select,
the more resources that are required to preview your video project.
Note: Full HD and HD preview resolution are only available when the Ultra
or Ultimate version of CyberLink PowerDirector is installed on a 64-bit
operating system.
31
PowerDirector Workspace
Preview Mode
CyberLink PowerDirector provides two modes you can use to preview your video
production:
·Real-time Preview: synchronizes and renders clips and effects in real-time,
displaying a preview of your video at the specified frames per second. See the
timeline frame rate option in General Preferences for information on setting
the correct frame rate for your production.
·Non Real-time Preview: mutes the audio and displays a preview at a reduced
speed to help make editing go more smoothly. Useful when editing high-
definition video, using multiple PiP tracks on a less powerful computer, or
when you receive dropped frames when previewing. By muting the audio and
slowing down the video, CyberLink PowerDirector lets you view more frames
per second when your computer has trouble providing a smooth preview
during editing.
Note: you can also preview a portion of your video using the Render Preview
and Produce Range options. See Range Selection for more information on
these functions.
TV Safe Zone/Grid Lines
When you place media on the timeline, use the TV safe zone and grid lines to help
with the precise placement on your video project's image. These display options are
only available when in the Clip preview mode.
·Click the button and then select TV Safe Zone > On to enable a box that
indicates the on-screen area of most TV displays.
·Click the button, select Grid Lines, and then select the number of lines
you want to display in a grid over the video image. Use this grid to more
precisely place the PiP media and title text on the video image.
Once enabled, select Snap to Reference Lines* to have the selected objects snap to
the grid lines, TV safe zone, and the boundary of the preview window.
32
CyberLink PowerDirector Help
Dual Preview
If you have a secondary display device, such as a monitor, TV, or DV camcorder
connected to your computer, click the button and then select Dual Preview*
to extend your workspace and preview your project on a secondary display.
Note: to use a connected monitor or TV as a secondary preview window,
you must first enable extend desktop to a secondary display in the Windows
Display Properties Settings. * optional feature in CyberLink PowerDirector.
Check the version table on our web site for detailed versioning information.
Once enabled, when you click play in the preview window, you can preview your
production on both your primary and secondary display when Primary 2D and
Secondary 2D Display is selected. Select DV Camcorder to extend your production
preview to a connected DV camcorder device.
3D Dual Preview
When your desktop is extended to a secondary display, you can enable 3D on one
of the two devices. If you want one of your previews to be in 3D, select either
Primary 2D and Secondary 3D Display or Primary 3D and Secondary 2D Display to
enable it. Your selection depends on which device you want to enable, and which
one supports 3D.
Note: if both of your displays are 3D devices, you can only enable 3D on
one of the two devices in dual preview mode.
Zoom In/Out
When you place media on the timeline, use the Fit* drop-down underneath the
preview window to zoom in or out on the video. Zooming in is useful for precise
placement of media, while zooming out lets you add media that begins off screen.
Note: * optional feature in CyberLink PowerDirector. Check the version
table on our web site for detailed versioning information.
33
PowerDirector Workspace
Undocking the Preview Window
Click the button to undock the preview window. Once undocked, you can
preview your production at full screen or move it to an extended desktop. You can
also resize the timeline and library window to your liking.
Once undocked, you can:
·click to view your production at full screen, or to maximize the
preview window.
·click to minimize the preview window, and hide it so you can edit more
freely. Click on next to the APP button to show the minimized preview
window.
·click on to re-dock the preview window.
Playing 360° Media Files
After 360°* video and image files are imported into the media library, they can be
played back in 360° viewer mode. To play back a 360° media file in 360° viewer
mode, do this:
Note: see 360° Media Files for more information about imported 360°
videos and images. * optional feature in CyberLink PowerDirector. Check
the version table on our web site for detailed versioning information.
1. First, ensure your project's aspect ratio is set to 360. See Setting Project Aspect
Ratio for more information.
2. Select the 360° media file in the media library or on the project timeline.
3. Click to enable the 360° viewer mode.
4. If it is a video file, click the play button to start playing it back.
5. Use the 360 controls to view and explore the 360° environment.
Note: you can also click and drag your mouse in the preview window to
explore the 360° environment.
34
CyberLink PowerDirector Help
360 Controls
When you select or play 360° media files, there are extra 360° controls available in
the preview window.
When viewing or playing a 360° media file, you can click and drag on the preview
window to pan around the 360° environment or use the controls to pan left,
right, up, or down.
Note: you can also use your mouse's scroll wheel to zoom in and out within
the 360° view.
Previewing in 3D Mode
In the preview window you can enable 3D* mode to view the media in your
production in 3D, while you work.
35
PowerDirector Workspace
Note: for detailed information on adding and setting the source format of 3D
media, see 3D Media. * Optional feature in CyberLink PowerDirector.
Check the version table on our web site for detailed versioning information.
3D Configuration
Before you can enable 3D mode, you must first set your 3D display device.
To set your 3D display device, do this:
1. Select the 3D configuration menu underneath the preview window .
2. Select one of the following options:
·select your 3D display type from the list, i.e. 3D-Ready HDTV (Checkerboard),
Micro-polarizer LCD 3D (Row-Interleaved), 120Hz Time-sequential 3D LCD,
HDMI 1.4 Enabled 3D TV, etc.
·if you are not sure which type of 3D display you have, select the Auto Detect
3D Mode option to have CyberLink PowerDirector detect it for you.
·if you do not have a 3D display, select Anaglyph Red/Cyan mode and then use
anaglyphic (red/cyan) 3D glasses to view 3D content.
Enabling 3D Mode
Once you have set your 3D display device, you can enable 3D mode at any time to
preview your video production in 3D. To enable, just click the button.
Note: any 2D media in your production will not display in 3D. However, you
can convert all of the 2D media to 3D using TrueTheater 3D in Power Tools.
See Power Tools: 2D to 3D for more information.
To disable 3D mode, just click the button.
Editing Workspace
The editing workspace is where you create your project by adding your media,
various effects, transitions, and title effects. The editing workspace has two different
36
CyberLink PowerDirector Help
views, the timeline and storyboard views, which are accessed by clicking the
or button.
Note: you can set which workspace view is displayed by default in Editing
Preferences.
Timeline View
The timeline view lets you view your entire project based on running time. This view
is useful if you want to insert media, effects, subtitles, etc. at a specific moment in
production. The timeline view also provides a view of all the tracks, media, and
other content (chapter markers, subtitle markers) that are displayed in the timeline.
To switch to timeline view, click .
Timeline Tracks
The timeline contains the following tracks:
Track
Description
Video tracks contain your project's media clips (video clips and
images) and effects (PiP objects, particle effects, title effects, etc.)
on the timeline. By default, there are two video tracks in the
timeline, but you can have up to 100 video tracks by adding more
in the Track Manager. Each video track in the timeline may have
an associated audio track for the video clip's audio.
Audio tracks contain the audio in your project. The audio may be
the audio portion of a video clip on the video track, or a separate
audio track for music clips or other audio. By default there are
two audio tracks linked with a video track, and a separate audio
track for music, which is always the bottom track in the timeline.
You can have up to 100 audio tracks by adding more in the Track
Manager.
The effect track contains any special effects that you want to
apply to your final video. Video effects in the effect track are
applied to all the video tracks that are positioned above it in the
timeline.
37
PowerDirector Workspace
The title track contains the text title effects that appear in your
project. The titles you add to this track display over all the content
in every video track that display during their duration.
The voice track contains a narrative voice-over or other audio
clips.
The music track contains your video's soundtrack.
The chapter track contains all of the chapter markers in your
current video production. This track displays when you are in the
Chapter Room. Right-click on the timeline and then select Show
Chapter Track if you always want this track to display in the
timeline.
The subtitle track contains all of the subtitle markers in your
current video production. This track displays when you are in the
Subtitle Room. Right-click on the timeline and then select Show
Subtitle Track if you always want this track to display in the
timeline.
The SVRT track displays the Intelligent SVRT information for your
current project. See Utilizing Intelligent SVRT for more
information. Right-click on the timeline and then select Show
SVRT Track if you always want this track to display in the
timeline.
The clip marker track displays all of the clip markers on your
media clips. Clip markers are automatically added when using
Music Beat Detection or the Screen Recorder. Or they can be
added manually on each individual media clip on the timeline.
Right-click on the timeline and then select Show Clip Marker
Track if you always want this track to display in the timeline.
Timeline Behavior
The CyberLink PowerDirector timeline has several behavior features that make it
easy to manage media on the timeline.
On the timeline you can:
·place media clips at any position on a video track. If no media is placed before
a media clip on the timeline, your video production displays a black screen
until the timeline position of your media clip is reached.
38
CyberLink PowerDirector Help
·media clips will snap to other clips on the timeline for easy placement in your
production. If want to move the clips more freely on the timeline, you can
disable snap to clips in Editing Preferences.
·hold down the Ctrl key on the keyboard and select multiple media clips on the
timeline.
·click and drag the mouse to select multiple media clips on the timeline.
·right-click on select media in the timeline and select Group Objects. Doing
this allows you to move all the selected media clips as a group. Select
Ungroup Objects to once again allow for individual media clip movement.
Note: you cannot include transitions in grouped objects.
Timeline Ruler
You can resize the timeline ruler for a more expanded or condensed view of your
production. To resize the ruler, click on the ruler and drag it left or right.
Expanding the ruler is especially handy when aligning clips and effects, while
condensing it gives you a global overview of your entire production.
Click to auto fit your current project in the timeline area if you want to view the
entire movie in the editing workspace. You can also right-click on the timeline ruler
and select View Entire Mov ie to do this. Or select Zoom In or Zoom Out to change
the view to your required size.
Use the timeline ruler slider located in the bottom left
corner to manually resize the timeline.
Timeline Markers
You can add timeline markers* to the timeline ruler for more precise media
placement on the timeline. Once added, media clips snap to the timeline markers,
39
PowerDirector Workspace
allowing your media to appear in your video production at the exact moment you
want it.
Note: * optional feature in CyberLink PowerDirector. Check the version
table on our web site for detailed versioning information.
Adding Timeline Markers
To add a timeline marker, do this:
1. Hover your mouse over the timeline ruler. The green timeline marker indicator
displays with the displayed time.
Note: use the timeline ruler to expand the timeline for a more precise
placement of timeline markers.
2. Once you have found the time where you want to place the timeline, right-
click on the ruler and then select Add Timeline Marker.
3. Input a Note for the new timeline marker, if required.
4. Click on OK to add the new timeline marker.
Once a timeline marker is added, media will snap to it when added to a track in the
timeline.
40
CyberLink PowerDirector Help
Note: you can manually drag a timeline marker to different position if the
original is not in the exact location you wanted it. Expand the timeline ruler
for a more precise placement, if necessary.
Right-click on the timeline ruler and then select Edit Timeline Markers to view a list
of all the timeline markers you have added. In this list you can remove any of the
existing markers, or double-click in the Note column to edit the associated text.
Clip Markers
You can manually add markers to a selected clip in the timeline. Once added,
media clips and effects snap to the clip markers, allowing for more precise editing.
Adding Clip Markers
To add a clip marker, do this:
1. First, ensure that the clip marker track is displayed. To display it, right click on
the timeline and then select Show Clip Marker Track.
2. Select the clip on the timeline.
3. Drag the timeline slider to the moment/time position in the clip where you
want to add the marker.
41
PowerDirector Workspace
4. Right-click at the timeline slider position on the clip marker track,
and then select Add Clip Marker.
5. Input a Note for the new clip marker, if required.
6. Click on OK to add the new timeline marker.
Once a clip marker is added, media and effects will snap to it when added to a track
in the timeline.
42
CyberLink PowerDirector Help
Note: you can manually drag a clip marker to different position if the
original is not in the exact location you wanted it. Also, if you move the
media clip to another position on the timeline, its clip markers move with it.
Function Buttons
When you select media that is on the timeline, whether it's a video clip, image,
audio clip, effect, title effect, etc., several function buttons display above the
timeline. These buttons let you perform a variety of tasks or gain access to some
important features of CyberLink PowerDirector.
The function buttons that are available depend on the type of media content you
select. However, whenever you select media, the and buttons are
always displayed. Click to remove the selected media content from the
timeline, or to gain access to more timeline functions, which vary
depending on the selected media.
Magic Tools
When editing your video project in the timeline, you can click the button to
use the magic tools to edit and touch up your audio, video, and image clips. Magic
tools can also help you add a creative style to your video production or add the
right background music.
CyberLink PowerDirector offers the following magic tools:
·Magic Movie Wizard: automatically creates an edited video blended with
stylish effects and transitions.
43
PowerDirector Workspace
·Magic Fix: fixes and enhances your photos and videos, including fixing shaky
video, enhancing video quality, removing red-eye, and enhancing the focus
on photos.
·Magic Motion: applies zooms and pans to your images. You can also use the
Magic Motion Designer to manually customize motion on an image.
·Magic Cut: condenses long video segments into shorter clips that contain only
the best moments.
·Magic Style: creates professional videos with pre-designed style templates
automatically.
Click on the button within these tools to consult the iHelp for assistance on
using them.
Range Selection
Click and drag one of the arrows on either side of the timeline slider to select a
range* of media on the timeline.
Note: * optional feature in CyberLink PowerDirector. Check the version
table on our web site for detailed versioning information.
Once selected, right click on the selection, select Loop Playback, and then click the
play button if you want to continuously play back of the selected range. You can
also cut or copy the range, and then paste it to another position on the timeline.
You can also use this feature to manually highlight a portion of a clip that you want
to then remove or trim out.
Click R ender Prev iew to have CyberLink PowerDirector render a video preview of
only the highlighted range for playback in the preview window. Click Produce
Range to produce just the selected range in the Produce window, outputting it as a
video file that will be added to the media library.
44
CyberLink PowerDirector Help
Click Lock Range if you want to lock the selected range. Once locked, you can
more easily preview and even add additional media into the range for previewing,
rendering, or producing. Click Lock Range again to unlock the selected range.
Track Manager
In the Track Manager* you can add additional video and audio tracks to the
timeline. You can have up to 100 video tracks (with or without an audio track) in the
timeline, or add up to 98 additional audio tracks.
Note: * optional feature in CyberLink PowerDirector. Check the version
table on our web site for detailed versioning information.
Adding Tracks to Timeline
Each video track you add, adds another layer of PiP video on the tracks above it in
the timeline.
To add tracks to the timeline, do this:
Note: CyberLink PowerDirector auto adds a video and audio track for you
when all the current video/audio tracks in the timeline have media on them.
1. In the timeline view, click on to open the Track Manager.
2. In the Video section, enter in the number of video tracks you want to add to
the timeline. By default, one track is added, but you can add up to 98 video
tracks (100 in total) to the timeline, as required.
Note: if you don't want your additional video tracks to have a track for its
audio, enter in 0 tracks in the Audio section.
3. In the Video section, select the Position in the timeline where you want to add
the tracks.
4. In the Audio section, enter in the number of audio tracks you want to add to
the timeline. By default, one track is added, but you can add up to 98 audio
tracks (100 in total) to the timeline, as required.
45
PowerDirector Workspace
Note: if you only want to add an audio track (i.e. without a linked video
track), enter in 0 tracks in the Video section.
5. In the Audio section, select the Position in the timeline where you want to add
the tracks.
6. Click on OK to add the tracks to the timeline.
To quickly remove any unwanted tracks from the timeline, just right-click on the
timeline and then select Remove Empty Tracks.
Customizing Timeline Tracks
In CyberLink PowerDirector you can customize the layout of the workspace timeline
and its tracks to fit your preference.
Customizing Track Names
To make it easy to identify all of your tracks if you have lots of media on multiple
tracks, drag the left sidebar to reveal the track names.
You can give all the tracks in the timeline a custom name as required.
46
CyberLink PowerDirector Help
Reordering Tracks
You can reorder the video tracks in the timeline if required. To reorder, click on the
left sidebar and drag the track to the new position in the timeline.
You can also drag the effect track to a new position in the timeline. Effects on the
effect track are applied to all video tracks that are positioned above it in the
timeline.
Adjusting Track Height
Click and drag the bottom of a track on the left sidebar to resize it to your
preference.
You can also right-click on the timeline and select Adjust Video Track Height to
adjust the height of all the video tracks in the timeline to one of the default sizes.
Select Adjust Audio Track Height to resize all of the audio tracks, including the
music track, voice track, and each video track's corresponding audio track.
Locking/Unlocking Tracks
47
PowerDirector Workspace
To lock a track in the timeline, click at the left of the track. When a track is
locked, you cannot add new clips to the track, or move or edit the clips it contains.
To unlock a track in the timeline, click to the left of the track.
Enable/Disable Tracks
To disable a track in the timeline*, deselect to the left of the track. When a track
is disabled, the media it contains is not displayed in the Preview window. This
allows you to preview your project by tracks so you can concentrate on the track
you are working on.
Note: * optional feature in CyberLink PowerDirector. Check the version
table on our web site for detailed versioning information.
To enable a track in the timeline, select to the left of the track.
Storyboard View
The storyboard view is essentially a large graphical display, or storyboard, of all your
video clips and images on the first track in the timeline. You can use it to visualize
the main scenes and overall production more clearly.
To switch to storyboard view, click .
Note: some features are unavailable in the storyboard view. If you try to
perform a function that is unavailable, the program switches back to the
timeline view.
Added transitions and effects are now viewable and editable in the storyboard view.
Just select the "i" icon and then the Effect function button to edit added effects, or
select the transition icon and then Modify to customize the transition settings.
48
CyberLink PowerDirector Help
To add background music in storyboard view, just click the button and then do
this in the Add Background Music dialog:
1. Click the button.
2. Select the audio file you want to use as the background music.
3. Use the slider to mix the audio level, by deciding whether to have more
background music (More music) or the original video's audio (More video) in
the production.
4. Click the OK button.
49
PowerDirector Projects
PowerDirector Projects
Chapter 4:
When working on a new video production, click the button to save it as a .pds
file, a project file format that is used exclusively by CyberLink PowerDirector. These
project files can be imported directly into the timeline, if required. See Importing
PowerDirector Projects for more information.
Note: a CyberLink PowerDirector project (.pds) file essentially contains a
list of the media clips and effects used in your project, and a log of all the
edits you want to make to your media. Project files do not include the media
clips in them. If you want to save all your video production files in one place,
use the Pack Project Materials function. To do this select, File > Pack
Project Materials from the menu.
Use the options in the File menu to save, create new, or open existing projects in
CyberLink PowerDirector. When you create a new project, CyberLink PowerDirector
resets your media library. If you want to create a new video production using the
same media that's currently in your library, select File > New Workspace.
Note: saved PowerDirector projects are now easily accessible in the media
library, and they are also reusable. See Reusing PowerDirector Projects for
more information.
If you have a CyberLink Cloud subscription you can upload saved projects and
more to CyberLink Cloud*. See CyberLink Cloud Projects for more information.
Note: * optional feature in CyberLink PowerDirector. Check the version
table on our web site for detailed versioning information.
The changes you make to your media in CyberLink PowerDirector do not affect the
original media you imported into the program. Since your edits are all saved in the
project file, you can trim, edit, or remove clips, but still keep your original files on
your hard drive, untouched. So let yourself get creative. If you end up changing
things too drastically, you can always start over.
Setting Project Aspect Ratio
To set the aspect ratio for your project, and your outputted video, select 4:3, 16:9,
9:16*, or 360* from the aspect ratio drop-down at the top of the window.
50
CyberLink PowerDirector Help
When you select 360, your project will actually have an aspect ratio of 2:1 and is for
users wanting to create and produce 360 virtual reality videos. See 360° Video
Projects for information about the restrictions of 360 projects, and Playing 360°
Media Files for more information on the extra preview window controls available in
these types of projects.
If you want to create/output a vertical video or video for playback on a portrait
monitor, you should select the 9:16 aspect ratio.
If some of the video clips you want to use in video production have a different
aspect, you can adjust their aspect ratio once in the timeline. See Adjusting Video
Clip Aspect Ratio for more information.
Note: * optional feature in CyberLink PowerDirector. Check the version
table on our web site for detailed versioning information.
360° Video Projects
360°* video projects let you create virtual reality videos you can output as a video
file, or upload to YouTube or Facebook.
Note: if an imported 360° media file is not displaying correctly (no 360°
logo), it usually means the file is in the RAW format and was not converted
(stitched) for playback. The 360° media file must be stitched before it can
be used in a 360° video project in CyberLink PowerDirector. See the
documentation for your 360 camera manufacturer for information on
stitching the files for viewing and editing. * this feature is not available in
some versions of CyberLink PowerDirector.
To play a 360° media file, just select it in the media library and then use the
playback and 360 controls. See Playing 360° Media Files for more information. If you
want to render (produce) or upload your imported 360° media files, you first need to
add them to the timeline. See Adding Media to the Workspace for detailed
information.
51
PowerDirector Projects
Once added to the timeline you can produce it right away, or make some edits to
the media file. When editing 360° videos, please note the following:
·you can add more than one 360° media file on the timeline. In the produced
360° video, the media files will play in the order they are arranged on the
timeline. You can use transitions between the media files if required, or add
title effects in the Title Designer.
·the adding of non-360° media files or effects is not recommended, as the
content will appear distorted in the produced 360° video file.
·see the Editing Your Media section for information on some of the editing you
can perform on your 360° media files. You can split, trim, or make color
adjustments on 360° video clips that are on the timeline, and more.
·in the Action Camera Center you can speed up portions of the 360° video and
more.
Once you are done editing your 360° video, click the Produce button to produce it,
which renders it as a 360° video file. See Producing a 360° Video for more
information. You can also upload it directly to YouTube or Facebook. See
Uploading a 360° Video for more information.
Features Not Available in 360 Projects
The follow is a list of PowerDirector features that are not available when editing a
360° video project:
·Magic Movie
·Magic Style
·Theme Designer
·Video Crop
·2D to 3D in PowerTools
·Lens Correction
·Video Stabilizer
·3D Orientation
·Express Projects
52
CyberLink PowerDirector Help
·Motion Tracking
·Content Aware Editing
·MultiCam Designer
·Create Disc
·Chapter Room
Exporting Projects
You can export your CyberLink PowerDirector projects by writing them to a DV
tape, or by packing all the materials in a folder on your computer's hard drive or
CyberLink Cloud*. Exported projects can then be imported into another computer
running CyberLink PowerDirector.
Note: * optional feature in CyberLink PowerDirector. Check the version
table on our web site for detailed versioning information.
To export your project to a DV tape select File > Export > Write to DV Tape. To
export it to a folder select File > Pack Project Materials. If you have a CyberLink
Cloud subscription you can select File > Pack Project Materials and Upload to
CyberLink Cloud to back up all the media files, and the project file, in a folder on
CyberLink Cloud.
Reusing PowerDirector Projects
All projects created in CyberLink PowerDirector are now reusable, allowing you to
use them as templates for your future productions. To access all your saved
projects, make sure you are in the Media Room, and then do either of the following:
Note: reusing your projects is similar to express projects, except you
replace your media instead of the media placeholders. See Using an
Express Project for more information.
·click to open the explorer view and then click My Projects.
·select My Projects from the Media Content drop-down.
53
PowerDirector Projects
Note: to play back a saved project, just double-click on it in the media
library.
To reuse a saved project, just select it in the media library and then drag and drop it
to a desired position on the timeline. You can also insert the saved project
anywhere within a current project by dragging and dropping it to the desired
position on the timeline. Saved projects can be added to the timeline in the exact
same way as media clips. See Adding Media to the Workspace for detailed
information on adding content to the timeline.
Note: when you add a saved project to the timeline, all of its media is
automatically added back into the media library.
Once the saved project is in the timeline, you can simply replace all of the existing
media clips, templates, and effects with the content you want to use in your new
production. To do this, just drag the media clips/effects/templates to the desired
positions on the timeline, hovering over the clip/effect/template you want to
replace, drop it, and then select Replace. This replaces the current content with the
new content you want to add, without changing the structure of the project.
54
CyberLink PowerDirector Help
55
PowerDirector Projects
Note: if a media clip you are replacing is shorter than a newly added video/
audio clip, CyberLink PowerDirector automatically trims the video/audio clip
to fit the space. For all other media clips, CyberLink PowerDirector
automatically resizes them to fit the original clip's duration.
CyberLink Cloud Projects
If you have a CyberLink Cloud subscription you can select File > Upload Project to
CyberLink Cloud to store project files on the CyberLink Cloud* service from
CyberLink.
Note: * optional feature in CyberLink PowerDirector. Check the version
table on our web site for detailed versioning information.
To download a project that was saved on CyberLink Cloud, including projects that
were packed in a folder with their media (materials), select Download Project from
56
CyberLink PowerDirector Help
CyberLink Cloud from the File menu. In the window that displays, select a project
and then click Download.
Note: when you open a packed project stored on CyberLink Cloud, the
project file and all the project media is downloaded to your local computer
and stored in the download folder specified in CyberLink Cloud
Preferences.
57
Importing Media into PowerDirector
Importing Media into
PowerDirector
Chapter 5:
You can import media in a wide variety of formats into CyberLink PowerDirector, in
many different ways. Whether you need to capture media from external sources,
import media that is already on your computer's hard drive, or download it from
the Internet. CyberLink PowerDirector makes it easy to get all your media into the
program quickly, so you can start working on your video production.
Note: media you import is saved in the current CyberLink PowerDirector
project you are working on. If you create a new project, you will be asked if
you want to merge the media in your library into the new project. You can
also select File > New Workspace to create a new project, while
maintaining the current media in the library.
Importing Media Files
If you already have video, audio, and image files that you want to use in your
production on your computer's hard drive, you can import the files directly into
CyberLink PowerDirector's media library in the Media Room. You can also import
media files that are on a removable device.
Note: if you import media files that are on a removable device into the
media library, they will be removed if the removable device is disconnected.
For best results, it is recommended that you copy the media to your
computer's hard drive before importing.
CyberLink PowerDirector supports the following file formats:
Note: for a more complete and up-to-date list of the supported file formats,
and supported devices, please visit out web site: http://www.cyberlink.com/
products/powerdirector-ultimate/spec_en_US.html.
Image: Animated-GIF, BMP, GIF, JPEG, PNG, TIFF
3D Image Format: JPS*, MPO*
CyberLink PowerDirector also supports the import of the following camera RAW
image formats, which are then converted to JPEG once imported: ARW (SONY), CR2
(Canon), DNG (Ricoh), ERF (Epson), KDC (Kodak), MRW (Konica Minolta), NEF (Nikon),
58
CyberLink PowerDirector Help
NRW (Nikon), ORF (OLYMPUS), PEF (Pentax), RAF (Fujifilm), RW2 (Panasonic), SR2
(SONY), SRF (SONY)
Video: 3GPP2, AVI, DAT, DivX**, DV-AVI, DVR-MS*, FLV (H.264), HD MPEG-2, M2T*,
MKV (H.264, H.265), MOD*, MOV, MOV (H.264), MP4, MPEG-1*, MPEG-2*, MPEG-4
AVC (H.264)*, MPEG-4 HEVC (H.265)*, MTS*, TOD*, VOB*, VRO*, WMV, WMV-HD,
WTV*, XAVC S*
Note: ** to enable, you must download the DivX codec online. Available on
Windows 32-bit only.
3D Video Format: Dual-stream AVI, MVC*, Side-by-Side Video*, Over/Under Video
Audio: AAC, ALAC, M4A, MP3, OGG, WAV, WMA
Note: * optional feature in CyberLink PowerDirector. Check the version
table on our web site for detailed versioning information.
To import media into CyberLink PowerDirector, click and then select one of the
following options:
·Import Media Files: import media files individually.
·Import a Media Folder: import the entire contents of a folder that contains the
media files you want to use in your current project.
Note: you can also drag and drop media onto the CyberLink PowerDirector
window to import it into the program.
360° Media Files
You can import and edit video and image files that were recorded with a 360*
camera. Once imported, the 360° video files are automatically detected and
indicated by a 360° logo in the top right of the thumbnail.
Note: if an imported 360° video file is not displaying correctly (no 360°
logo), it usually means the file is not using the 360 equirectangular
projection video format required for editing. See the documentation for your
360 camera manufacturer for information on producing the video file in this
format. * this feature is not available in some versions of CyberLink
PowerDirector.
59
Importing Media into PowerDirector
See Playing 360° Media Files for information on the additional preview controls
available in the preview window for these types of videos.
Setting 360 Projection Format
If CyberLink PowerDirector did not detect your 360° video file and you are sure it
has been produced for playback and editing, you can manually set the 360
projection format. You can also disable 360° mode for a file that was mistakenly
detected as a 360° video file.
Note: if you want to use 360° video clips and images in a 2D video
production, you still need to set the correct 360 projection format to ensure
the media displays properly in 2D.
To set the 360 projection format, do this:
1. Right-click on a 360° media file in the media library and then select Set 360
Projection Format.
2. Select the 360 projection format by selecting one of the following:
·Equirectangular (360°): equirectangular video is the standard projection used
in 360° video. Equirectangular projection displays the 360° video environment,
which is a sphere, onto a rectangular video screen.
·2D Format (Not 360°): select this option if the selected media file is actually
2D content.
Note: if you want to use 360° video clips in a conventional video production,
setting the projection format as 2D is not going to help. You will need to
create the conventional video using the 360° footage in the View Designer.
3D Media
CyberLink PowerDirector supports various 3D* video and image formats. You can
use 3D media to create both 3D videos, and standard 2D video productions. All 3D
media in the library is indicated by a 3D icon in the top left of its thumbnail.
Note: click the button to enable 3D mode to view the 3D content during
the editing process. For more information on enabling 3D mode and
configuring your 3D display settings, see Previewing in 3D Mode. * Optional
feature in CyberLink PowerDirector. Check the version table on our web
site for detailed versioning information.
60
CyberLink PowerDirector Help
You can use and arrange 3D video clips and images in your video productions the
same way you use 2D media. However, note that if you want to create a 3D video
production, any 2D media in your project must be converted to 3D before
production. See PowerTools: 2D to 3D for more information.
Setting 3D Source Format
When 3D media is imported into the media library, you may need to set the format
of the 3D source video. This is because 3D media comes in a variety of different
video source formats. CyberLink PowerDirector needs to know the source format of
each 3D media file so that it can display it properly in 3D.
Note: if you want to use 3D video clips and images in a 2D video
production, you still need to set the correct 3D source format to ensure the
media displays properly in 2D. CyberLink PowerDirector will incorporate the
specified eye frames into your 2D video.
To set the 3D source format of your 3D media, do this:
1. Right-click on a 3D media file in the media library and then select Set 3D
Source Format. If the media file is on the timeline, right-click on it, select Set
Clip Attributes, and then Set 3D Source Format. The Set 3D Source Format
window displays.
2. Select the 3D source format by selecting one of the following:
·Auto Detect 3D Source Format: if you are not sure what the source format is
of your 3D video, click this button to have CyberLink PowerDirector
automatically detect and set it for you.
·2D: select this option if the selected media file is actually 2D content.
·Side by side format: select this option if the 3D content has two different
images side by side. CyberLink PowerDirector merges the two images to
produce the 3D effect.
·Over/Under format: select this option if the 3D content has two different
video images, one on top of the other. CyberLink PowerDirector merges the
two images to produce the 3D effect.
·Multiview video coding: select this option if the 3D content is in the MVC
video format (.mts or .m2ts file format).
·Dual view format: select this option if the 3D content is in the dual view
source format (.avi file format).
61
Importing Media into PowerDirector
3. From the drop-down available, Specify whether to display the left or right eye
frame first. Use this feature if while editing or playing back 3D content you
begin to feel uncomfortable or uneasy. This may be because the layout of the
3D image is displayed differently than most standard content. If this occurs,
try selecting the opposite eye view. This switches the way the 3D content is
displayed on your display device, and may reduce the discomfort.
4. Click OK to set your changes to the selected media file.
The Difference Between 3D and 3D-Like
Effects
In supported versions of CyberLink PowerDirector, there are both 3D effects* and
effects that have "3D-Like" properties.
Like 3D media that can be imported into the library, 3D effects* are composed of
two images from slightly different perspectives. 3D effects have one image for the
left eye, and one image for the right eye. When these images are viewed together
with compatible 3D hardware and software, they produce an effect that gives the
perception of depth. In supported versions of CyberLink PowerDirector, you can
enable this type of 3D effect for PiP media, particle effects, title effects, and on disc
menus. The video effects and transitions indicated with the 3D icon on their
thumbnail, also have these 3D effect properties when viewed and included in 3D
video productions.
Some title effects, transitions, and other features in CyberLink PowerDirector have
3D-Like properties. Available in all versions of the program, these effects are simply
3D animations that only consist of one image. 3D-Like effects do not produce a 3D
depth effect when viewed in 3D mode.
Note: * optional feature in CyberLink PowerDirector. Check the version
table on our web site for detailed versioning information.
Importing PowerDirector Projects
CyberLink PowerDirector projects (.pds files) you worked on and saved previously
can be imported and then directly inserted into your video production's timeline.
To do this, select File > Insert Project from the menu. All of the media in the
original project will be imported into the current project's media library, and also
inserted at the current position of the timeline slider.
62
CyberLink PowerDirector Help
Capturing Media
CyberLink PowerDirector lets you capture media from a variety of sources directly
into the media library. Click the Capture button to enter the Capture module.
In the Capture module, the program appears as follows:
A - Capture from a DV Camcorder, B - Capture from an HDV Camcorder, C - Capture from a TV Signal,
D - Capture from a Digital TV Signal, E - Capture from a Webcam, F - Capture from a Microphone, G -
Capture from a CD, H - Capture from an External or Optical Device, I - Capture Desktop with Screen
Recorder, J - Capture Preview Window, K - Captured Content, L - Quality Profile Setup, M - Capture
Settings (Drive), N - Capture Player Controls, O - Capture Preferences
Capturing from a DV Camcorder
You can capture video content that you recorded with a DV camcorder. Use the
capture from a DV camcorder option only if your camcorder connects to your
computer using an IEEE 1394 (FireWire) cable. You can capture a single scene or a
number of scenes in a batch from your camcorder.
Note: to add a text remark, date, or timecode to the video you are capturing,
click on the button in capture preferences area to enable it. See
Capture Preferences for more information.
63
Importing Media into PowerDirector
If your DV camcorder connects to your computer via a USB connection, just import
the video files directly from your camcorder, as if it was another hard drive on your
computer. See Importing Media for information on importing video files onto your
computer.
Capturing a Single Scene
You can capture a single segment of video from your camcorder using the capture
player controls (record, stop, fast forward, rewind, etc.) underneath the capture
preview window. This function is particularly useful, for example, if you want to
acquire a long video segment in its entirety without skipping over sections.
DV Backup
The DV Backup* feature lets you back up the digital video from your DV camcorder
directly to DVD using CyberLink PowerDirector.
Insert a blank DVD disc into your disc drive and then click the button to begin
backing up your video.
Note: this feature requires a DVD burner. * Optional feature in CyberLink
PowerDirector. Check the version table on our web site for detailed
versioning information.
Batch Capture from a DV Camcorder
With Batch Capture, CyberLink PowerDirector scans your DV camcorder for intervals
or scenes (or allows you to set them manually) on the tape, and then captures these
scenes as separate video files and imports each of them into the program.
Automatic Batch Capture
If you want CyberLink PowerDirector to auto capture and import each of the
intervals/scenes on your DV camcorder, click the button on the DV
Camcorder tab.
64
CyberLink PowerDirector Help
An interval/scene is the content you recorded each time you pressed record and
then stop during the video shooting process. For help on using this function, use
the tips on the user interface.
Manual Batch Capture
Using manual batch capture* gives you more control over the capturing process
and ensures that the scenes you want to include are captured. Manual batch
capture is recommended when you know which scenes you want to capture and
have a good idea where they are located on the tape.
Click the button to access the manual batch capture feature. For help on
using this function, use the helpful tips on the user interface.
Note: * optional feature in CyberLink PowerDirector. Check the version
table on our web site for detailed versioning information.
Capturing from an HDV Camcorder
You can capture video footage you shot with an HDV* camcorder. Use the capture
from an HDV camcorder option only if your camcorder connects to your computer
using an IEEE 1394 (FireWire) cable. To a capture scene from your HDV camcorder,
use the capture player controls (record, stop, fast forward, rewind, etc.) underneath
the capture preview window.
If your HDV camcorder connects to your computer via a USB connection, just
import the video files directly from your camcorder, as if it was another hard drive
on your computer. See Importing Media for information on importing video files
onto your computer.
Note: * optional feature in CyberLink PowerDirector. Check the version
table on our web site for detailed versioning information.
Capturing from a TV Signal
If your computer has a TV* tuner card installed and you want to capture segments
from your favorite programs, select this option. To capture, use the capture player
controls (record, stop, change channel, etc.) underneath the capture preview
window.
65
Importing Media into PowerDirector
Note: * optional feature in CyberLink PowerDirector. Check the version
table on our web site for detailed versioning information.
Capturing from a Digital TV Signal
If your computer has a TV tuner card installed that receives a digital* TV signal and
you want to capture segments from your favorite programs, select this option. To
capture, use the capture player controls (record, stop, change channel, etc.)
underneath the capture preview window.
Note: this feature is not available in all regions. * Optional feature in
CyberLink PowerDirector. Check the version table on our web site for
detailed versioning information.
Capturing from a Webcam
You can record live content with a webcam that is attached to your computer and
then import it directly into your CyberLink PowerDirector media library. To capture,
use the capture player controls (record, stop, etc.) underneath the capture preview
window.
Capturing from a Microphone
Select this option to record audio with a microphone that is attached to your
computer. To capture, use the capture player controls (record, stop, etc.)
underneath the capture preview window.
Capturing from a CD
Use this option to rip your favorite music, or other audio, from an audio CD. To
capture, use the capture player controls (record, play, stop, next/previous track, etc.)
underneath the capture preview window.
Capturing from an AVCHD Camcorder
You can capture video content that is on an external device, such as an AVCHD
camcorder. Use the capture from an AVCHD camcorder option only if your
camcorder connects to your computer using an IEEE 1394 (FireWire) cable. To a
capture scene from your AVCHD camcorder, use the capture player controls
(record, stop, etc.) underneath the capture preview window.
66
CyberLink PowerDirector Help
If your AVCHD camcorder connects to your computer via a USB connection, just
import the video files directly from your camcorder, as if it was another hard drive
on your computer. See Importing Media for information on importing video files
onto your computer.
Note: * optional feature in CyberLink PowerDirector. Check the version
table on our web site for detailed versioning information.
Capturing from an Optical Device
You can capture content from an optical device, such as video scenes from a DVD.
To capture, use the capture player controls (record, play, stop, next/previous frame,
etc.) underneath the capture preview window. You can also use the DVD disc
structure tree to quickly select the titles and chapters you want to capture.
Note: some DVDs are protected by technology that does not allow you to
capture the content they contain. * Optional feature in CyberLink
PowerDirector. Check the version table on our web site for detailed
versioning information.
Capture Desktop with Screen Recorder
CyberLink PowerDirector's Screen Recorder lets you capture a video of your mouse
movements on your computer's desktop. See Recording Your Desktop with the
Screen Recorder for a detailed description of this feature.
Captured Content
All of the media you capture in the capture window is displayed in the Captured
Content area. When you return to the Edit module, all of the media is automatically
imported into your media library.
In the Captured Content area you can right-click on media to perform a number of
options, including detecting scenes in video clips and deleting unwanted content
so that it won't import into the Edit module.
The content captured in CyberLink PowerDirector is stored in the folder noted
underneath the Captured Content area. If you want to store it in a different location,
click the Change Folder button and select a different folder.
67
Importing Media into PowerDirector
Quality Profile Setup
To set the file format and quality of the media you capture, click the Profile button.
If this button is grayed out, that means that the original format and quality of the
media is maintained, as set on the original media device (camcorder, etc.).
The profile settings that are available depend on the capture device connected and
the capture mode you have selected.
Capture Settings
Use the Settings button to configure the set up of your selected capture device. The
capture settings that are available depend on the capture device connected and the
capture mode you have selected.
Note: when capturing from a DVD, this button reads Drive, allowing you to
select the specific disc drive you want to capture from.
Capture Preferences
Before capturing media, you can set the preferences for your captured content. The
capture preferences that are available, depend on the content you are capturing.
Set the capture preferences as follows:
·to set a maximum capture length, select Time limit and then enter a time in
the timecode box.
·to set a maximum captured file size, select Size limit and then enter a size
limit (in MB).
·to add a text remark, date stamp, or time stamp to the video being captured,
click on the button. In the Add Text Overlay window, select which type
and display format of text overlay you want to include on your recorded video
on the Text tab. Select the Format tab to set the font and text position for the
text.
·to take a still photo of a frame of video for use in your project, just click on
at the point where you want to take the snapshot. The image is saved to
the Captured content area. You can specify your preferred snapshot image file
format in preferences. See File Preferences for detailed information.
68
CyberLink PowerDirector Help
·select Non real-time when capturing from a camcorder to continue
processing captured video after the original video stops playing in order to
ensure that no frames are dropped.
·select Begin with fade-in to add fade-in to audio captured with a microphone.
·select End with fade-out to add fade-out to audio captured with a
microphone.
·select Record at maximum speed to record CD audio at a higher speed.
Capturing at a higher speed reduces processing time, but yields audio of a
lower quality.
Downloading Media
If you feel that you do not have enough media for your project, or you are looking
for specific media to make your creation just perfect, in the Edit module you can
download media from Flickr, DirectorZone, and CyberLink Cloud* into the media
room library.
Note: * optional feature in CyberLink PowerDirector. Check the version
table on our web site for detailed versioning information.
To display all the current downloaded media in the media library, select
Downloaded from the Media Content drop-down.
Downloading Photos From Flickr
You can download your own photos directly from your account on Flickr into
CyberLink PowerDirector. You can also search for and browse other user’s photos
from within CyberLink PowerDirector, and then import them into your media
library for use in a project.
69
Importing Media into PowerDirector
To download photos from Flickr, do this:
1. Click on and then select Download Photos from Flickr.
2. Follow the steps in the wizard window to authorize CyberLink PowerDirector
to use your Flickr account and accept the Terms of Use from Flickr.
Note: having a Flickr account is not required to search for, browse, and
download photos from Flickr.
3. Select from the drop-down whether to search for photos from:
·My Photos on Flickr: this option displays thumbnails of all the photos you
have uploaded to your Flickr account.
·My Contacts' Photos: this option displays thumbnails of all the photos your
Flickr contacts have uploaded to Flickr.
·Search for Photos on Flickr: select this option to perform a search for photos
on Flickr.
Note: use the drop-down filter menu at the top of the search window to sort
the photos.
4. Select all of the photos that you want to import into your media library and
then click on the Download button.
Note: you cannot use the photos downloaded into your media library for
commercial use. Click on the button underneath a photo thumbnail to
view its copyright information.
Downloading Content from
DirectorZone/CyberLink Cloud
You can download templates and effects created by CyberLink and other
PowerDirector users from DirectorZone. Users that have a CyberLink Cloud
subscription can also download any effects and templates you backed up on
CyberLink Cloud*.
Note: * optional feature in CyberLink PowerDirector. Check the version
table on our web site for detailed versioning information.
70
CyberLink PowerDirector Help
Downloading Effects and Templates from
DirectorZone
If you are looking for additional PiP objects, paint animation objects, title effects,
particle effects, or disc menu templates for your library, you can click Download
Templates to download them directly from the DirectorZone web site in to the PiP
Objects Room, Particle Room, Title Room, or Create Disc module.
When in the Edit module's Media Room, you can download sound clips into the
media library. To do this, click on and then select Download Sound Clips from
DirectorZone.
Visit the DirectorZone web site for more information: www.directorzone.com.
My DirectorZone Templates
In the My DirectorZone window you can conveniently download your custom PiP
object, paint animation object, title effect, particle effect, and disc menu templates
that you previously uploaded to DirectorZone. You can also access and download
templates from your DirectorZone download history and also your favorite
templates.
To download My DirectorZone templates, do this:
1. Click in the PiP Objects Room, Particle Room, Title Room, or Create Disc
module.
2. Click the My D ir ectorZone tab.
3. Filter the templates by My Uploads, Download History, or My Favorites, or
enter a search keyword in the field provided.
4. Select all of the templates you want to download.
5. Click Download to download them to your computer and import them into
the library.
Downloading Effects and Templates from
CyberLink Cloud
71
Importing Media into PowerDirector
If you have a CyberLink Cloud subscription you can download the PiP object, paint
animation, title effect, particle effect, and disc menu templates you previously
backed up to CyberLink Cloud. Once downloaded, these templates are stored in the
download folder specified in CyberLink Cloud Preferences, and imported into your
media library.
To download template from CyberLink Cloud, do this:
1. Click in the PiP Objects Room, Particle Room, Title Room, or Create Disc
module.
2. Click the My CyberLink Cloud tab.
3. Filter the templates by selecting a collection from the drop-down, or enter a
search keyword in the field provided.
4. Select all of the templates you want to download.
5. Click Download to download them to your computer and import them into
the library.
Detecting Scenes and Extracting
Audio
To assist with the editing process, CyberLink PowerDirector can detect scenes in
your video clips or extract the audio from them. These new clips are displayed,
separately from the original clips, in the media library.
Detecting Scenes in a Video Clip
The scene detection function automatically creates individual clips based on the
individual scenes (or pre-edited shots) contained within a video clip. Detected
scenes are not split from the original clip, but can be added to the workspace like
any other media clip.
Note: depending on the file format, scene detection on certain clips may not
work as precisely as it does for others. You may need to split the scenes
manually in the Scene Detection window.
To detect the scenes in a video clip, do this:
1. Right-click on it in either the Captured Content area (Capture window), or in
the media library, and then select Detect Scenes.
72
CyberLink PowerDirector Help
2. The scenes in the video clip are automatically detected and then displayed in
the Scenes panel.
3. Once you are done detecting the scenes in the video clip, click OK. The
detected clips are displayed in a sub folder under the original video clip.
When using scene detection, please note:
·if required, use the Sensitivity slider to increase or decrease scene detection
sensitivity. Doing this may yield an increased or decreased number of scenes
that are detected. Click Detect to redetect the scenes in the video clip. You are
asked to confirm the clearing of the previously detected clips and then the
updated scenes are detected and displayed in the Scenes panel.
·click on the button to configure the Advanced Scene Detection Settings. If
the selected video clip is a DV-AVI file, you have the option to Detect by
change of video frame (used on all other file formats) or Detect by change of
timecodes (i.e.: timecodes are automatically set when you start and stop
recording). Select the Disable preview during detection option to speed up
the detection process if you find your computer runs slow during the
process.
·to stop the scene detection process before completion, click the stop button
on the playback controls.
·to detect scenes manually, drag the slider (in Clip mode) to the beginning of
each new scene and then click .
·to preview a detected scene, just select it in the Scenes panel (ensure Segment
is selected) and then click the play button.
·to view all the detected scene markers on the clip timeline, ensure that Clip is
selected.
·to merge two or more detected scenes into one longer scene, select them in
the Scenes panel and then click Merge. Click Remove All if you want to restore
the clip to the original.
You can add the individual scenes to the timeline or manage them in the media
library like any other video clip.
Video clips that contain detected scenes show a small folder icon in the lower right
corner of the clip when displayed in the media library. To display a clip’s scenes,
click the folder icon.
73
Importing Media into PowerDirector
Extracting Audio from a Video Clip
If you just want to use the audio from a video clip in your production, you can
extract it in the media library by right-clicking on it and selecting Extract Audio. The
audio is separated from the video and saved in the media library. You can use it in
your project like any other audio file.
Note: when a video clip is already on the timeline, you can separate the
audio from the video file by right-clicking on it and selecting Unlink Video
and Audio.
74
CyberLink PowerDirector Help
PowerDirector Plug-ins
Chapter 6:
CyberLink PowerDirector includes a number of plug-ins that can help you create
video content for your production. Click the button above the Media Room
library in the Edit module to view the available PowerDirector plug-ins. See the
following sections for detailed information:
·Using the MultiCam Designer*
·Using the Theme Designer*
·Editing Video in the Action Camera Center
·Using an Express Project
·Recording Your Desktop with the Screen Recorder
·Creating Blends in the Blending Effect Designer
Note: * optional feature in CyberLink PowerDirector. Check the version
table on our web site for detailed versioning information.
Using the MultiCam Designer
The MultiCam Designer lets you seamlessly edit footage from multiple cameras,
simulating the use of a live camera switcher. The MultiCam Designer* creates
professional-looking edited content for use in your CyberLink PowerDirector
projects.
Note: * optional feature in CyberLink PowerDirector. Check the version
table on our web site for detailed versioning information.
To open the MultiCam Designer click the button and then select MultiCam
Designer.
Note: when entering the MultiCam Designer, any selected video files are
automatically imported into the available camera (video source) areas.
75
PowerDirector Plug-ins
A - Import Video, B - Available Cameras (Video Sources), C - Import Audio, D - Synchronization Type,
E - Selected Camera (Video Source), F - Recording Track, G - Recording/Playback Controls, H - Audio
Source, I - Recorded Content, J - Available Audio Source, K - Source Tracks
Importing Media
In the MultiCam Designer you can have up to four different video sources from four
different cameras. Each available camera (video source) can have more than one
imported video clip on its source video track.
Note: if you require more than four video sources for your production, you
can use Sync by Audio to align them on the timeline and then edit the
footage manually. See Syncing Clips by Audio for more information.
You can also import one or more audio files to use as the source audio in the clip
you are recording.
76
CyberLink PowerDirector Help
Importing Video Clips
When you enter the MultiCam Designer, any video clips that were selected in the
media library are automatically imported into the empty camera (video source)
areas and the corresponding source video tracks.
If no clips were selected, you are prompted to select clips from your hard drive for
import. You can select multiple video clips for import. Each selected clip is placed
in the next available camera area. Once all the camera areas are full, the next clip is
imported into the first camera area, after (on the corresponding source video track)
the previously imported clip.
To import additional video clips, do either of the following:
·click the Im por t Video button and then Import From Hard Drive to import
video clips from your computer's hard drive, or Import From Media Room to
import clips from the existing media in the Media Room library. Select one or
more clips and then click Open. The clips are placed in the next available
camera areas and the corresponding source video tracks.
Note: once all the available camera areas are full, the next clip is imported
into the first camera area, after (on the corresponding source video track)
the previously imported clip.
·to import video clips into a specific camera (video source) area, click the
corresponding button. Next, select Import From Hard Drive to import
video clips from your computer's hard drive, or Import From Media Room to
import clips from the existing media in the Media Room library. Select one or
more clips and then click Open. The clips are placed in the camera area and
the corresponding source video tracks.
Source Video Tracks
All of the imported video clips are imported into the corresponding source video
tracks. You can move the video clips to different locations on the video tracks, or
even drag them to different tracks. You can also reorder the video clips on a source
track by clicking the button next to the track and then using the and
buttons to reorder them as required.
77
PowerDirector Plug-ins
To remove a video clip from a source video track, click next to the track, select
the check box next to the clip you want to remove, and then click . To add
additional video clips to the source track, click the button.
Importing Audio Clips
If you want to use an audio clip as the audio source in your recording instead of the
audio of the imported video clips, you can import it separately into the MultiCam
Designer.
To import audio clips, click the I mport Audio button and then Import From Hard
Drive to import audio clips from your computer's hard drive, or Import From
Media Room to import clips from the existing media in the Media Room library.
Select one or more clips and then click Open. The clips are placed on the source
audio track in the timeline.
Source Audio Track
All of the imported audio clips are imported into the source audio track. You can
move the audio clips to different locations on the audio track. You can also reorder
the audio clips on the source track by clicking the button next to the track and
then using the and buttons to reorder them as required.
To remove an audio clip from the source track, click next to the track, select the
check box next to the clip you want to remove, and then click . To add
additional audio clips to the source track, click the button.
Synchronizing Clips
Once you have imported all of the media clips into the MultiCam Designer that you
want to use in your recording, the next step is to synchronize them.
To synchronize the clips in the MultiCam Designer, do this:
1. Select the Audio sour ce for your recording from the drop-down. You can use
the audio of any of the imported video clips or select Imported Audio to use
the audio that was imported on to the source audio track.
2. In the Synchronization drop-down, select one of the following:
78
CyberLink PowerDirector Help
·Manual: select this option if you want to manually adjust the starting position
of each clip on the source tracks. You can do this by clicking and dragging
the clips on the source track to a new position.
Note: you can also click the button in the camera area to manually
move the clip on the source track back one frame. Click to move it
forward one frame.
·Timecodes: select this option and then click Apply if you want the MultiCam
Designer to synchronize using the video clip's timecodes. The MultiCam
Designer will auto adjust the clips on the source tracks.
Note: this option can only be used if the video clips were recorded with a
DV or HDV camera that imprinted the timecode information in the clips and
were captured by CyberLink PowerDirector.
·File Created Time: select this option and then click Apply to use the date and
time the file was created as the synchronization points. The MultiCam
Designer will auto adjust the clips on the source tracks.
·Audio Analysis: select this option and then click Apply if you want the
MultiCam Designer to analyze the audio and then sync the files based on the
audio in them. The MultiCam Designer will auto adjust the clips on the source
tracks.
·Markers on Clips: select this option and then use the playback controls to find
the synchronization points in each clip. Once you find a point, right click on
the source track and then select Set Marker. Once you have manually added
all the markers, click the Apply button. The MultiCam Designer will adjust the
clips on the source tracks.
Creating Recorded Content
Once you have imported and then synchronized all the media clips in the MultiCam
Designer, you are ready to record your video. The recorded video is placed on the
recording track and then is imported into the Edit module's timeline once you click
OK.
To record your content, do this:
1. Select the camera (video source) you want to start off the recording with. You
can do this by simply clicking on the camera preview area.
79
PowerDirector Plug-ins
2. If required, click on in the recording controls to set the preview window
resolution. Select the Create Shadow File for HD Video option to also create a
shadow file for the recorded file. This can help speed up editing when using
high definition files in your production.
3. When you are ready, click to begin recording. The MultiCam Designer will
start recording, adding the current selected camera footage as recorded
content on the recording track.
4. As required during the recording process, click another camera (video source)
or use keyboard hotkeys 1-4 to switch the recording to that source's content.
5. Continue switching the camera (video source) as required, creating your
recorded content on the recording track.
80
CyberLink PowerDirector Help
6. When you are done click the or button to stop the recording process.
7. Click on OK to close the MultiCam Designer, and import the recorded content
into the timeline.
Note: if you'd like to modify the MultiCam Designer recorded content once it
is in the timeline, just select it and then click the MultiCam Designer
button. See Changing the Recorded Content for more information.
Changing the Recorded Content
Once you have recorded your content in the MultiCam Designer and imported it
into the timeline, you can edit it like any other video clip on the timeline. However,
if you find that you want to replace some of the footage, or add more footage to
the recorded content, you can do this by re-entering the MultiCam Designer.
To change recorded content in the MultiCam Designer, click on it in the timeline
and then click on the MultiCam D esigner function button above the timeline.
Adding More Content
If required, you can record more content. You can record from the beginning over
the existing content, or continue from where you left off by using the playback
controls to find a specific starting point to record from. See Creating Recorded
Content for information on recording new content.
When you are done, click OK to save your changes and import the updated
recorded content into the timeline.
Replacing Existing Content
If you want to replace an existing segment on the recording track, do this:
1. Use the playback controls to find the segment you want to replace.
2. If you only want to replace part of a segment, you can split it into two
separate segments. To do this, ensure the timeline slider is at the starting
position of the part you want to replace, and then click Split.
81
PowerDirector Plug-ins
3. Right-click on the camera segment you want to replace, and then select
another camera (video source).
4. Repeat the above steps as required to edit and replace the segments.
5. When you are done, click OK to save your changes and import the updated
recorded content into the timeline.
82
CyberLink PowerDirector Help
Using the Theme Designer
If you enjoy using the Magic Movie Wizard to create your video productions, you
can now fully customize the theme templates used to create these dynamic looking
videos in the Theme Designer*. A theme may consist of one or more theme
templates, or individual sequences from different theme templates.
Note: * optional feature in CyberLink PowerDirector. Check the version
table on our web site for detailed versioning information.
As you customize the theme template, you can also fully customize how your
media is displayed, giving you more creative control over your outputted movie.
To open the Theme Designer click the button and then select Theme Designer.
A - Media Tab, B - Effects Tab, C - Sequence Content Area, D - Added Sequences Area, E - Selected
Sequence, F - Title Settings, G - Theme Background Music, H - Sequence Background Image, I -
83
PowerDirector Plug-ins
Transition Settings, J - Preview Window, K - Preview Controls, L - Take a Snapshot, M - Auto Fill Media
Slots
Overview
Themes that you edit in the Theme Designer consist of theme templates and your
media (images and video clips). The resulting video is similar to the movie content
created by the Magic Movie Wizard and Magic Style, but the Theme Designer
provides much more creative control over the outputted movie.
Theme Templates
Theme templates are used to create a video production, with a specific type of
theme or style, and can be downloaded from DirectorZone. Theme templates
consist of a number of sequences. Each of these sequences contain elements, some
of which are customizable and some of which are not.
The customizable elements include the text and media (images, videos, and
background music) you add to each sequence. You can add effects on this media
and set how and when it is displayed. You can also set the background image on
some sequences, and select the transition between each sequence in templates
named "with transitions". Non-customizable elements include any animation
included in the sequences.
When selecting a theme template to use in the Theme Designer, you can choose to
add one or more theme templates, creating a more original production. You can
even just select some of the sequences in a theme template, or mix and match the
sequences used.
There are three types of sequences: opening, middle, and closing sequences.
Opening and closing sequences usually contain text, while the elements in middle
sequences are much more random.
Adding Theme Templates/Sequences
In the Theme Designer you can use one or more theme templates, or just certain
selected sequences, to create your video.
When you first enter the Theme Designer, you are prompted to select a theme
template.
84
CyberLink PowerDirector Help
To add a theme template, just select it in the window and all of its sequences will be
added.
Note: you can preview a theme template in the preview window by selecting
it and then using the available playback controls.
85
PowerDirector Plug-ins
If you don't want to use all the theme template's sequences, just deselect the ones
you don't want to use.
You can also select sequences from other theme templates and include them in
your video. The Theme Designer will remember the order of your selections.
86
CyberLink PowerDirector Help
Click OK once you have selected all the sequences. They will be loaded into the
added sequences area of the Theme Designer.
If you'd like to add more sequences, just click the button. You can drag and
drop the sequences to reorder them, or right click to remove the selected one.
Adding Media Clips
Once you have selected the theme templates (and their sequences) that you want
to use, you can start adding your images and video files to them.
Note: the number of media files you can add to a sequence is dependent on
its design.
To add media into the selected sequences, do this:
1. In the added sequences area, select the individual sequence you want to add
media to. Note the number of media slots that are available in the sequence
content area. The number of available slots varies from sequence to sequence.
87
PowerDirector Plug-ins
Note: some of the media slots in sequences allow you to add both images
and videos into them, while others only allow one type of media.
2. Click on the Media tab and then drag and drop the media that you want in the
sequence to the desired slot.
Note: the media that is available on the Media tab are the videos and
images you imported into the Media Room library. See Importing More
Media Files if you want to import more media.
3. Continue this process until all the media slots have been used.
4. Select the next sequence, and then repeat steps 2 and 3 until all the media
slots have been filled.
88
CyberLink PowerDirector Help
Note: if you want a media file to continue playing from one sequence to the
next, ensure the Continue from last clip in the previous sequence is
selected. The first media slot will be auto populated with the content from
the last media slot on the previous sequence. Deselect this option if you
want new media displayed in the next sequence.
5. Continue selecting all the sequences in your video until all of the media slots
and sequences contain media.
Note: when adding media you can also click the button to
auto fill all the empty media slots in the sequences. Select Auto Fill by
Library Order to fill by the created date, as displayed in the Media Room
library. Select Auto Fill Using Videos First if you want to add the video
clips first.
Importing More Media Files
Once you are in the Theme Designer, there are two ways you can import more
media files into the window.
·To import more video files and images located on your hard drive, click the
I mport Media button.
·To take still snapshots from videos in the Theme Designer, click the Snapshot
button. See Taking Snapshots from Videos for more information.
89
PowerDirector Plug-ins
Taking Snapshots from Videos
You can take a snapshot from a paused video and then import the image into the
Theme Designer to use in your video production.
To take a snapshot, do this:
1. In the main Theme Designer window, select the video file you want to use and
then click the Snapshot button.
2. In the Snapshot window, use the playback controls to find the video frame
you want to take a snapshot of. Pause the video and use the and
buttons to find the precise frame you want to capture.
3. Click the . The snapshot image is captured.
4. Repeat the steps to take as many snapshots from the video as you wish.
5. Click OK to close the Snapshot window and import the captured images into
the Theme Designer.
Editing Media Clips
There are several editing options available for the media clips you want to use in the
Theme Designer.
Note: the editing options in the Theme Designer are limited to video
trimming, image duration, and adding effects. If you need to perform more
complex editing on your media clips, it is recommended that you do this
before importing the clips into the Theme Designer. See for Editing Your
Media for more advanced editing options.
Trimming Video Clips
You can perform trims on the video clips used in the Theme Designer. To trim a
video clip, right-click on it in the Theme Designer and then select Trim. Or hover
your mouse over the video clip and click on in its thumbnail. See Performing a
Single Trim for detailed information on trimming video clips.
90
CyberLink PowerDirector Help
Muting Video Clips
Some theme templates and sequences contain background music that will be used
in your video. Because of this, you may want to mute the audio in the imported
video clips, so that it doesn't conflict with the background music.
To mute the audio in a video clip, hover your mouse over the video clip and then
click on in its thumbnail.
Modifying Image Duration
To modify the duration that an image clip is displayed in your outputted video, do
this:
1. Right-click on it in the Theme Designer and then select Set Duration. Or hover
your mouse over the image clip and then click on in its thumbnail.
2. In the Duration Settings window, enter in the how long you want it to display
in your video production. You can set the duration down to the number of
frames.
3. Click on OK.
Applying Zoom In on Media Clips
Some media slots in sequences allow you to zoom in on the media clip that was
added to it. If a zoom is available, then the icon is displayed in the top right
corner.
To apply a zoom in on the media clip, click on the icon. Click to remove it
if required.
Adding Video Effects to Clips
In the Theme Designer you can add special effects to your images and video clips.
Each special effect has unique attributes that you can customize to help achieve the
impression you want in your video production.
91
PowerDirector Plug-ins
To add a video effect to a clip, do this:
1. Click on the Effects tab.
2. Select an effect and then drag and drop it on the clip.
3. If required, right-click on the clip and then select Modify Effect Settings. Use
the available sliders and options to customize the video effect to your
preference. Click on OK to save your changes.
See Adding Video Effects for more information on video effects.
Editing Background Music
You can customize the music that is used in your video. To edit the background
music, select one of the following options in the Bac kground music drop-down:
·Default (First Page): select this option to use the background music that is
included by default in theme templates.
Note: if you select sequences from more than one theme template, the
Theme Designer uses the background music that is applied to the first
sequence in the video.
·Imported: select this option if you want to import your own custom
background music from your computer's hard drive. Select the music you
want to use and then click OK to set it as the music used.
·No Music: select this option if you don't want to have any background music
in your video.
Background Music Preferences
You can trim the music used in your video or add fades. To do this, select
Preferences in the B ac kground music drop-down. Modify the music preferences as
follows:
·if required, trim the background music using the player controls and the
mark-in/mark-out indicators.
92
CyberLink PowerDirector Help
·if required, adjust the volume of the music using the available volume
control.
·if required, use the slider to mix the audio level, by deciding whether to have
more background music or the original video's audio in the production.
Click OK to save your changes.
Editing Title Text
Some sequences contain title text that you can edit. If a sequence allows you to edit
title text, the text fields in Title settings will become active when the sequence is
selected.
To edit the title text, just enter the text you want to use in the fields provided. If you
don't want any text displayed in the selected sequences, just make sure the text
field blank.
Replacing Background Images
Some sequences let you replace their background image. A thumbnail of the
background image is displayed in the Background area if the sequence has a
93
PowerDirector Plug-ins
replaceable background image.
Click to replace the background with an image from your computer's hard drive.
Click if you want to remove the background image from the sequence.
Adding Transitions Between Sequences
When viewing a video created with the Theme Designer, you will notice that there
are transitions between the sequences in a theme template. These transitions are
editable in theme templates named "with transitions". Transitions can also be added
between sequences if you are using sequences from different theme templates.
Note: in theme templates not named "with transitions", the transitions
between sequences are not editable. These theme templates use your
media to make the transitions between the sequences.
If adding a transition is available for a sequence, the Transition settings area
displays when the sequence is selected.
Click to add a transition before the selected sequence. Click if you want to
remove a selected transition from the sequence. See Using Transitions for more
information on transitions.
Previewing and Saving Movies
As you are creating your video in the Theme Designer, you can preview your
creation using the available preview controls.
94
CyberLink PowerDirector Help
Click to preview the entire movie, or to preview just the selected sequence.
Click to change the preview resolution, or to take a photo snapshot of your
movie.
The keyframe indicators on the preview timeline indicate where the media files in
the sequence are in the movie. Hover your mouse over a keyframe to view the clip
information.
Once you are done previewing your movie and you are satisfied with the results,
click on OK to close the Theme Designer, and import the created movie into the
timeline.
Editing Created Movies
Once you have created your content in the Theme Designer and imported it into
the timeline, you can edit it like any other video clip on the timeline. If you want to
edit or replace the media used in the created movie you can do this in the Theme
Designer.
To edit created content in the Theme Designer, do this:
1. Click on the created content in the timeline and then the Theme Designer
function button.
2. As required, edit the video in the Theme Designer.
3. When you are satisfied, click OK to save your changes and import the updated
created content into the timeline.
95
PowerDirector Plug-ins
Editing Video in the Action
Camera Center
In the Action Camera Center* you can fix video clips or add effects that highlight
the action sequences in the video.
Note: * optional feature in CyberLink PowerDirector. Check the version
table on our web site for detailed versioning information.
To open the Action Camera Center, select a video clip in the media library, click the
button, and then select Action Camera Center.
Note: if your video clip is already on the timeline, you must select it and
then click Tools > Action Camera Center to open it in the Action Camera
Center.
96
CyberLink PowerDirector Help
A - Fix Video Clips, B - Add Action Effects, C - Preview Window, D - Action Camera Center Settings, E -
Zoom on Timeline, F - Action Camera Center Timeline
Once in the Action Camera Center, you can:
·Fix Video Clips
·Create Action Effects
When you are done editing the video clip, click the OK button to save your
changes. Your changes are applied to the video clip and updated on the video
timeline.
Note: to edit content created with the Action Camera Center, click on it in
the timeline and then click on the Action Camera Center function button
above the timeline. If you would like to view the individual clips created by
the Action Camera Center for editing directly in the timeline, just right-click
on the file and then select Show Individual Clips.
Fixing Video Clips
When in the Action Camera Center, click on the Fix tab to stabilize shaky video,
adjust video white balance, or add color presets. You can also use lens correction to
remove fisheye distortions and vignettes.
Lens Correction
Select the Lens Correction option to import lens profiles to auto correct distorted
videos, or use the controls to manually correct them if they have a fisheye
distortion or vignette effect.
When you enter the Action Camera Center, manually select the lens profile, using
the Maker and Model drop-downs, that matches the camera your video was shot
with. Once selected, CyberLink PowerDirector will auto correct the video.
Note: if none of the lens profiles match your camera, you can download more
from DirectorZone or manually fix the distorted video using the controls in
this window. See more details below.
Downloading Lens Profiles from DirectorZone
97
PowerDirector Plug-ins
If your video camera's lens and profile are not available in CyberLink PowerDirector
you can click the button to download more lens profiles from DirectorZone.
Once downloaded, click the button to import it. CyberLink PowerDirector
should auto detect the imported profile and then correct the selected video.
Fisheye Distortion
The fisheye distortion section helps correct videos that appear distorted. Dragging
the slider to the right straightens lines that bend away from the center, correcting
barrel distortions. Dragging it to the left straightens lines that bend towards the
center, fixing pincushion distortions in videos.
Vignette Removal
Use the following sliders to remove an unwanted vignette effect on videos that was
caused by a camera lens or the lighting environment:
·Vignette amount: use this slider to adjust the level of vignette removal on the
video.
·Vignette midpoint: drag the midpoint slider to the left to increase the size of
the area (towards the center of the video) where the vignette removal is
applied. Drag it right to decrease the size, towards the corners.
Video Stabilizer
Select the Video Stabiliz er option to employ motion compensation technology to
correct shaky videos. This tool is ideal for use with videos taken without a tripod or
recorded while moving.
Once enabled, drag the Strength slider to increase or decrease the level of
correction. Select the Fix rotational camera shake option if the clip has segments
where the camera rotates from side to side.
Select the Enhanced stabilizer option to improve the output quality of some video
clips. Using this feature requires more computing power, so it is recommended that
you switch to non-real time preview or render a preview for the applied range.
98
CyberLink PowerDirector Help
White Balance
Select the White B alance option and then Color temperatur e to adjust the video's
color temperature or create a specific atmosphere. Once enabled, use the slider to
adjust the color of the video image. A lower value applies a colder temperature,
while a higher value creates an atmosphere that is warmer. Use the Tint slider to
adjust the color level of the clip.
Select the White calibration option and then click to color correct the video
image. By indicating which portion of the video image should be white, CyberLink
PowerDirector automatically adjusts the other colors accordingly to be more vivid
and true.
Color Presets
Select the Color Presets option to apply CyberLink ColorDirector presets on your
video clips, instantly transforming the color and look of the clips. See Applying
ColorDirector Color Presets for more detailed description of this feature.
If you have CyberLink ColorDirector installed, click the Edit in ColorDirector* button
to access the advanced color enhancements available in this program. See
Advanced Fixes and Enhancements for more information.
Creating Action Effects on Video Clips
Click on the Effect tab in the Action Camera Center to highlight action sequences in
your videos clips with time shifts and freeze frames. Time shifts let you replay,
reverse, or alter the speed of key moments in your videos, while freeze frames
pause and zoom in on the action.
Note: before you finish creating your action effects, configure the Action
Camera Center Settings to ensure the best output results.
Creating Time Shifts
Time shifts let you highlight action in video clips by adding slow motion or replays
on key moments. To create a time shift, do this:
99
PowerDirector Plug-ins
1. On the Effect tab, use the player controls or drag the Action Camera Center
timeline slider to the position in your video clip where you want the time shift
to start.
Note: use the zoom controls above the Action Camera Center timeline to
zoom in on the video clip's timeline to more precisely add the time shift.
2. Click on the Create time shift button. CyberLink PowerDirector will create the
time shift, which is indicated in orange on the timeline.
3. If required, drag each end of the time shift so that it covers the segment of the
video you want to add the effect to.
Note: the length of the original time shift is dependent on how much you
have zoomed in on the Action Camera Center timeline.
4. Apply the effect as required (see below) to the time shift
segment.
Note: you can create more than one time shift on a video clip. Just repeat
the above steps to add another.
Replay
In the Replay section, select the Apply replay and reverse option if you want to loop
the selected segment of video in the time shift. Once selected, indicate how many
times you want the segment to play by setting it in the Play times field. Select the
Add reverse effect option if you want the video to reverse forward and backward as
it loops playback.
100
CyberLink PowerDirector Help
Speed
In the Speed section, select the Apply speed effect option to speed up or slow down
just the selected segment of video in the time shift. Once selected, you can enter a
new Duration for the segment in the field provided, or use the Speed multiplier
slider. Drag it left to slow down the segment, or right to speed it up.
When you apply a speed effect to a segment of video, by default the change in the
speed in the video is instantaneous once the timeline slider enters the time shift. If
you want it to be more gradual and look smoother, you can use the Ease in/out
options. Select Ease in if you want the change of speed at the beginning of the time
shift to gradually speed up/slow down to the specified speed. Select Ease out if you
want the video to gradually return to the original video speed at the end of the time
shift.
Note: if you also selected the Apply replay and reverse option, in the
Apply effect to drop down select whether to apply the speed effect to the
first or last play of the time shift segment.
Stop Motion
Select the Stop Motion tab and then the Apply stop motion option to add a stop
motion effect on the selected segment of video in the time shift. This effect pauses
on a frame of video for a specified number of frames, before jumping to the
current frame of video. Drag the slider right to increase the number of frames the
video will pause for, or drag it left to reduce the number of frames.
Zoom and Pan
In the Zoom and Pan section you can add zooms and pans on the selected segment
of video in the time shift.
To add a zoom and pan in a time shift segment:
1. Drag the timeline slider to the moment in the segment where you want to be
zoomed in/out on a portion of the video frame, and then click to add a
keyframe marker.
101
PowerDirector Plug-ins
2. Resize and move the focus area box as required. Make it smaller to zoom in on
a portion of the video, or make it larger to zoom out. Moving the focus area
box will add a pan as the camera moves to the location of the box by the time
the timeline slider reaches the keyframe.
102
CyberLink PowerDirector Help
Note: in the above example, the zoom in will begin at the beginning of the
time shift. Once the keyframe is reached, the camera will start zooming
back out.
3. If required, you can add more keyframes to customize the effect. For example,
you can add another keyframe to hold the zoom, which is done by keeping
the focus area box the same size and following the subject (moving the focus
area box).
103
PowerDirector Plug-ins
Adding Freeze Frames
Add a freeze frame to pause a frame of video for a specified duration. To add a
freeze frame, do this:
1. On the Effect tab, use the player controls or drag the Action Camera Center
timeline slider to the position in your video clip where you want the freeze
frame.
Note: use the zoom controls above the Action Camera Center timeline to
zoom in on the video clip's timeline to more precisely find the frame.
2. Click on the Add freeze frame button. CyberLink PowerDirector will add a
freeze frame, which is indicated by the blue indicator.
104
CyberLink PowerDirector Help
3. In the Duration field, enter how long you want the video to pause on this
frame of video.
Note: you can add more than one freeze frame to a video clip. Just repeat
the above steps to add another.
Applying Zoom Effect
Select the Apply zoom effect option if you want to zoom in and out on the paused
frame of video. Once selected, resize and align the focus box to the part of the
video frame where you want the zoom to occur.
Note: if you also selected the Apply replay and reverse option, in the
Apply effect to drop down select whether to apply the freeze frame to the
first or last play of the time shift segment.
Action Camera Center Settings
Click the button in the Action Camera Center window to open the settings
window. The available options are as follows:
Audio setting:
·Remove audio: select this option if you want to mute the audio in the entire
video clip.
·Keep audio: select this option if you want to keep the audio in the edited
video clip. Select the Keep audio pitch (0.5X to 2X only) if you are changing
the speed of the video. Selecting this will stretch the audio to match the new
video's length, minimizing the warping of the sound as the video speed
changes.
Interpolation setting:
·Apply interpolated technology when available: select this option when
reducing the speed of the video. CyberLink PowerDirector uses frame
interpolated technology* to create a more advanced and smooth slow motion
effect.
Note: * optional feature in CyberLink PowerDirector. Check the version
table on our web site for detailed versioning information.
105
PowerDirector Plug-ins
Changing the Action Camera Center
Content
Once you have created your action effects in the Action Camera Center and
imported the resulting video clip into the timeline, you can edit it like any other
video clip on the timeline. However, if you find that you want to edit or refine the
effects more, you can do this by re-entering the Action Camera Center.
Note: if you would like to view the individual clips created by the Action
Camera Center so you can edit them directly in the timeline, just right-click
on the file and then select Show Individual Clips.
To edit content created with the Action Camera Center, click on it in the timeline
and then click on the Action Camera Center function button above the timeline.
Editing Content
When you re-enter in the Action Camera Center, you can refine any of the fixes you
made on the Fix tab. Click on the Effect tab to edit any action effects you created,
or add new ones. To edit a created time shift, just select it on the video timeline,
and then adjust its parameters as required.
For freeze frames, select the freeze frame indicator,
106
CyberLink PowerDirector Help
and then adjust the freeze frame settings as required.
Note: if you want to remove a time shift or freeze frame from a video clip,
just select it on the Action Camera Center timeline and then click the
button.
When you are done, click OK to save your changes and import the updated content
into the timeline.
Using an Express Project
Express projects are pre-designed project templates that will help you speed up the
editing process. Note the names of the express project templates, as some are
designed with a specific theme in mind (sports, wedding, travel, etc.) and to be at
the opening, middle, or end of projects.
To access the express projects, click the button and then select Express
Projects.
Note: you can also access the library of express projects at any time when
you are in the Media Room by selecting Express Projects from the Media
Content drop-down.
To use an express project, just select it in the media library and then drag and drop
it on the timeline. You can also insert the express project anywhere within a current
project, by dragging and dropping it to the desired position on the timeline.
Express projects can be added to the timeline in the exact same way as media clips.
See Adding Media to the Workspace for detailed information on adding content to
the timeline.
Note: you can also reuse old PowerDirector projects you created. See
Reusing PowerDirector Projects for more information.
Once the express project is in the timeline, simply replace the media placeholders
in the template with the media content you want to use in your new production. To
do this, just drag the media clips to the desired media placeholders on the timeline
(which are indicated by the numbers on their thumbnails). Hover over the media
107
PowerDirector Plug-ins
placeholder until the clip fits within the placeholder length as shown below. This is
done by hovering the hand icon over the media placeholder where you want the
clip to be.
Doing this replaces the media placeholders with the content you want to add,
without changing the structure of the express project. Continue this process until
all the media placeholders have been filled. Once you are done, you can continue
to edit the project like any other project, including the effects and transitions that
have been included in the express project.
Recording Your Desktop with
the Screen Recorder
The Screen Recorder lets you record a video of your mouse movements and
computer usage, allowing you to create instruction videos, record webcasts, and
108
CyberLink PowerDirector Help
more. To access the Screen Recorder dialog, click the button and then select
Screen Recorder.
Note: you can also access the screen recorder from the Capture module,
by double-clicking on the desktop shortcut that was created during
installation, or from the Windows start menu by selecting All Programs >
CyberLink Screen Recorder.
To capture with the screen recorder, do this:
1. Click the button and then select Screen Recorder. The Screen Recorder
dialog displays.
2. Before capturing, set the recording preferences as follows:
·Aspect ratio: select whether you want the recorded video to have a 16:9 or
4:3 aspect ratio.
Note: if you choose an aspect ratio that does not match the capture area
selected, the resulting recorded video file will have black areas within the
frame to fill the gaps on the video image.
·Mouse clicks: click the colored dot to set the color of animation used to
illustrate that a mouse click was performed during the recording of the video.
Select the option if you don't want the animation to appear in your video.
·Capture area: select whether you want the Screen Recorder to capture at Full
Screen, using Lock to App, or just a Custom portion of the screen. See Setting
Capture Area for detailed information on the available capture areas.
·Settings: before recording, click the Settings button to configure the Screen
Recorder settings, including the recording file format, frame rate, and video
resolution. See Configuring the Screen Recorder Settings for detailed
information.
109
PowerDirector Plug-ins
3. When you are ready, click the REC button to start the capture.
The Screen Recorder displays a countdown screen, and then
starts recording.
4. Once you are finished recording your video, press the hotkey (F10 is the
default) you specified to stop the desktop capture (if enabled). If hotkeys are
not enabled, click on the minimized Screen Recorder dialog and then click
the button.
5. Once the recording has stopped, the video file is saved in the folder specified
in Screen Recording Settings. If Import into PowerDirector is enabled in
settings, you are returned directly to CyberLink PowerDirector window and the
video file is also imported directly into the media library.
Note: if the Import into PowerDirector option is not enabled, the Screen
Recorder dialog is displayed after capture. Click the Edit button to launch
PowerDirector and edit the video, or click on the REC button to record
another video.
Setting Capture Area
Before you use the Screen Recorder to record a video, be sure to set the area of your
computer's screen you want to capture. The following are the three options that are
available:
·Full Screen
·Lock to App
·Custom
Note: if you set a capture area that does not match the specified aspect
ratio, the resulting recorded video file will have black areas within the frame
to fill the gaps on the video image.
Full Screen
Click the button if you want to record your entire computer screen.
110
CyberLink PowerDirector Help
Lock to App
Click the button if you want to record within a running program
window. Once selected, hover your mouse over the program you want to record
within and then click in the program window to set the capture area. Note that a
yellow dotted line is drawn around the program.
This area represents the screen area that will be captured during the recording. If
you move the program before recording starts, the Screen Recorder will follow the
program.
111
PowerDirector Plug-ins
However, once you start recording, the Screen Recorder will only record the current
capture area. If you move the program you originally focused on outside the dotted
capture area, the Screen Recorder does not follow the program window once
recording has started.
112
CyberLink PowerDirector Help
Custom
Click the button and then use your mouse to manually set the size of
the capture area by clicking and dragging your mouse.
You can resize the selected capture area at any time before you start recording.
113
PowerDirector Plug-ins
You also have the option of selecting one of the fixed dimensions to use as your
custom capture area by clicking the down arrow on the custom area button.
You can even manually enter a dimension in pixels in the fields provided within the
Screen Recorder dialog to set your custom capture area.
114
CyberLink PowerDirector Help
Please note that before you start recording, you can move the your custom capture
area by clicking and dragging the crosshairs to a new location.
115
PowerDirector Plug-ins
Configuring the Screen Recorder Settings
In the Screen Recorder Settings window, the available options are as follows:
File settings:
·File name: enter a default name for recorded video files.
·Format: select the file format for the recorded video files. You can choose
from MP4 and WMV file formats.
·Resolution: set the video resolution of the recorded video files. The larger the
resolution, the larger the resulting recorded file will be.
·Frame rate: set the frame rate (in frames per second) of the recorded video
file. The higher the frame rate, the larger the resulting recorded file will be.
·Save to: indicates the folder where the recorded video will be saved on your
computer. To change this folder, click the button and then select a
new folder.
·Import into PowerDirector: select this option to import captured files into the
media library directly after capture.
Audio settings:
·Voice over: select the On option if you have a microphone connected to your
computer and you want to record a voice over while recording your video.
Click the Setup button to set up your microphone as follows: select your
connected microphone or other input device from the I nput D ev ic e drop-
down. Speak into the microphone, and then use the Input volume slider to set
the recording level. Click OK to save the changes.
·System audio: select the On option if you want to loop back record the audio
from your computer's sound card as you record. Any system sounds and
audio being played by your computer will be included in your video.
·Mix: use the slider to mix the audio levels, by deciding whether to have more
from the microphone or from your computer's sound card (loop back record).
Control settings:
·Pause/Resume: set the hotkey for pausing the recording during capture. This
hotkey is also used to resume the recording once paused.
·Stop: set the hotkey for stopping the recording.
116
CyberLink PowerDirector Help
·Enable hotkeys: select this option to enable the above hotkeys during
recording. If this option is not selected, you must pause or stop the recording
by clicking on the minimized Screen Recorder dialog and then clicking the
available buttons.
Advanced Screen Recorder Settings
Click the Advanced button to access the Advanced Screen Recorder Settings
window to configure the following options:
Monitor settings:
·if you have two monitors connected to your computer and you have
extended your desktop, select whether you want to capture on the Primary or
Secondary monitor.
Performance settings:
·Hardware video encoding: if your computer supports it, select this option to
improve recording performance using hardware encoding.
·Enable high performance mode: select this option to disable Windows Aero
for improved recording performance (Windows 7/Vista only).
Editing settings:
·Create .mrk file when recording: select this option if you want CyberLink
PowerDirector to create a log file that tracks the mouse clicks when you
capture with the Screen Recorder. These mouse clicks will be indicated on the
clip marker track when the captured file is added to the timeline. Other media
clips added to the timeline will snap to these clip markers to help you sync
voice overs, music, etc. in your video production.
Creating Blends in the Blending
Effect Designer
In the Blending Effect Designer you can blend a selected clip with an image preset
or template to create a unique looking effect in your video. To access the Blending
Effect Designer, select a media clip in the media library, click the button, and
then select Blending Effect.
117
PowerDirector Plug-ins
Note: you can also use the Blending Effect Designer on clips already on the
timeline. To do this, select a clip and then Tools > Blending Effect.
A - Blending Presets and Templates, B - Preview Window, C - Blend Properties
When you are done creating the blend effect, click the OK button to save your
changes. CyberLink PowerDirector will add the selected media file to the timeline at
the current timeline slider position. It will also add the blending image preset/
template to the track below it in the timeline.
Blending Image Presets/Templates
The Blending Effect Designer helps you to create a blending effect on a selected
clip, by blending it with an image preset or template you downloaded from
DirectorZone.
Note: you can also blend two clips that are already on different tracks in the
timeline. See Blending Clips on the Timeline for more information.
118
CyberLink PowerDirector Help
To blend image presets/templates in the Blending Effect Designer, do this:
1. In the Blending Effect Designer, select one of the available presets or
downloaded templates.
Note: you can click Free Templ ates to download more image preset
templates from DirectorZone.
2. Select a Blending Mode to specify how the selected image preset is blended
with the clip below it in the video (the selected media clip). There are 8
blending modes to choose from, with each having a different effect. Below is
a general description of each blending mode, but it is recommended that you
select each to experiment which best fits the needs of your video:
·Normal: Normal is the default blending mode and does not mix the pixel
colors in the selected image preset with the pixels in the selected media clip.
The pixels in the selected image preset are placed over the pixels in the media
clips, and are not blended.
·Darken: the Darken blending mode retains the darkest pixels of all the media
clips being blended.
119
PowerDirector Plug-ins
·Difference: Difference subtracts the brightest pixel color value from the pixel
colors in the selected media clips. The resulting effect is similar to the look of
a film negative, but is more colorful.
·Hue: use the Hue blending mode to blend just the hue from the selected
image preset's pixels with the lightness and saturation of the below media
clip's pixels.
·Lighten: the Lighten blending mode retains the lightest pixel colors of all the
media clips being blended.
·Multiply: Multiply blending mode retains the darkest pixel colors of the
selected image preset, and removes the lightest pixels by making them
transparent.
·Overlay: Overlay combines the effects of the Multiply and Screen blending
modes. When blending the media clips, for darker pixels it blends like
Multiply. For lighter pixels, it blends like Screen.
·Screen: Screen blending mode is the opposite of Multiply, as the brightest
pixels are retained, with the darkest pixels effectively becoming transparent.
3. If required, use the Opacity slider to set the transparency of the effect.
120
CyberLink PowerDirector Help
4. Click OK to close the Blending Effect Designer, and add the two clips to the
timeline.
Once you close the Blending Effect Designer, you cannot reopen it to select another
blending mode or to adjust the opacity of the blending effect. To edit the blending
effect once added to the timeline:
121
PowerDirector Plug-ins
·right click on the image preset, and then select Set Clip Attributes > Set
Blending Mode to select a different blending mode. See Blending Clips on the
Timeline for more detailed information.
·select the image preset in the timeline and then click the Designer button
above the timeline to open the PiP Designer. See Changing Object Settings for
information on adjusting the opacity of the selected clip.
122
CyberLink PowerDirector Help
Arranging Media in Your
Production
Chapter 7:
Once you have your media in the media library, you can begin putting your video
production together by adding media clips to the editing workspace. You add the
media clips in the order that tells the story you want to tell.
Note: the timeline view of the CyberLink PowerDirector workspace offers
more editing freedom and ease of movement in your production. Be sure to
consult the Timeline View and Timeline Behavior sections to get the most
out of this view.
There are several program features you can utilize to assist with the arrangement of
media in your video production, including:
·Magic Movie Wizard: auto creates a movie for you, using the media clips and
effects in your library. See Using the Magic Movie Wizard for more
information.
·Slideshow Creator: auto creates a slideshow with your photos, in a few simple
steps. See Using the Slideshow Creator for more information.
·Express Projects: choose from a number of project templates that will help
you speed up the editing process. See Using an Express Project for more
detailed information.
·Timeline markers*: add to the timeline ruler for more precise media clip
placement on the timeline. See Timeline Markers for more information.
·Music Beat Detection*: use this feature to add music beat clip markers on the
clip marker track, which you can use to arrange media clips to music. See
Music Beat Detection for more information.
·Sync by Audio: you can sync two or more clips that are on different timeline
tracks using the Sync by Audio feature. See Syncing Clips by Audio for more
information.
Note: * optional feature in CyberLink PowerDirector. Check the version
table on our web site for detailed versioning information.
123
Arranging Media in Your Production
Adding Video Clips and Images
to the Timeline
To start creating your video production, begin adding video clips and images to the
video tracks in the timeline.
If you are not sure which tracks you can add your media to, just select a clip in the
media library. The tracks in the timeline you can add the media to will "light up".
For more information on what media you can add to which track, see Timeline
Tracks.
Note: you may prefer to add video clips and images using the storyboard
view, since this view is simpler than the timeline view. However, you can
only add clips to the first track in this view. Therefore, this section uses the
timeline view in all of the procedures.
You can add video clips and images at any position on any video track in the
timeline. You no longer need to place your media on the top track or at the
beginning of the timeline. You now have total freedom to add the media exactly
where you want, and in the order you want it. Just start placing the media on a
timeline track, in a sequence that tells your story.
Note: if you want to add media to a precise position on the timeline,
consider using timeline markers. See Adding Timeline Markers for more
information.
If you insert or drop media onto other existing media clips that are on the timeline,
don't worry. CyberLink PowerDirector will prompt you to use its ripple editing
feature to overwrite, insert, replace, split, trim, transition, or speed up media to help
you easily place the media where you want it.
Once you add a video clip or image to any timeline track, click the Designer button
above the timeline to edit its properties in the PiP Designer. See Modifying Media in
the PiP Designer for more information.
Note: you can add additional tracks to your project's timeline in the Track
Manager, allowing you to have up to 99 PiP objects displayed on a video at
the same time. See Track Manager for more information.
124
CyberLink PowerDirector Help
Adding Video Clips and Images
You can add video clips and images onto any video track in the timeline, and at any
position.
Note: when you add video clips to the timeline, CyberLink PowerDirector
automatically adds its audio track (if available) to the linked audio track.
To insert video clips or images into the workspace, do one of the following:
·use the timeline slider to set the position where you want the media, select
the media in the library, and then click to add it to the
selected video track.
·use the timeline slider to set the position where you want the media, right-
click on the media in the library, and then select Insert on Selected Track to
add it to the selected video track.
You can also manually drag and drop a media clip to a desired position on a video
track to add it to the timeline.
When adding a clip to the timeline (inserting or dragging and dropping), if the
timeline slider is over an existing clip, or you drop it on an existing clip, you are
prompted to use one of the ripple editing options to insert the clip:
·Overwrite: select to overwrite the existing clip with the newly added clip.
·Insert: select to split the clip and insert the new clip between the two portions.
CyberLink PowerDirector also only moves the clips on the same track to the
right.
·Insert and Move All Clips: select to split the clip and insert the new clip
between the two portions. CyberLink PowerDirector also moves all of the
media clips on the timeline that lie to the right of the inserted clip, right.
·Crossfade: select to lay the clip over a portion of the existing clip and auto
add a transition between the two clips. CyberLink PowerDirector uses the fade
transition on the video track, and the constant gain audio transition if both
clips have audio on the corresponding audio track.
Note: the Crossfade option does not overwrite the content on the track,
instead adding an overlap transition between the two clips. See Setting
Transition Behavior for more information. The Crossfade option is only
available if the end of the new clip is not over any existing content on the
track.
125
Arranging Media in Your Production
·Replace: select to replace the current clip on the timeline with the new clip.
Use this option if you don't want to change the structure of the current
content on the timeline.
Note: if the duration of the clip you are replacing is shorter than the newly
added video clip, CyberLink PowerDirector automatically trims the video
clip to fit the original clip's duration. For images, CyberLink PowerDirector
automatically resizes them to fit the original clip's duration.
When inserting a video file, if the timeline slider is in a gap between two clips on a
timeline track, you are prompted to use one of these ripple editing options to insert
the clip:
·Trim to Fit: select to have CyberLink PowerDirector auto trim off the end of
the video clip to fit the gap to the right of the timeline slider.
Note: this feature is also available when inserting image clips into a
timeline gap that have durations longer than the gap.
·Speed up to Fit: select to have CyberLink PowerDirector auto speed up the
video clip so that it fits the gap to the right of the timeline slider.
Adding Color Boards and Backgrounds
The use of color boards allows you to insert solid frames of color into your video.
Color boards are really useful as quick transitions between video clips or as a
background for titles and ending credits. Backgrounds provide interesting and
creative environments for PiP objects, titles, and more.
Note: you can create your own custom color boards in the Media Room.
See Creating New Color Boards for more information.
You can find color boards and backgrounds in your media library, by clicking to
open the explorer view, or selecting Color Boards or Backgrounds from the Media
Content drop-down.
126
CyberLink PowerDirector Help
To insert color boards or backgrounds into the workspace, do one of the following:
·use the timeline slider to set the position where you want the color boards or
backgrounds, select it in the library, and then click to add it
to the selected video track.
·use the timeline slider to set the position where you want the color boards or
backgrounds, right-click on it in the library, and then select Insert on Selected
Track to add it to the selected video track.
You can also manually drag and drop a color board or background to a desired
position on a video track to add it to the timeline.
When adding a color board or background to the timeline (inserting or dragging
and dropping), if the timeline slider is over an existing clip, or you drop it on an
existing clip, you are prompted to use one of the ripple editing options to insert the
clip:
·Overwrite: select to overwrite the existing clip with the color board/
background.
·Insert: select to split the clip and insert the color board/background between
the two portions. CyberLink PowerDirector also only moves the clips on the
same track to the right.
·Insert and Move All Clips: select to split the clip and insert the color board/
background between the two portions. CyberLink PowerDirector also moves
all of the media clips on the timeline that lie to the right of the inserted clip,
right.
·Crossfade: select to lay the color board/background over a portion of the
existing clip and auto add a fade transition between the two clips.
127
Arranging Media in Your Production
Note: the Crossfade option does not overwrite the content on the track,
instead adding an overlap transition between the two clips. See Setting
Transition Behavior for more information. The Crossfade option is only
available if the end of the new clip is not over any existing content on the
track.
·Replace: select to replace the current clip on the timeline with the color
board/background. Use this option if you don't want to change the structure
of the current content on the timeline.
Note: if the duration of the clip you are replacing is longer or shorter than
the newly added clip, CyberLink PowerDirector automatically resizes it to fit
the original clip's duration.
If the timeline slider is in a gap between two clips on a timeline track when inserting
a color board or background, you are prompted to use this ripple editing option to
insert the clip:
·Trim to Fit: select to have CyberLink PowerDirector auto set the duration of
the color board/background to fit the gap to the right of the timeline slider.
Creating New Color Boards
CyberLink PowerDirector lets you create custom color boards using the color
selector, or by selecting an area in the media file preview window.
Creating a Color Board Using the Color Selector
To create a color board using the color selector, do this:
1. Click on the button.
2. Select From Color Selector.
3. In the color palette, do any of the following:
·Select one of the basic colors.
·Use the color picker to choose a color, and the leveler on the right to adjust
the shade.
·Type in the desired HSL or RGB values.
4. Click OK to close the color palette and add the new color board to the media
library.
128
CyberLink PowerDirector Help
Creating a Color Board from a Media File
To create a color board by selecting a pixel in the preview window, do this:
1. Add the media clip to the timeline that you want to use to create the color
board.
2. If required, use the playback controls to find the frame of video that contains
the color you want to use to create the color board.
3. Make sure the media file is selected in the timeline, i.e. that a preview of the
media file is displayed in the preview window.
4. Click on the button.
5. Select From Preview.
6. In the Select Color from Preview window, use the eye dropper to select the
pixel in the video preview image that you want to use to create a color board.
7. Click OK to close the window and add the new color board to the media
library.
Adding Audio Clips
Audio clips allow you to add background music or a narrative voice-over to your
video production. You can add audio clips to the audio portion of a video track, to
the voice track, or to the music track.
Note: you can add transitions between two audio clips on any of the
available audio tracks. To do this, go to the Transitions Room and then
select Audio from the transition library filter drop-down. See Using
Transitions for more information on adding transitions between two clips.
If you are not sure which tracks you can add audio to, just select a clip in the media
library. The tracks in the timeline you can add the audio to will "light up". For more
information on what media you can add to which track, see Timeline Tracks.
Note: you can add additional audio tracks to your project's timeline in the
Track Manager. See Track Manager for more information.
To insert audio into the workspace, do one of the following:
129
Arranging Media in Your Production
Note: if you want to add audio to a precise position on the timeline, consider
using timeline markers. See Adding Timeline Markers for more information.
·use the timeline slider to set the position where you want the audio, select the
audio file in the library, and then click:
· to add it to the audio portion of the selected video track.
· to add it to the voice track.
· to add it to the music track. The music track is always
the bottom track in the timeline.
·use the timeline slider to set the position where you want the audio, right-
click on the audio file in the library, and then select:
·Add to Voice Track to add it to the voice track.
·Add to Music Track to add it to the music track. The music track is always
the bottom track in the timeline.
You can also manually drag and drop an audio clip to a desired position on any of
the audio tracks available it the timeline.
When adding audio to the timeline (inserting or dragging and dropping), if the
timeline slider is over an existing clip, or you drop it on an existing clip, you are
prompted to use one of the ripple editing options to insert the clip:
·Overwrite: select to overwrite the existing clip with the newly added audio
clip.
·Insert: select to split the clip and insert the new audio clip between the two
portions. CyberLink PowerDirector also only moves the clips on the same
track to the right.
·Insert and Move All Clips: select to split the clip and insert the new audio clip
between the two portions. CyberLink PowerDirector also moves all of the
media clips on the timeline that lie to the right of the inserted clip, right.
·Crossfade: select to lay the audio over a portion of the existing clip and auto
add a constant gain transition between the two clips.
130
CyberLink PowerDirector Help
Note: the Crossfade option does not overwrite the content on the track,
instead adding a transition between the two clips. The Crossfade option is
only available if the end of the new clip is not over any existing content on
the track.
·Replace: select to replace the current audio clip on the timeline with the new
audio clip. Use this option if you don't want to change the structure of the
current content on the timeline.
Note: if the duration of the audio clip you are replacing is shorter than the
newly added audio clip, CyberLink PowerDirector automatically trims it to fit
the original clip's duration.
If the timeline slider is in a gap between two clips on an audio timeline track when
inserting audio, you are prompted to use one of these ripple editing options to
insert the clip:
·Trim to Fit: select to have CyberLink PowerDirector auto trim off the end of
the audio clip to fit the gap to the right of the timeline slider.
·Speed up to Fit: select to have CyberLink PowerDirector auto speed up the
audio clip so that it fits the gap to the right of the timeline slider.
Syncing Audio
When you add independent audio to any of the audio tracks on the timeline, it is
important to ensure that it syncs with the video in your production. CyberLink
PowerDirector displays the audio waveform on each clip that is added to the
timeline. The waveform is useful when trimming or splitting the audio clip, and also
when trying to sync audio to the video in your production.
Note: if you are trying to sync audio in an audio clip with the audio is a video
clip (because they have the same source audio), you can use Sync by
Audio to sync the clips.
You can even zoom in on the timeline for more precise syncing, as the waveform is
viewable down to the 1/10 frame level.
131
Arranging Media in Your Production
Note: if an audio clip's waveform is not displayed, it may be because this
option was disable in preferences. You can enable it again by selecting
Show sound waveform in timeline in General Preferences.
Once zoomed in, you can use the waveform in conjunction with Timeline Markers
to sync media more precisely in your video production.
Music Beat Detection
Use the Music Beat Detection* feature in CyberLink PowerDirector to analyze audio
clips or video clip's with music in your video production. Once analyzed, music
beat clip markers are added to the clip marker track to help you sync the audio to
the video in your production. You can also manually add music beat clip markers.
Note: * optional feature in CyberLink PowerDirector. Check the version
table on our web site for detailed versioning information.
You can then use these music beat clip markers for more precise arrangement and
syncing of media with the added music.
To add music beat clip markers, do this:
1. Add an audio clip or video clip with music to the timeline.
2. Right-click on the clip and then select Use Automatic Music Beat Detection.
The Automatic Music Beat Detection window opens.
3. Use the slider to set the Minimum time between beat markers. For example, if
you know the beats in the music are once a second, you can set the slider to
apply markers ever 2.0 seconds if you want to place media on every other
beat.
4. Click Detect. CyberLink PowerDirector will analyze the clip, and then detect
and apply the music beat clip markers to the clip marker track.
5. Click on Apply to close the Music Beat Detection window.
132
CyberLink PowerDirector Help
Once the music beat clip markers are added, media will snap to them when added
to a track on the timeline.
Also note that the music beat clip markers are connected to the clip. So if you
move the clip on the timeline, its music beat clip markers will move with in on the
track.
To remove the music beat clip markers, do one of the following:
·remove the music clip from the timeline.
·right-click on a music beat marker on the clip marker track, and then select
Remove Selected Clip Marker.
·right-click on the clip marker track, and then select Remove All Music Clip
Markers.
Manually Adding Music Beat Clip Markers
To manually add music beat clip markers to the clip marker track, do this:
1. Add an audio clip or video clip with music to the timeline.
2. Right-click on the clip and then select Use Automatic Music Beat Detection.
The Use Automatic Music Beat Detection window opens.
3. If required, use the magnification tools to zoom in on the audio waveform for
the selected clip.
4. Manually drag the timeline slider to the position on the audio waveform
where you want to add the music beat clip marker.
5. Click Add (or the press the A key on your keyboard) to add a music beat clip
marker at the current position.
6. Repeat the above steps to add as many music beat clip markers as you want.
133
Arranging Media in Your Production
7. Click on Apply to close the Music Beat Detection window.
Note: you can also use the player controls to play the clip, and then
continually click the Add button (or press the A key on your keyboard) to
add the music beat clip markers when you hear a beat.
Syncing Clips by Audio
If you have two or more clips that have the same source audio, you can use Sync by
Audio to align the starting positions of the clips on the timeline so that they are all
in sync.
Note: you can sync both video and audio clips using this feature.
To sync two or more clips by audio*, do this:
Note: * optional feature in CyberLink PowerDirector. Check the version
table on our web site for detailed versioning information.
1. Select all of the clips on the timeline that you want to sync.
2. Click the Sync by Audio function button that displays after selecting the clips.
3. CyberLink PowerDirector analyzes all the selected clips and then realigns them
so that their audio is in sync.
Using the Magic Movie Wizard
If you are new to the editing process and not sure how or where to get started, then
the Magic Movie Wizard can help. The Magic Movie Wizard takes all of your media
and creates a completed video production in just a few steps. You can then edit the
created production, output it to a file, or burn it to a disc.
Note: if you want more creative control than the Magic Movie Wizard
provides, you can also use the Theme Designer to create your video
production. The Theme Designer allows you to customize the theme
templates used and choose the exact images, video clips, and background
music you want in your production. See Using the Theme Designer for more
information.
To use the Magic Movie Wizard, do this:
134
CyberLink PowerDirector Help
1. Click the button above the timeline and then select Magic Movie
Wizard.
2. Select which media you want to use in your movie, as follows:
·Media Library: the Magic Movie Wizard uses all of the media in the library to
create your movie.
·Timeline: the Magic Movie Wizard only uses the media that is currently on the
timeline.
Note: any edits you previously made in your project to the clips in the
timeline are ignored. The Magic Movie Wizard uses the source clips to
create you final movie.
·Select items: the Magic Movie Wizard only uses the media that is currently
selected in the library.
3. Click Next to continue.
4. See the step by step description in Easy Editor for more information on the
remaining steps in the Magic Movie Wizard.
Using the Slideshow Creator
The Slideshow Creator is the easiest way to instantly turn your photos into a
dynamic slideshow.
To create a slideshow using the Slideshow Creator, do this:
1. Drag all the photos that you want in the slideshow into the timeline.
2. Make sure the photos are selected, and then click on the Slideshow button to
launch the Slideshow Creator.
3. See the step by step description in Slideshow Creator for more information on
the remaining steps required to create your slideshow.
Note: after the Slideshow Creator has created your slideshow and inserted
it into the timeline, if you would like to view each individual slide/photo in the
slideshow for advanced editing, just right-click on the file in the timeline and
then select Show Individual Photos.
135
Editing Your Media
Editing Your Media
Chapter 8:
Once you have your video clips, audio files, and images in the editing workspace/
timeline you can start editing them. Editing is a broad term that encompasses a
number of different functions, including splitting, trimming, applying fixes, and
much more.
This section describes all of the editing processes you can perform on your media
clips.
Content Aware Editing
Use Content Aware Editing* on your video clips to automatically generate the best
outputted video content for your production.
Note: * optional feature in CyberLink PowerDirector.
Content Aware Editing analyzes your video clips to find the portions that it believes
are the best and most interesting moments, and also the portions that need fixing.
You can then simply click on the "good parts" to include them in the video
production, and choose to fix or trim away the "bad parts".
Note: during the analysis process, CyberLink PowerDirector also detects
all the scenes in the video clips and marks them on the Content Aware
Editing window timeline with .
To analyze the video clips and then open the Content Aware Editing window, right-
click on a video clip in the media library or the timeline, and then select Content
Aware Editing.
If you would like to perform a batch analysis on multiple video clips at once, do
this:
1. In the Media Room, click on to access the library menu and then select
Content Aware Details.
2. Select all the video clips in the Analyze column and then click the Analyze
button.
136
CyberLink PowerDirector Help
3. Once the analysis is complete, click the button next to the video clip
that you want to edit in the Content Aware Editing window.
Note: the Content Aware Details view displays the analysis results for all
the video clips analyzed and edited in Content Aware Editing. See Content
Aware Details for more information.
Using Content Aware Editing
When editing video clips in Content Aware Editing, its window displays as follows:
A - Player Controls, B - Segment Selection Tools, C - Selected Segments, D - Deselected Segments, E -
Detected Scene Markers, F - Recommended Segments, G - Segments Need Fixing, H - Fix All
Segments, I - Content Selection Categories
Note: the preview quality of the video in the Content Aware Editing window is
dependent on preview quality setting specified in preview/display options.
See Preview Quality for more information on selecting a preview quality.
137
Editing Your Media
In the Content Aware Editing window, the segments indicated in green are the
recommended portions of the clip that CyberLink PowerDirector believes are the
most interesting, or are the "good parts". They may include camera zooms or pans,
and segments that contain a lot of motion or people talking (speech). CyberLink
PowerDirector also performs face detection on the video clip to highlight sections
that include people's faces.
The light brown segments are parts that need fixing, because either the video is
shaky or poorly lit. You can choose to fix or remove these "bad parts".
Check the content selection categories for details of what each highlighted
segment consists of.
Note: hover your mouse over the highlighted segments for more detailed
information about what they include.
The segments that are not highlighted are parts of your video that CyberLink
PowerDirector believes are not necessary to include. You can however include these
segments by selecting them with the mark in and out buttons.
Previewing the Video Content
Use the player controls to preview the entire video clip. To preview a specific
highlighted segment, right-click on it and then select Preview this Segment.
Playback stops once the selected segment playback is complete.
Fixing Content
If the segments that CyberLink PowerDirector has highlighted for removal contain
parts of your video that you don't want to exclude, you can instantly fix them in the
Content Aware Editing window.
To fix segments, do either of the following:
·right-click on the highlighted segment and then select Apply Fix to Entire
Scene. Select this option to apply the required fix to the entire scene in the
video clip, which is indicated by the detected scene markers. This ensures
there are no sudden changes in lighting or other video properties in the scene.
In the Auto Fixer window use the player controls to preview how the fixed
content will look. If satisfied with the results, ensure that Apply auto fix is
selected and then click on OK to apply the fix to the scene.
138
CyberLink PowerDirector Help
Note: if no scenes were detected in your video clip, the fix is applied to the
entire clip when Apply Fix to Entire Scene is selected.
·right-click on the highlighted segment and then select Apply Fix to this
Segment. Select this option to apply the required fix to just the selected
segment of video. In the Auto Fixer window use the player controls to preview
how the fixed content will look. If satisfied with the results, ensure that Apply
auto fix is selected and then click on OK to apply the fix to the selected
segment of the video clip only.
·click the button to have CyberLink PowerDirector auto fix each of the
highlighted segments in the same content selection category.
CyberLink PowerDirector will fix the segments, which are then indicated with a
wrench icon.
Note: if you'd like to undo any of the fixes you made in the Content Aware
Editing window, just right-click on a fixed segment and then select Remove
Applied Fix.
Content Selection
Use the segment selection tools to begin selecting the video content you want to
include in the trimmed clip. Any content segments you add to the deselected list,
or do not select, will be trimmed out of the video clip.
Note: you must add at least one segment to the Selected list to enable the
OK button and trim the video clip.
Selecting Content
To select video content, do any of the following:
·click on a highlighted segment and then click the Selected button.
·right-click on a segment and then select Add to Selected List.
139
Editing Your Media
·click on to add all of the video content, except the content in the
Deselected list, to the Selected list. CyberLink PowerDirector will remove any
content you previously added to the Selected list.
·use the player controls to find and then click on to mark the beginning of
a segment of video you want to include. Use the player controls or drag the
timeline slider and then click to mark the end. Once selected, click on
Selected to add to the Selected list.
Once you are done selecting all the content, click the button in the Selected list
to preview what the trimmed video clip will look like. Select a segment and then
click if you want to remove it from the list.
Click on OK to trim the video clip as specified. The trimmed video is automatically
inserted into the timeline at the current timeline slider position.
Deselecting Content
To deselect video content, do any of the following:
·click on a highlighted segment and then click the Deselected button.
·right-click on a segment and then select Add to Deselected List.
·use the player controls to find and then click on to mark the beginning of
a segment of video you do not want to include. Use the player controls or
drag the timeline slider and then click to mark the end. Once selected,
click on Deselected to add to the Deselected list.
140
CyberLink PowerDirector Help
Once you are done deselecting all the content, click the button in the
Deselected list to preview the content that will be trimmed out. Select a segment
and then click if you want to remove it from the list.
Click on OK to trim the video clip as specified. The trimmed video is placed in the
timeline for you automatically.
Splitting a Clip
You can quickly split a media clip that is on any track in the timeline into two
separate clips. To do this, move the timeline slider (or use the player controls) to the
position in the clip where you want to split it. Next, click the button above
the timeline to separate it into two clips that you can then move around separately
from one another.
141
Editing Your Media
You can also use it to quickly remove unwanted portions of a media clip, or if you
want to insert other media between the two portions.
Unlinking Video/Audio Clips
When you add a video clip with audio to the timeline, its audio portion is visible on
its corresponding audio track. You can unlink the two portions of the clip, allowing
you to modify them separately, remove one completely from the timeline, or use it
elsewhere in your project.
To unlink the audio from a video clip, right-click on it in the timeline and then
select Unlink Video and Audio. To link the two files back together, select them both,
right-click on them, and then select Link Video and Audio.
142
CyberLink PowerDirector Help
Trimming Video and Audio Clips
Use the trim functions to remove unwanted portions from your video and audio
clips. You can use the Single Trim function to trim off the beginning and/or ends of
a video clip, or the Multi Trim function to remove multiple portions at once. The
Trim Audio function lets you trim audio visually, using its waveform.
Note: when you trim media clips, the program does not delete any of the
original source media's content. It just marks the requested edits on the
clips and then applies the edits when it renders the final video during
production.
Trimming a Video Clip
To trim a video clip, select it in the timeline and then click the button above
the timeline.
Performing a Single Trim
Use the video trim function to quickly trim off unwanted portions at the beginning
and end of a video clip on the timeline.
143
Editing Your Media
A - Preview Area, B - Marked Positions in Clip, C - Mark Out Position Slider, D - Lock Duration, E -
Selected Content, F - Mark In Position Slider, G - Player Controls
To trim a video clip, do this.
1. Select the video clip on the timeline you want to trim, and then click on the
Trim button above the timeline.
2. If required, click on the Single Trim tab.
3. Use the player controls to find where you want the trimmed clip to begin, and
then click to set the mark in position or drag the mark in position slider
to this position.
144
CyberLink PowerDirector Help
4. Use the player controls to find where you want the trimmed clip to end, and
then click to set the mark out position or drag the mark out position
slider to this position.
Note: you can click to lock the duration of the video you want trimmed.
Once locked, click and drag the selected content to the exact position you
want trimmed.
5. If required, you can preview what the trimmed clip will look like by clicking
Output and then clicking the play button on the player controls. Click Original
if you want to play the original video.
6. Click OK to set your changes and trim the clip.
Note: you can reenter the trim window to refine the trimmed clip at any time.
You can also drag the trimmed edges of a video clip on the timeline as well.
Performing a Multi Trim
The multi trim function lets you trim out one or more segments of a video clip at
once, resulting in a series of clips that are independent from the original video.
145
Editing Your Media
A - Preview Area, B - Timeline, C - Timeline Magnifier*, D - Magnified Timeline, E - Selected Segments,
F - Magnifier Controls*, G - Trimming Tools, H -Player Controls, I - Frame Display
Note: * optional feature in CyberLink PowerDirector. Check the version
table on our web site for detailed versioning information.
To perform a multi trim on a video clip, do this.
1. Select the video clip on the timeline you want to trim, and then click on the
Trim button above the timeline.
2. Click on the Multi Trim tab.
3. If required, use and to change the magnification level on the video
clip. You can magnify the timeline down to each individual frame for a more
precise edit. The size of the timeline magnifier changes based on the
magnification level set.
146
CyberLink PowerDirector Help
4. Use the player controls to find the beginning of the first trimmed segments,
or the mark in position.
5. Click to set the mark in position.
6. Use the player controls or drag the timeline slider to position where you want
the first segment to end, and then click to set the mark out position. The
trimmed segment is added to Selected Segments section.
7. Repeat the above steps to trim out all the required segments.
8. If required, you can preview what the trimmed clip will look like by clicking
Output and then clicking the play button on the player controls. Click Original
if you want to play the original video.
9. Click OK to set your changes and trim the clip.
Note: the segments of video that CyberLink PowerDirector inserts into the
timeline are indicated in blue. If you want to remove these segments from
the trimmed video clip, click the button to invert the trimming results.
Extra Trimming Tools
On the Multi Trim tab, you can also use the following extra trimming tools to:
·you can manually drag the mark in and out sliders on the timeline or
magnified timeline to edit the current positions if required.
·detect all the scenes in the selected video clip by clicking on . Once
selected, choose whether you want the program to add all the scenes to the
trimmed segments area, or just mark the scene breaks for you on the timeline.
Trimming an Audio Clip
Use the audio trim function to quickly trim off unwanted portions at the beginning
and end of an audio clip on the timeline.
147
Editing Your Media
A - Audio Waveform, B - Timeline Slider, C - Marked Positions in Clip, D - Zoom Controls, E - Mark In/
Out Buttons, F - Player Controls
To trim an audio clip, do this.
1. Select the audio clip on the timeline you want to trim, and then click on the
button above the timeline.
2. If required, use and to zoom in and out on the audio waveform for a
more precise edit.
3. Use the player controls to find where you want the trimmed clip to begin, or
the mark in position.
148
CyberLink PowerDirector Help
4. Click to set the mark in position.
5. Use the player controls or drag the timeline slider to position where you want
to audio clip to end, and then click to set the mark out position.
6. Click OK to set your changes and trim the clip.
Note: you can reenter the trim window to refine the trimmed clip at any time.
You can also drag the trimmed edges of the audio clip on the timeline as
well.
Setting a Media Clip's Duration
When you add images, color boards, and backgrounds to a timeline track, you set
how long they are displayed in your video production. Unlike video and audio clips
which have a maximum length, these media clips can have any duration you want.
Note: to set the duration of a video or audio clip, see Trimming Video and
Audio Clips.
To set a media clip's duration, do this:
Note: you can also set the duration of effects, such as PiP objects, particle
effects, and title effects, using this same method.
1. Select the clip in the timeline.
2. Click the Duration button (or right-click on the clip, select Set Clip Attributes,
and then select Set Duration).
3. In the Duration Settings window, enter in the how long you want it to display
in your video production. You can set the duration down to the number of
frames.
4. Click on OK.
You can also change the duration of a media clip (including video and audio clips)
by selecting it and then dragging the end of the clip to the desired length.
Note: you can only lengthen a video or audio clip back to its original
duration.
149
Editing Your Media
Setting TV (Video Clip
Interlacing) Format
All video clips have an interlacing (TV) format, which specifies how frames are
displayed. Using video clips with conflicting (or incorrect) TV formats can result in
degraded video quality in your final production.
Before you produce your video, it is recommended that you set all of the video
clips to the same format. While CyberLink PowerDirector can normally detect and
suggest the correct format, some interlaced video (such as a video with very little
motion) may be misjudged as a progressive video.
CyberLink PowerDirector automatically produces interlaced video for DVD and DV-
AVI. Only change this setting if you are sure that CyberLink PowerDirector has
wrongly set the format.
Note: this is an extremely important step to take before production, as it
can drastically affect final video quality. It is recommended that you check
the user guide for your video camcorder to determine what format your video
should be.
To set a video clip's TV format, do this:
1. Right-click on a video clip in the timeline, select Set Clip Attributes, and then
Set TV format.
2. In the Interlace/Progressive Settings window, do one of the following:
·click the Scan and Suggest Format button to have CyberLink PowerDirector
auto detect and set the format for you.
·manually select one of the three available formats. See the description on the
right of the window for a detailed description of each format.
3. Click OK to set your changes.
Adjusting Video Clip Aspect
Ratio
Some of the video clips in the timeline may not have the same aspect ratio as your
project/video production. You can adjust the aspect ratio for these clips, so that all
the media in your video production has the same aspect ratio.
150
CyberLink PowerDirector Help
To adjust a video clip's aspect ratio, do this:
1. Right-click on a video clip in the timeline, select Set Clip Attributes, and then
Set Aspect Ratio.
2. In the Clip Aspect Ratio Settings window, do one of the following:
·if you want your project to use the original aspect ratio of the selected video
clip, select Detect aspect ratio automatically. If the clip's aspect ratio is
different from the project's, then CyberLink PowerDirector will letterbox the
video clip to fill in the rest of the frame.
·if the aspect ratio of the selected clip is 4:3, then select The aspect ratio of the
video is 4:3 option. If the project aspect ratio is not 4:3, select the stretch
method to convert the 4:3 clip to the project's aspect ratio.
·if the aspect ratio of the selected clip is 16:9, then select The aspect ratio of the
video is 16:9 option. If the project aspect ratio is not 16:9, select the stretch
method to convert the 16:9 clip to the project's aspect ratio.
·if the aspect ratio of the selected clip is 9:16, then select The aspect ratio of the
video is 9:16 option. If the project aspect ratio is not 9:16, select the stretch
method to convert the 9:16 clip to the project's aspect ratio.
·if the selected clip has an aspect ratio other than 4:3, 16:9 or 9:16, then select
the Not 4:3, 16:9 or 9:16 option. Next, select the stretch method to convert
the video clip's aspect ratio to the project's aspect ratio.
·if you are not sure what the aspect ratio of the original video clip is, click the
Detect and Suggest button. CyberLink PowerDirector will select one of the
above options for you.
Note: for best results when changing a clip's aspect ratio, select the CLPV
option. CLPV (CyberLink Pano Vision) is video stretching technology from
CyberLink that produces minimal distortion in the center of the picture.
3. Select the Apply to all video clips option if you want to apply the current
setting to all the video clips on the same track.
4. Click OK to set your changes.
Stretching Images
Some of the images/photos in the timeline may not have the same aspect ratio as
your video production. You can stretch these images, so that all the media in your
video production has the same aspect ratio.
151
Editing Your Media
To stretch an image, do this:
1. Right-click on an image in the timeline, select Set Clip Attributes, and then
select Set Image Stretch Mode.
2. In the drop-down in the Image Stretch Mode Settings window, select one of
the following:
·Stretch clip to 4:3/16:9 aspect ratio: select this option if you want CyberLink
PowerDirector to stretch the sides of the select image to fit your project's
aspect ratio.
·Use CLPV to stretch clip to 4:3/16:9 aspect ratio: select this option to use CLPV
to stretch the image. CLPV (CyberLink Pano Vision) is an image stretching
technology from CyberLink that produces minimal distortion in the center of
the image.
3. Select the Apply to all image clips option if you want to apply the
current setting to all the image clips on the same track.
4. Click OK to set your changes.
Cropping Images
You can completely customize the aspect ratio of the images in your video
production or crop out unwanted portions of a photo, using the crop image
function.
To crop an image, do this:
1. Select the image in the timeline and then click the button above the
timeline. You can also right-click on the image and then select Crop Image.
2. Set the size of the crop area by selecting one of the following:
·4:3: gives the crop area, and the resulting cropped image, a 4:3 aspect ratio.
·16:9: gives the crop area, and the resulting cropped image, a 16:9 aspect ratio.
·Freeform: select if you want to manually resize the crop area on the image
and give the resulting cropped image a custom aspect ratio.
·Custom: select if you want to set a custom aspect ratio for the cropped image
using the Width and Height fields.
152
CyberLink PowerDirector Help
3. Use the Cr op size controls to set the size of the crop area, and the resulting
cropped image. You can also manually drag the edges of the crop area on the
image to resize it as required.
4. Click OK to set your changes and crop the image.
Changing the Shape of Media
CyberLink PowerDirector lets you change the shape of the media in your video
production. Videos, images, and PiP objects added to the timeline have freeform
properties, so you can easily change their shape to create media that is different
from the usual rectangle or square shape.
CyberLink PowerDirector lets you change the X and Y positions for the four corners
and the center of a media clip, giving it a custom freeform shape.
Note: the top-left corner of the video frame is the 0 axis, with the bottom-
right corner having a value of 1.0, 1.0. The center position in the video frame
is 0.500, 0.500.
To change the shape of a media clip, do this:
1. Select a media clip on the timeline, and then ensure that you are in the Clip
preview mode so that the media crosshairs are displayed.
2. Use your mouse to click and drag the blue nodes in the corners of the media
clip, changing it to the desired freeform shape.
153
Editing Your Media
Note: you can also change the shape of media clips by altering their
freeform positions using keyframes. See Utilizing Keyframes on Media for
more information.
Fixing and Enhancing
Images/Videos
Select the media files on the timeline and then click the Fix/Enhance button to
apply instant fixes, such as lighting adjustments, lens correction, video/audio
denoise, video stabilization, and fix rotational camera shake*.
Note: * click on the button to consult the iHelp for more information
on using the available fix and enhance tools.
You can also enhance the media by adjusting color, white balance, or applying
TrueTheater HD* video enhancement technology from CyberLink on videos. The
Fix/Enhance feature also lets you adjust the 3D orientation* of 3D media to fix its 3D
effect when needed.
Note: * optional feature in CyberLink PowerDirector.
To begin fixing and enhancing your media, select it in the timeline and then click
the Fix/Enhance button.
154
CyberLink PowerDirector Help
You can apply fixes and video enhancements to the entire duration of a media clip,
or customize how they are displayed using keyframes. See Utilizing Keyframes on
Media for more information on customizing the way the fixes and enhancements
are displayed in your video production.
Applying ColorDirector Color Presets
In the Fix/Enhance panel you can apply CyberLink ColorDirector presets on your
video clips, instantly transforming the color and look of the clips.
Note: ColorDirector presets can be downloaded from DirectorZone and
imported into the Fix/Enhance panel by clicking and then selecting the
downloaded preset file on your hard drive.
To apply a ColorDirector color preset, do this:
1. Select the video clip in the timeline and then click the Fix/Enhance button.
2. Select the Color Presets check box.
3. Select one of the available color presets to apply it to the selected clip.
Advanced Fixes and Enhancements
If you have CyberLink PhotoDirector* and/or ColorDirector* installed on your
computer, you can access the advanced fixes and enhancements available in these
programs from within CyberLink PowerDirector. The adjustments you make to your
media clips are then imported back into your current video production.
Note: * optional feature in CyberLink PowerDirector.
CyberLink PhotoDirector is a photography program that lets you manage and
adjust your digital photos. CyberLink ColorDirector is a video editing program that
turns your video footage into eye-catching movies through the use of video color
creating and correcting.
To adjust an image in CyberLink PhotoDirector, do this:
1. Select the image clip on the timeline, click the Fix / Enhance button above the
timeline, and then the PhotoDirector button. The CyberLink PhotoDirector
program opens.
155
Editing Your Media
2. Perform the adjustments on the image as necessary. Please consult the help
file in CyberLink PhotoDirector for detailed information on adjusting and
editing images in that program.
3. Once you finish adjusting the image file in CyberLink PhotoDirector, click the
Back button within the program. Your changes are saved and the adjusted
image is imported back into the timeline.
To adjust a video clip in CyberLink ColorDirector, do this:
1. Select the video clip on the timeline, click the Fix / Enhance button above the
timeline, and then the ColorDirector button. The CyberLink ColorDirector
program opens.
2. Perform the adjustments on the video clip as necessary. Please consult the
help file in CyberLink ColorDirector for detailed information on adjusting
video clips in that program.
3. Once you finish editing the video clip in CyberLink ColorDirector, click the
Back button within the program. Your changes are saved and the adjusted
video clip is imported back into the timeline.
Utilizing Keyframes on Media
Use keyframes in your video production to define the start and end points of an
applied fix, enhancement, or effect on images, videos, and audio. You can also use
keyframes to change the volume level of your video and audio clips at specific
moments.
To use keyframes on your media, select the clip on the timeline and then click the
Keyframe* button to open the Keyframe Settings panel. See the available Keyframe
Settings below, and Adding Keyframes for information on applying these settings
at different moments in your video production.
Note: * optional feature in CyberLink PowerDirector. Check the version
table on our web site for detailed versioning information.
In the Keyframe Settings panel, the following options are available, depending on
the type of media selected:
156
CyberLink PowerDirector Help
Note: once you have customized the fixes, enhancements, and effects on a
clip using keyframes, you can right click on the clip and select Copy
Keyframe Attributes. This allows you to paste all of its keyframe
attributes onto another clip in the timeline, applying the same changes to
the clip. To apply just some of the keyframe attributes modified in this
panel, just right click on Fix/Enhance, Effect, Clip Attributes, or Volume
to copy and paste the changes to another clip.
Fix/Enhance
Use the available sliders to fix and enhance images, videos, and audio clips at the
current keyframe in your video production.
·Lighting Adjustment: adjust the lighting in video clips using the Degree slider.
Select Extrem e bac klight if you need to adjust the back lighting in the clip.
·Video Denoise: use the Degree slider to increase or decrease the amount of
video noise in video clips.
·Audio Denoise: for video and audio clips, use the Audio Denoise feature to
remove unwanted noise from clips. Select the type of noise from the drop-
down you are removing, and then use the Degree slider to set the intensity of
denoise on the clip.
·Video Enhancement: use the Degree slider to set the amount of TrueTheater
HD video enhancement applied to video clips.
·Color Adjustment: use the available sliders to adjust the exposure, brightness,
contrast, hue, saturation, sharpness, and more on images and videos.
·White Balance: use the Color temperature and Tint sliders to manually adjust
the white balance in images and videos, or select White calibration and then
click to have CyberLink PowerDirector auto calibrate for you.
Effect
When you apply video effects to media clips on the timeline, you can use
keyframes to adjust the intensity of the effect at different moments of the clip. See
Adding Video Effects for information on adding effects to your media.
Note: the settings and sliders that are available in the Keyframe Settings
panel are completely dependent on the type of effect you are editing.
157
Editing Your Media
Clip Attributes
In the Clip Attributes section you can adjust the position, size, opacity, freeform
shape, and more for media clips in your video production.
·Position: set the position of media clips at different moments (keyframes) in
your video production. Adjusting the X and Y values between keyframes lets
you manually create motion in your video. When you create motion for PiP
media, you indicate where on the video image you want the PiP media to
appear by adding keyframes. To create the motion, CyberLink PowerDirector
will ensure it is in the desired location at the specified time. This can cause the
PiP media to appear jerky, as it speeds up and slows down as it moves
through the frame. To make the movement look smoother, you can use the
Ease in/out options. Select Ease in to slow down the PiP media as it enters a
keyframe. Select Ease out if you want it to gradually accelerate out of the
keyframe.
Note: CyberLink PowerDirector sets the value of the top-left corner of the
media as the 0 axis, with the bottom-right corner having a value of 1.0, 1.0.
The center position in the video frame is 0.500, 0.500.You can more easily
adjust clip position and motion in the PiP Designer. See Adding Motion to
PiP Media for more details.
·Height: set the height of media clips at different moments (keyframes) in your
video production.
·Width: set the width of media clips at different moments (keyframes) in your
video production.
Note: by default, when you adjust the height or width of a clip, the other
value is also changed. Deselect the M aintain Aspect Ratio checkbox if
you just want to change a clip's height or width.
·Opacity: use the slider to adjust the opacity of images and video clips at
different moments (keyframes) in your video production.
·Rotation: enter in the preferred orientation in degrees for media clips at
different moments (keyframes) in your video production.
·Freeform position: in the eight freeform position fields provided, define the
shape of the selected media clip by setting the X and Y positions for its four
corners in the video frame. By entering different values at different moments
(keyframes) in your video production, the clip's freeform shape can change
over time in your video production. See Changing the Shape of Media for
more information on freeform media clips.
158
CyberLink PowerDirector Help
·Enable 3D depth on the PiP media: if you are creating a 3D video production,
select this option to give the PiP media a 3D* effect. Once enabled, use the
slider to set the amount of depth you want the PiP media to have in 3D.
Dragging the slider left will make the 3D PiP object seem nearer to the
audience (in the foreground), while dragging it right will make it appear
farther away (in the background).
Note: when using this feature, select the button to enable 3D mode for
best editing results. See Previewing in 3D Mode for more information on
using this mode. * Optional feature in CyberLink PowerDirector. Check the
version table on our web site for detailed versioning information.
Volume
For video and audio clips in your video production, use the available slider to adjust
the level of the selected clip's volume at different moments in your production.
Adding Keyframes
In the Keyframe Settings window, there is a mini timeline for the selected media
clip. The timeline matches the duration of the selected media clip.
159
Editing Your Media
You can resize the timeline ruler and move the timeline slider, just like on the main
timeline.
To add a keyframe to the keyframe timeline, do this:
Note: once you have customized the fixes, enhancements, and effects on a
clip using keyframes, you can right click on the clip and select Copy
Keyframe Attributes. This allows you to paste these keyframe attributes
on another clip in the timeline, applying the same changes to the clip.
1. Use the player controls to find the moment in your media clip where you
want its properties to change.
160
CyberLink PowerDirector Help
2. In the panel on the left, use the slider or other options to change the clips
properties as required. Note that a keyframe marker is added at that moment
in timeline.
3. Use the player controls to find the next moment you want to add the next
keyframe, and then modify the clip properties as required again.
161
Editing Your Media
4. Repeat these steps to create the kind of effect you want in your video
production using keyframes. In the above example, the brightness of the
media clip will slowly dim between the two keyframe moments.
Modifying and Removing Keyframes
At any time you can modify the keyframes added, by selecting it and changing the
clip's properties, or dragging it to another position on the timeline. To remove a
keyframe, select it on the timeline and then click .
Note: if you want to reset the changes made at a keyframe, just ensure the
keyframe is selected and then click next to the option/parameter you
want to reset back to the original.
Muting Audio
You can mute the audio in a video clip (or in any audio clip on the timeline) simply
by right-clicking on it in the timeline and then selecting Mute Clip. If you added any
audio volume keys previously, they are hidden.
To restore sound to the clip, right-click on the clip and then deselect Mute Clip.
162
CyberLink PowerDirector Help
Note: if you would like to mute the audio of an entire track, right-click on the
track and then select Mute Track. This is useful if you have video on a PiP
track and you don't want any of its audio in your final production.
Advanced Audio Editing
You can edit the audio in your video production in CyberLink AudioDirector* and/
or WaveEditor*, depending on your preference and which one is installed on your
computer. CyberLink AudioDirector and WaveEditor are companion programs that
let you perform more advanced editing on your audio clips.
To edit an audio clip in CyberLink AudioDirector or WaveEditor, do this:
1. Select an audio or a video clip (with audio) on the timeline, click the Edit
Audio* button above the timeline, and then select AudioDirector or
WaveEditor. The CyberLink AudioDirector/WaveEditor program opens.
2. Perform the edits on the audio clip as necessary. Please consult the help file
within the program directly for detailed information on editing audio.
3. Once you finish editing the audio file in CyberLink AudioDirector/WaveEditor,
exit the program, and then click Yes to save your changes and import your
edited audio clip back into the timeline.
Note: * optional feature in CyberLink PowerDirector. Check the version
table on our web site for detailed versioning information.
Time Info
When a DV-AVI video clip captured from a DV tape camcorder or an EXIF image is
added to the timeline, the Time Info button is enabled. Click the Time Info button
to enable the date or time stamp (displayed as an image) that was captured from
the original camcorder or digital camera. You may also add a text remark to your
video or image if required.
Note: CyberLink PowerDirector does not support the enabling of running
time codes on video files.
163
Editing Your Media
Magic Fix
With Magic Fix CyberLink PowerDirector can auto stabilize videos taken with shaky
hands, enhance a video's audio, or the quality of a video's image. Magic Fix can also
auto remove red-eye from photos, or improve the clarity on photos that are out of
focus.
To use Magic Fix to fix and edit a media clip, select it on the timeline, click on the
button above the timeline, and then select Magic Fix.
Click on the button to consult the iHelp for more information on using
these features.
Magic Cut
You can use Magic Cut* to have CyberLink PowerDirector auto-edit your video clips
using video technology that locates and keeps the most interesting moments,
while discarding sections of lesser importance. The Magic Cut tool is ideal for
condensing long video segments into shorter clips. For example Magic Cut can edit
a one hour video down to ten minutes.
Note: * optional feature in CyberLink PowerDirector. Check the version
table on our web site for detailed versioning information.
To use Magic Cut on a video clip, select it on the timeline, click on the
button above the timeline, and then select Magic Cut.
Click on the button to consult the iHelp for more information on using this
feature.
164
CyberLink PowerDirector Help
Using the Tools
Chapter 9:
CyberLink PowerDirector includes a number of tools you can use to edit your media
and add cool and creative effects. Select a media clip on the timeline, and then
click the Tools button to use one of the following tools:
·Power Tools
·Motion Tracker
·Action Camera Center
·Blending Effect
·View Designer
Note: * optional feature in CyberLink PowerDirector. Check the version
table on our web site for detailed versioning information.
Using the Power Tools
Select a media clip on the timeline, then the Tools button, and then Pow er T ools to
perform a range of powerful functions, including:
·2D to 3D*: select this option to convert any 2D images or videos into 3D,
using TrueTheater 3D. Use the Scene Depth slider to adjust the amount of
depth in the resulting 3D image.
·Video/Audio in Reverse*: when enabled on a selected video or audio clip, it
plays backwards.
·Crop & Zoom: select this option to crop out the edges of the video frame or
zoom in on a specific portion of the video. Select the Crop/Zoom button to
define the area you want to crop out/zoom in on. See Crop & Zoom Video for
detailed information on customizing the zoom by adjusting the cropped area
(focus area) of the video.
·Video/Audio Speed: select this option to change the speed of a video or audio
clip. For audio clips, just enter the desired audio length in the Modified audio
length field to change the clip's speed. You can also use the Speed multiplier
slider to speed audio up by 2X, or slow it down by 0.5X. Drag it left to slow
165
Using the Tools
down the clip, or right to speed it up. For video clips, click the Speed
Adjustment button to adjust the video speed in the Video Speed Designer.
See Adjusting Video Speed in the Video Speed Designer for more details on
adjusting the speed.
Note: you can also hold down the Ctrl key on your keyboard and then click
and drag the edge of a video or audio clip on the timeline to manually
change its speed to fit your required duration.
·Video/Photo Rotation: select this option and then use the buttons to rotate a
video or image up to 360 degrees in either direction. You can also enter in a
custom rotation amount in the field provided, and press the Enter key on your
keyboard to apply it.
·Blending Mode: select this option to blend the selected video or image clip
with a clip above it in the timeline. Once selected, choose from the available
blending modes. See Blending Clips on the Timeline for more detailed
information about this feature and a description of the blending modes.
Note: * optional feature in CyberLink PowerDirector. Check the version
table on our web site for detailed versioning information.
Crop & Zoom Video
After you select Crop/Zoom button in Power Tools, the Crop/Zoom window
displays.
166
CyberLink PowerDirector Help
A - Focus Area, B - Rotation Amount, C - Focus Area Preview, D - Focus Area Aspect Ratio, E - Zoom In/
Out, F - TV Safe Zone/Grid Lines, G - Keyframe Buttons, H - Keyframe Timeline
To crop the video, you just need to resize the focus area. Here are some tips when
cropping videos:
·set the focus area aspect ratio by selecting one of the available options on the
right. Choose Freeform to manually resize the focus area shape to create a
custom aspect ratio for your cropped video.
·crop the video by resizing the focus area box the desired amount. The
cropping results are displayed in the focus area preview.
To add a zoom on the video, you need to use keyframes to customize the zoom.
Keyframes are frames of your video that define the start and end points of an effect,
167
Using the Tools
which in this example is the zoom in or out. Here are some tips when adding zooms
on videos:
·click on to add keyframes to the keyframe timeline. By adding keyframes
you can alter the zoom by adjusting the size of the focus area between two
points on the keyframe timeline.
·click on to duplicate the previous or next keyframe on the keyframe
timeline. Doing this copies the properties of the specified keyframe to the new
position.
·set the focus area aspect ratio by selecting one of the available options on the
right. Choose Freeform to manually resize the focus area shape to create a
custom aspect ratio for your zoom.
·add a rotation to the zoom by adding a keyframe to the keyframe timeline
and then entering the rotation amount in the field provided. You can also
click and drag on top of the focus area to rotate it manually.
When working in the Crop/Zoom window, you can also:
·click on to to zoom in or out on the preview window.
·click on to use the TV safe zone and grid lines to help with the precise
placement of the focus area on the video. Select Snap to Reference Lines to
have the focus area snap to the grid lines, TV safe zone, and boundary of the
video area.
When you are done cropping or zooming on a video, click the OK button to save
your changes. Your changes are applied to the video clip and updated on the video
timeline. If you want to edit the crop/zoom results, just reselect the clip on the
timeline and then reenter the Crop/Zoom window by selecting Tools > Power Tools.
Adjusting Video Speed in the Video
Speed Designer
The Video Speed Designer* let's you change the speed of an entire video clip, or just
a selected range using time shifts.
Note: * optional feature in CyberLink PowerDirector. Check the version
table on our web site for detailed versioning information.
168
CyberLink PowerDirector Help
A - Change Speed for Entire Clip, B - Change Speed for Selected Range, C - Preview Window, D - Video
Speed Designer Settings, E - Zoom on Timeline, F - Video Speed Designer Timeline
When you are done changing the video clip's speed, click the OK button to save
your changes. Your changes are applied to the video clip and updated on the video
timeline.
Changing the Speed for an Entire Clip
Click on the Entire Clip tab if you want to change the speed of the entire video clip.
To change the clip's speed, enter the desired video length in the New video
duration field. You can also use the Speed multiplier slider to manually speed up or
slow down the video clip. Drag it left to slow down the clip, or right to speed it up.
Use the player controls to preview the results of adjusting the clip's speed.
Configure the Video Speed Designer Settings to ensure you get your desired results.
You can click the Reset button at any time to undo your changes.
169
Using the Tools
Changing the Speed for a Selected Range
Click on the Selected Range tab in the Video Speed Designer to change the speed of
the clip for just a selected range of the video using a time shift.
Note: before you finish changing the speed for a selected range, configure
the Video Speed Designer Settings to ensure the best output results.
To change the video speed using a time shift, do this:
1. On the Selected R ange tab, use the player controls or drag the Video Speed
Designer timeline slider to the position in your video clip where you want the
time shift to start.
Note: use the zoom controls above the Video Speed Designer timeline to
zoom in on the video clip's timeline to more precisely add the time shift.
2. Click on the Create time shift button. CyberLink PowerDirector will create the
time shift, which is indicated in orange on the timeline.
3. If required, drag each end of the time shift so that it covers the segment of the
video you want to add the effect to.
Note: the length of the original time shift is dependent on how much you
have zoomed in on the Video Speed Designer timeline.
4. Change the video speed as required (see below) for the time
shift segment (selected range).
170
CyberLink PowerDirector Help
Note: you can create more than one time shift on a video clip. Just repeat
the above steps to add another.
Speed Effect
Make sure the created time shift is selected on the Video Speed Designer timeline
and enter a new Duration for the selected range in the field provided, or use the
Speed multiplier slider. Drag it left to slow down the segment, or right to speed it
up.
When you apply a speed effect to a selected range, by default the change in the
speed in the video is instantaneous once the timeline slider enters the time shift. If
you want it to be more gradual and look smoother, you can use the Ease in/out
options. Select Ease in if you want the change of speed at the beginning of the time
shift to gradually speed up/slow down to the specified speed. Select Ease out if you
want the video to gradually return to the original video speed at the end of the time
shift.
Video Speed Designer Settings
Click the button in the Video Speed Designer window to open the settings
window. The available options are as follows:
Audio setting:
·Remove audio: select this option if you want to mute the audio in the entire
video clip.
·Keep audio: select this option if you want to keep the audio in the edited
video clip. Select the Keep audio pitch (05X to 2X only) if you are changing the
speed of the video. Selecting this will stretch the audio to match the new
video's length, minimizing the warping of the sound as the video speed
changes.
Interpolation setting:
·Apply interpolated technology when available: select this option when
reducing the speed of the video. CyberLink PowerDirector uses frame
interpolated technology* to create a more advanced and smooth slow motion
effect.
171
Using the Tools
Note: * optional feature in CyberLink PowerDirector. Check the version
table on our web site for detailed versioning information.
Motion Tracker
The Motion Tracker* tool lets you track the motion of one or more objects in a
video clip. You can then add title text, effects, or PiP images/videos that move with
the tracked object in the video. To open the Motion Tracker, select a video clip on
the timeline and then select Tools > Motion Tracker.
Note: * optional feature in CyberLink PowerDirector. Check the version
table on our web site for detailed versioning information.
172
CyberLink PowerDirector Help
A - Tracker Steps and Properties, B - Tracker Selection Box, C - Preview Window, D - Tracker Timeline, E
- Track Object
When you are done using the Motion Tracker, click the OK button to save your
changes. Your changes are applied to the video clip and updated on the video
timeline.
Tracking the Motion of Objects in Videos
To track the motion of a specific object in a video clip, do this:
1. In the Motion Tracker window, if required, use the player controls or drag the
Motion Tracker timeline slider to the position in your video clip where you
want to begin tracking the object and then click .
Note: if you want to track the object for the entire duration of the clip, you do
not have to use the mark in and out buttons.
2. Ensure the video is paused and then place the tracker selection box over the
object you want to track by dragging and resizing it.
173
Using the Tools
174
CyberLink PowerDirector Help
3. If required, find the position in the video where you want the tracking to stop
and then click .
175
Using the Tools
4. Add some title text, a media clip, or effect that will move with the tracked
object. See Adding Motion Tracking Effects for more information.
176
CyberLink PowerDirector Help
5. Click the Track button to track the object and apply the effect. See Adding
and Editing Trackers for more detailed information on this and how to edit
them once added.
Note: you can track more than one object, or add multiple effects to one
object by adding multiple trackers.
Adding and Editing Trackers
When you track an object in the Motion Tracker, a tracker is added to the Motion
Tracker timeline.
177
Using the Tools
The timeline indicates the duration of the video clip, and green area is the amount
of time the object is tracked during the playback of the clip. If required, you can
adjust how long the object is tracked by clicking and dragging either end of the
tracker.
If you want to track another object in the same video clip, just click the Add a
tracker button. A new tracker is added to the Motion Tracker timeline.
Follow the same steps as when you added the first tracker. See Tracking the Motion
of Objects in Videos for more information. To edit the properties of a tracker when
there are more than one in the timeline, just select it.
178
CyberLink PowerDirector Help
You can also click to hide a tracker during the editing process, or to delete it
from your project.
Adding Motion Tracking Effects
There are three types of motion tracking effects that can be added to objects in the
Motion Tracker: title text, media clip, and a mosaic, spotlight, or blur effect.
Note: you can only add one of these tracking effects to a single tracker. If
you want to add more than one, just track the same object multiple times,
i.e. more than one tracker.
The motion tracking effects can be added before or after the object is tracked. You
can also edit the tracking effect properties at any time by selecting the tracker in
the Motion Tracker timeline.
Note: if you are adding a motion tracking effect to an object that is only
tracked for a portion of the clip, the timeline slider must be over the tracker
(green area) in the timeline before you can edit the motion tracking
properties.
Adding Title Text
179
Using the Tools
Click the button to add title text that will move and dynamically change
size (if enabled) as it follows the tracked object. Once clicked, update the title text
properties as follows:
1. Enter the required text in the text box provided.
2. Be sure to set the font face style, size, color, and layout using the available
font options.
3. Set the title text options as follows:
·Border: select this option if you want to include a border on the text. Click
to set the border color.
·Maintain aspect ratio: select this option to have the title text's aspect ratio
remain constant as it is resized as it moves with the object.
180
CyberLink PowerDirector Help
·Smooth: select this option if there is a lot of movement by the object. This will
minimize the amount of shake on the text as it follows the object.
·Adjust effect size with tracked object: select this option if you want the title
text to dynamically resize as the tracked object's size changes.
Note: once you exit the Motion Tracker and your changes are applied to the
video clip, a title text template is added to the video timeline independently.
If required, you can perform advanced editing on the title text's font, motion,
size, etc. in the Title Designer. See Modifying Titles in the Title Designer
for more information.
Adding Media Clips (Images, PiP Objects,
and Videos)
Click the button to add an image, PiP object, or video clip that will move
and dynamically change size (if enabled) as it follows the tracked object. Once
clicked, add the media clip as follows:
1. Click the Import Media Clip button, and then:
·Import From Hard Drive: to import a file that is on your computer's hard
drive.
·Import From Media Room: to import a file you previously imported into the
current PowerDirector project.
·Import From PiP Object Room: to import a PiP object that is currently in your
PiP Object Room.
2. If required, resize the media clip in the preview window to your liking.
3. Set the media clip options as follows:
·Border: select this option if you want to include a border around the media
clip. Click to set the border color.
·Smooth: select this option if there is a lot of movement by the object. This will
minimize the amount of shake on the media clip as it follows the object.
·Adjust effect size with tracked object: select this option if you want the media
clip to dynamically resize as the tracked object's size changes.
181
Using the Tools
Note: once you exit the Motion Tracker and your changes are applied to the
video clip, the added media clip is added to the video timeline
independently. If required, you can perform advanced editing on the clip's
motion, size, etc. in the PiP Designer. See Modifying Media in the PiP
Designer for more information.
Adding Mosaic, Spotlight, or Blur Effects
Click the button to add a mosaic, spotlight, or blur effect that will move
and dynamically change size (if enabled) as it follows the tracked object. Once
clicked, add the effects as follows:
1. From the available drop-down, select the effect you want to apply:
·Mosaic: this effects adds a pixelated blur on portions of the tracked object, for
example a person's face.
·Spotlight: this effect highlights the tracked object in the video.
·Blur: this effect blurs out portions the tracked object in the video.
·Gaussian Blur: this effect applies a softer blur on the tracked object in the
video.
2. If required, resize the effect in the preview window to your liking.
3. Depending on the effect you selected, modify the effect properties as follows:
·Grid scale: for the mosaic effect, drag this slider to adjust the size of the
squares in the pixelated blur.
·Light color: for the spotlight effect, click the colored box to set the color of
the spotlight.
·Brightness: for the spotlight effect, drag this slider to adjust the brightness of
the spotlight.
·Gradient: for the spotlight effect, drag this slider to adjust gradient and size of
the spotlight.
·Mask Type: for blur/gaussian blur, select the shape of the blur applied.
·Degree: for blur/gaussian blur, use this slider to set the strength of the blur.
·Gradient Depth: for blur/gaussian blur, use the slider to soften the blur's
gradient edge.
182
CyberLink PowerDirector Help
·Invert effect area: for blur/gaussian blur, select this option to invert the
blurred area. When selected, the area outside the mask is blurred out.
·Smooth: for all the effects, select this option if there is a lot of movement by
the object. This will minimize the amount of shake on the effect as it follows
the object.
·Adjust effect size with tracked object: for all the effects, select this option if
you want the effect to dynamically resize as the tracked object's size changes.
Note: once you exit the Motion Tracker and your changes are applied to the
video clip, you can perform advanced editing on the effect in the Effect
Settings panel. See Modifying a Video Effect for more information.
Action Camera Center
In the Action Camera Center you can fix video clips or add effects that highlight the
action sequences in the video. To open the Action Camera Center, select a video
clip on the timeline and then select Tools > Action Camera Center.
Note: you can also use the Action Camera Center on clips that are still in
the media library. To do this, select a clip in the media library, click the
button, and then select Action Camera Center.
See Editing Video in the Action Camera Center for a detailed description of this
feature.
Blending Effect
In the Blending Effect Designer you can blend a selected clip with an image preset
or template to create a unique looking effect in your video. To access the Blending
Effect Designer, select a media clip on the timeline and then select Tools > Blending
Effect.
Note: you can also use the Blending Effect Designer on clips that are still in
the media library. To do this, select a clip in the media library, click the
button, and then select Blending Effect.
See Creating Blends in the Blending Effect Designer for a detailed description of this
feature.
183
Using the Tools
View Designer
You can use the View Designer* to create a conventional video using 360° footage,
which can then be used in a non 360° video production. To do this, select a 360°
video clip on the timeline and then select Tools > View Designer.
Note: * optional feature in CyberLink PowerDirector. Check the version
table on our web site for detailed versioning information.
A - Direction of View Properties, B - Preview Window, C - Display/Hide Keyframe Timeline, D -
Keyframe Timeline
When you are done customizing the video, click the OK button to save your
changes and create the conventional video. Your changes are applied to the video
clip and updated on the video timeline.
184
CyberLink PowerDirector Help
Customizing Direction of View
360° videos allow the viewer to choose where they look during playback. When
creating a conventional video using 360° footage, you get to customize this
direction of view using keyframes.
To customize the direction of view in your video, do this:
1. In the View Designer, click to add a keyframe at the beginning of the video.
2. If required, set the direction you want the camera (audience's view) to be
pointing at the beginning of the video. You can do this by clicking and
dragging your mouse in the preview window, or using the navigation controls
in the top left corner of the preview window.
185
Using the Tools
3. Use the playback controls, or drag the timeline slider to a point in the video
where you want the camera to have a different direction of view, and then
pause the video.
4. Once again, set the direction of view by clicking and dragging on the preview
window, using the navigation controls, and/or the Zoom in/out slider. This
will add another keyframe to the Direction of view keyframe timeline, and the
audience will have this view at this point in the video's playback.
186
CyberLink PowerDirector Help
Note: if required, you can also use the X, Y, Z rotation and Zoom (or use
your mouse's scroll wheel) sliders to customize the view at the first or any
keyframe.
5. Repeat steps 3 and 4, changing the direction of view as many times as
required (or setting all the points (keyframes) where you want the camera to
be facing at specific times in the video clip).
187
Using the Tools
6. When you are done, use the playback controls to preview the video. Click OK
to save your changes and add the updated video to the timeline.
Note: if you want to edit the video after closing the View Designer, just
select it again on the timeline and then Tools > View Designer to reenter
the window.
Ease In/Out
Adjusting the direction of view and X, Y, and Z rotation sliders lets you manually
create camera movements in your video. To change the direction of view/camera
movement, you indicate when in the video you want the camera to be facing a
specific direction by adding keyframes. To create the camera movement, CyberLink
PowerDirector will ensure the camera is facing in the selected direction at the
specified time in the video. However, this may cause the camera movements to
appear jerky. To make the sudden camera movements look smoother, be sure to
enable the Ease in/out option.
188
CyberLink PowerDirector Help
Modifying Direction of View Keyframes
At any time you can modify the keyframes added, by selecting them and changing
the direction of view/zoom, or by dragging the keyframe to another position on the
keyframe timeline.
Note: if you cannot find the keyframe timeline in the View Designer, just
click the button under the preview window to display it.
To remove a keyframe, select it on the keyframe timeline and then click .
189
Adding Effects
Adding Effects
Chapter 10:
You can add many different kinds of effects to your video production, including
blending media and video effects that you apply to a portion or the entire media
clip. Use Magic Motion to apply a motion effect to images in your video
production, or the Magic Style and Freeze Frame features to auto create some
effects for you.
Blending Clips on the Timeline
You can blend any video or image clip on a timeline track, with the media that
displays above it in the timeline. Doing this blends the pixels in the media clips
together, creating a unique effect in your video production. To blend clips on the
timeline, do this:
1. Select a clip on a lower track in the timeline.
2. Right click on the clip on the lower track, and then select Set Clip Attributes >
Set Blending Mode.
190
CyberLink PowerDirector Help
Note: you can also blend clips together using the Power Tools.
3. Select one of the available blending modes to specify how the selected media
clip is blended with the clip above it in the timeline (below it in the video
production). There are 8 blending modes to choose from, with each having a
different effect. Below is a general description of each blending mode, but it is
recommended that you select each to experiment which best fits the needs of
your video:
·Normal: Normal is the default blending mode and does not mix the pixel
colors in the selected media clip with the pixels in the clip above it in the
timeline. The pixels in the selected media clip are placed over the pixels in the
other media clip, and are not blended.
·Darken: the Darken blending mode retains the darkest pixels of all the media
clips being blended.
·Difference: Difference subtracts the brightest pixel color value from the pixel
colors in the media clips. The resulting effect is similar to the look of a film
negative, but is more colorful.
·Hue: use the Hue blending mode to blend just the hue from the selected
media clip's pixels with the lightness and saturation of the pixels in the clip
above it in the timeline.
·Lighten: the Lighten blending mode retains the lightest pixel colors of all the
media clips being blended.
·Multiply: Multiply blending mode retains the darkest pixel colors of the
selected media clip, and removes the lightest pixels by making them
transparent.
·Overlay: Overlay combines the effects of the Multiply and Screen blending
modes. When blending the media clips, for darker pixels it blends like
Multiply. For lighter pixels, it blends like Screen.
·Screen: Screen blending mode is the opposite of Multiply, as the brightest
pixels are retained, with the darkest pixels effectively becoming transparent.
191
Adding Effects
4. Once selected, the two clips are blended together to create the effect.
Adding Video Effects
Select the button to open the Effect Room and access over 100 effects you can
192
CyberLink PowerDirector Help
add to your images and video clips. Each effect has unique attributes that you can
customize to help achieve the impression you want in your video production.
Note: CyberLink PowerDirector includes the video effects lens flare, tilt
shift, water reflection, and magnifier. You can find these effects by clicking
on the Special tag in the explorer view.
CyberLink PowerDirector includes many video effects from NewBlue*. To view these
effects, select the NewBlue Art Effects filter from the drop-down in the effects
library. To view extra help and information about these effects, add them to your
production, select them, and then click the Modify button. In the Effect Settings
panel, select the Help and Information buttons for more detailed information.
Note: * optional feature in CyberLink PowerDirector. Check the version
table on our web site for detailed versioning information.
To insert a video effect to a portion of a clip in the timeline, do one of the
following:
·select an effect in the Effect Room and then click to add it
to the effect track at the current position of the timeline slider.
Note: videos effects in the effect track are applied to all the video tracks
that are positioned above it in the timeline.
·drag an effect from the Effect Room into the effect track directly beneath the
clips on the tracks that you want to apply it to.
·right-click on an effect and select Add to Timeline to add it to the current
position of the timeline slider.
·click and then select Apply Random Video Effect to add a random video
effect at the current position of the timeline slider.
When adding an effect to the timeline (inserting or dragging and dropping), if the
timeline slider is over an existing effect, or you drop it on an existing effect, you are
prompted to do one of the following:
·Overwrite: select to overwrite the existing effect with the newly added effect.
·Insert: select to split the effect and insert the new effect between the two
portions. CyberLink PowerDirector also only moves the effects on the same
track to the right.
193
Adding Effects
·Insert and Move All Clips: select to split the effect and insert the new effect
between the two portions. CyberLink PowerDirector also moves all of the
media clips on the timeline that lie to the right of the inserted effect, right.
Note: once an effect is added to the effect track, select it and then click the
Modify button to edit the effect's settings. See Modifying a Video Effect for
more information.
To add a video effect to an entire media, PiP object, or title template clip in the
timeline, do this:
Note: video effects cannot be added to an entire paint animation or particle
effect clip.
·select an effect in the Effect Room, drag it to a video track, and then drop it
on top of the media, PiP object, or title effect clip you want to apply it to. The
video effect is applied to the entire duration of the clip.
Note: to modify the settings of a video effect applied to the entire clip, select
the clip on the timeline and then click the Effect button. See Modifying a
Video Effect for more information.
Modifying a Video Effect
Many video effects let you customize their properties, such as the intensity,
position, and much more. You can customize a video effect for the entire duration
(clip mode) or customize it using keyframes (keyframe mode).
To modify a video effect, double click on it in the timeline or select it and then
click Modify. To modify a video effect that is applied to an entire clip, select the clip
and then click the Effect button above the timeline.
You can modify video effects in one of two modes:
Note: the type of modifications that are available in the Effect Settings panel
are completely dependent on the effect you selected.
·Clip Mode: when the Effect Settings panel first opens, it displays in clip mode.
Any changes you make to the effect's settings are applied for the entire
duration of the effect. Use the available sliders and options to customize the
video effect to your preference.
·Keyframe Mode*: some effects utilize keyframes to customize an effect's
settings. Keyframes are frames of your video that define the start and end
194
CyberLink PowerDirector Help
points of an effect, for example the intensity of an effect between two
keyframes. To customize an effect in keyframe mode, click the Keyframe
button in the Effect Settings panel. See Utilizing Keyframes on Media for
detailed information on using keyframes to customize effects in your
production.
Note: to remove an effect applied to an entire clip, deselect the effect name
in the Effect Settings panel when in Clip Mode. * optional feature in
CyberLink PowerDirector. Check the version table on our web site for
detailed versioning information.
Using Magic Motion
CyberLink PowerDirector's Magic Motion tool adds zooms or pans to images,
creating a motion effect in your final video. You can select from a number of
motion templates for each photo in your project, or use the Magic Motion Designer
to customize the motion to your liking.
To use Magic Motion, do this:
1. Select an image on the timeline, click the button above the timeline,
and then select Magic Motion. The Magic Motion panel opens.
2. Select one of the available Magic Motion templates.
3. Use the preview player controls to preview the applied motion template.
4. If required, click on the Motion Designer button to customize the motion in
the Magic Motion Designer.
195
Adding Effects
Magic Motion Designer
After you select a motion template to apply to the selected image, select the
Motion Designer* button to customize the motion in the Magic Motion Designer.
A - Focus Area, B - Timeline Indicator, C - Motion Path, D - Rotation Amount, E - Focus Area Preview, F
- Focus Area Aspect Ratio, G - Zoom In/Out, H - TV Safe Zone/Grid Lines, I - Keyframe Buttons, J -
Keyframe Timeline
Note: * optional feature in CyberLink PowerDirector. Check the version
table on our web site for detailed versioning information.
The Magic Motion Designer uses keyframes to customize the motion on an image.
Keyframes are frames of your video that define the start and end points of an effect,
which in this example is motion, rotation, or size of the focus area.
196
CyberLink PowerDirector Help
In the Magic Motion Designer you can:
·use the player controls or drag the slider to preview the current motion in the
preview window.
·click on to add keyframes to the keyframe timeline. By adding keyframes
you can alter the motion, rotation, or size of the focus area between two
points on the keyframe timeline.
·click on to duplicate the previous or next keyframe on the keyframe
timeline. Doing this copies the properties of the specified keyframe to the new
position.
·set the focus area aspect ratio by selecting one of the available options on the
right. Choose Freeform to manually resize the focus area shape to create a
custom aspect ratio.
·resize the focus area at keyframe positions on the keyframe timeline to define
the areas on the image you want to highlight or focus on.
·click and drag the motion path to alter the movement of the focus area.
·add a rotation effect at keyframe positions on the keyframe timeline by
entering the rotation amount in the field provided and then pressing the Enter
key on your keyboard. You can also click and drag on top of the focus area
to rotate the focus area manually.
·click on to to zoom in or out on the preview window. Zooming in
is useful for precise movement of motion, while you can zoom out if you
want to start the motion off screen.
·click on to use the TV safe zone and grid lines to help with the precise
placement of the focus area on the image. Select Snap to Reference Lines to
have the focus area snap to the grid lines, TV safe zone, and boundary of the
video area.
Using Magic Style
With Magic Style you can auto create professional looking videos using pre-
designed style templates. Magic Style includes pre-designed opening sequences,
transitions, and effects to automatically generate professional-looking videos on
your timeline.
197
Adding Effects
Note: the Magic Style templates with the 3D icon produce a 3D effect in 3D
mode and when outputted in 3D video productions.
To use Magic Style to add effects and some style to media clips in your video
production, select them on the timeline, click the button above the
timeline, and then select Magic Style.
Click on the button to consult the iHelp for more information on using this
feature.
Note: if you want more creative control than the Magic Style provides, you
can also use the Theme Designer to create your video production. The
Theme Designer allows you to customize the theme templates used and
choose the exact photos, video clips, and background music you want in
your production. See Using the Theme Designer for more information.
Using the Freeze Frame Effect
Right-click on a video clip on the timeline, select E dit Video/Photo and then Freeze
Frame to instantly create a freeze frame effect. CyberLink PowerDirector takes a
snapshot of the current frame of video and then inserts it into the timeline, along
with a video and title effect, creating a freeze frame effect. Edit the inserted image
and effects to your specification to ensure the freeze frame effect fits your
requirements.
You can choose to not have CyberLink PowerDirector insert the effects by
deselecting the option in preferences. See Editing Preferences for more
information.
198
CyberLink PowerDirector Help
Creating PiP Effects
Chapter 11:
In CyberLink PowerDirector there are many PiP (picture in picture) effects you can
create and use in your video production. PiP effects not only include the use of PiP
objects, but also adding motion or modifying the properties of media clips on any
track in timeline, creating custom hand drawn paint animation objects in the Paint
Designer, using the chroma key effect, and much more.
Adding PiP Objects
Click the button to open the PiP Objects Room to access a library of PiP
objects, or graphics, that you can add on top of the video or images on a video
track.
Note: the PiP Objects Room also includes paint animation objects. See
Using the Paint Designer for more information.
To insert a PiP object, or paint animation object, to the timeline, do one of the
following:
Note: you can download additional PiP and paint animation objects from the
DirectorZone web site. See Downloading from DirectorZone for more
information.
·use the timeline slider to set the position where you want the PiP or paint
animation object, select it in the library, and then click to
add it to the selected video track.
·use the timeline slider to set the position where you want the PiP or paint
animation object, right-click on it in the library, and then select Add to
Timeline to add it to the selected video track.
You can also manually drag and drop a PiP or paint animation object to a desired
position on a video track to add it to the timeline.
When adding a PiP or paint animation object to the timeline (inserting or dragging
and dropping), if the timeline slider is over an existing clip, or you drop it on an
existing clip, you are prompted to use one of these ripple editing options to insert
the clip:
199
Creating PiP Effects
·Overwrite: select to overwrite the existing clip with the PiP/paint animation
object.
·Insert: select to split the clip and insert the PiP object/paint animation object
between the two portions. CyberLink PowerDirector also only moves the clips
on the same track to the right.
·Insert and Move All Clips: select to split the clip and insert the PiP/paint
animation object between the two portions. CyberLink PowerDirector also
moves all of the media clips on the timeline that lie to the right of the inserted
clip, right.
·Crossfade: select to lay the PiP/paint animation object over a portion of the
existing clip and auto add a fade transition between the two clips.
Note: the Crossfade option does not overwrite the content on the track,
instead adding an overlap transition between the two clips. See Setting
Transition Behavior for more information. The Crossfade option is only
available if the end of the new clip is not over any existing content on the
track.
·Replace: select to replace a current clip on the timeline with the PiP or paint
animation object. Use this option if you don't want to change the structure of
the current content on the timeline.
Note: if the duration of the clip you are replacing is longer or shorter than
the PiP or paint animation object, CyberLink PowerDirector automatically
resizes it to fit the original clip's duration.
If the timeline slider is in a gap between two clips on a timeline track when inserting
a PiP or paint animation object, you are prompted to use this ripple editing option
to insert the clip:
·Trim to Fit: select to have CyberLink PowerDirector auto set the duration of
the PiP/paint animation object to fit the gap to the right of the timeline slider.
Once added to the timeline, select the PiP object and then click the Designer
button to edit its placement, motion, and more in the PiP Designer. See Modifying
Media in the PiP Designer for more information. For information on setting the
amount of time the PiP effect appears in your video production, see Setting a
Media Clip's Duration.
Creating Custom PiP Objects
You can create a custom PiP object using your own graphics and images. To create
a custom PiP object, do this:
200
CyberLink PowerDirector Help
1. Click on to open the PiP Objects room.
2. In the PiP Objects room, click on .
3. Select the image file on your computer you want to use.
4. Click Open to import it and open the PiP Designer. See Modifying Media in the
PiP Designer for details on editing the object's properties in the PiP Designer.
Using the Paint Designer
The Paint Designer* lets you create hand drawn paint animation objects (such as
your written signature) on top of a color board, image, or video clip in your video
production.
Click on and then to open the Paint Designer.
201
Creating PiP Effects
A - Paint Settings, B - Paint Canvas, C - Freeze Time, D - Upload to DirectorZone, D - Capture Controls,
E - Tools, F - Set Brush Width, G - Set Brush Color
Note: * optional feature in CyberLink PowerDirector. Check the version
table on our web site for detailed versioning information.
Creating a Paint Animation
To create a new hand drawn paint animation template, do this:
1. Click on and then to open the Paint Designer.
2. Select the type of brush in the Tools area that you want to use. Each tool
creates a different looking line.
3. Use the slider to set the width of the drawn line.
4. In the Color area, hover your mouse over the color band and then use the eye
dropper to set the color of the drawn line.
·Or click the colored box beside the color band to select it from the color
palette.
5. Before you start drawing, be sure to set the Paint Settings as follows:
·Brush mode: select to draw on the paint canvas with the selected tool.
·Inverse mode: select to switch the paint canvas background to a solid color,
which you erase as you draw.
·Show current timeline image as background: insert a media clip on the
timeline, use the timeline slider to find a frame you want to use as a
background, and then select this option to use it as a guideline when drawing.
The background image is not included in the paint animation object.
202
CyberLink PowerDirector Help
6. If required, input a Freeze time in the field provided. This time should equal
the duration you want the finished drawing to be displayed at the very end of
the resulting paint animation object.
7. Click the button and then start drawing on the paint canvas. CyberLink
PowerDirector captures your mouse strokes to create a paint animation
object.
8. When you are done, click on again. Use the player controls to preview your
paint animation object if required.
9. Select the Insert at current timeline position option if you want to insert the
saved paint animation object at the current position on the timeline when you
are done.
10. Once you are satisfied, click on the Save button to save it to the PiP Objects
library. When prompted to save, enter a custom name for the new paint
animation, use the slider to select the frame in the paint animation you want
to use as its thumbnail in the library, and then click OK.
Editing Paint Animation Templates
At anytime you can edit the paint animation templates that are in the PiP objects
library. Just select the paint animation and then click on .
When editing a paint animation template, you can:
·use the player controls to preview the paint animation.
·click the button to add more content to the end of the drawing.
·click the button to take a snapshot of a frame in the paint animation, and
save it as a new image in the media library.
Saving and Sharing Paint Animation
Templates
Once you are finished modifying/customizing a paint animation template you can
save it in your PiP objects library for future use, upload it to DirectorZone to share it
with others, or back it up on CyberLink Cloud*.
203
Creating PiP Effects
Note: * optional feature in CyberLink PowerDirector. Check the version
table on our web site for detailed versioning information.
·click on Share to upload your custom template to DirectorZone or back it up
on CyberLink Cloud. See Sharing and Backing Up Paint Animation Templates
for more information.
·click on Save As to save a modified template as a new template to the disc
menu library.
·click on OK to save a new template to the disc menu library.
Sharing and Backing Up Paint Animation Templates
You can share your customized paint animation templates with other CyberLink
PowerDirector users by uploading them to DirectorZone. If you have a CyberLink
Cloud subscription you can back up all your customized templates by storing them
on CyberLink Cloud.
To share and back up your paint animation templates, do this:
1. Do either of the following:
·in the Paint Designer, click on Share, enter a name for the custom template,
and then click OK.
·select the paint animation template in the library, and then click .
2. In the upload window, enter the information as follows:
·Upload to: select where you want to upload the template.
·Title: name of the template as it will display once uploaded.
·Style: select a style or category for the template.
·Type: if required, select the type of template you are uploading.
·Tags: enter some keyword search tags that will help users find the template
when searching.
Note: separate each tag you enter with a space. If you want to use two words
as the tag, just put quotes around them, e.g. "dollar bill".
·Collection: enter the name of the collection you want the template added to.
204
CyberLink PowerDirector Help
·Description: enter a short description of your template.
3. Click Next to proceed.
4. Confirm the copyright disclaimer, and then click Next to proceed with the
upload.
5. Click on Finish to close the upload window.
Modifying Media in the PiP
Designer
When you add a video clip, image, or PiP object to a video track you can apply PiP
effects to it in the PiP Designer*. PiP (picture-in-picture) effects include making your
media transparent, applying borders, shadows, chroma key (green screen), motion,
motion blur, and more.
To open the PiP Designer, select a video clip, image, or PiP object on the timeline,
click the Designer button and then select PiP Designer.
205
Creating PiP Effects
A - PiP Effect Properties Tab, B - PiP Effect Properties, C - Motion Tab, D - PiP Object, E - Background
Video, F - Mode Selection, G - Zoom Tools, H - Display/Hide Keyframe Timeline, I - TV Safe Zone/Grid
Lines, J - Upload to Internet, K - PiP Media Keyframe Timeline
Note: if you have trouble clearly seeing some elements of the media you
are modifying in the PiP Designer because they blend into the background,
try selecting the Only show the selected track option to change the
preview background.
You can also open the PiP Designer by:
·clicking on in the PiP Objects room to create a new PiP object template
from scratch by importing a custom image.
·selecting an existing PiP object in the PiP Objects room, clicking on , and
then selecting Modify PiP Attributes to edit the template.
206
CyberLink PowerDirector Help
Mode Selection and Zoom Tools
When modifying PiP media in the PiP Designer use the mode selection and zoom
tools for assistance.
Note: when modifying PiP media in the PiP Designer, use the player
controls to preview, and click to preview the effect at full screen. You
can also click to hide the keyframe timeline for a larger view of the
preview window.
Mode Selection
In the PiP Designer there are two selection modes. Click the button to enable
the PiP media selection. When selected, you can freely click and move the PiP
media to different areas of the video frame.
Click the button to enable a mode that lets you drag the view in the PiP
Designer. This mode is especially helpful when applying PiP motion effects to
media that start off screen.
Zoom Tools
Use the zoom tools and to zoom out and in on the preview window
when modifying PiP media. You can also select the viewer zoom amount from the
drop-down to set the size of the PiP media preview. Select Fit to resize the PiP
media so that is fits in the PiP Designer's viewer window.
Note: you can also hold down the Ctrl key on your keyboard and then use
the mouse scroll wheel to zoom in or out on the PiP media.
Modifying PiP Media Size and Position
You can change the size, position, and orientation of the media clip or object in a
PiP effect. The resizing options are unrestricted. You can reduce the clip to
miniature size or enlarge it to completely obscure any underlying media content on
the timeline.
207
Creating PiP Effects
Note: click on to use the TV safe zone and grid lines to help with the
precise placement of the PiP effect on the video. Select Snap to Reference
Lines to have the PiP effect snap to the grid lines, TV safe zone, and
boundary of the video area.
To modify PiP media size, position, or orientation:
·click and drag a corner or side to resize the PiP media.
Note: click the Aspect Ratio item on the Properties tab, and then deselect
M aintain aspect ratio to resize the media clip or PiP object more freely.
·click on the PiP media and drag it to a new position.
·click on above the PiP media and drag it left or right to change its
orientation.
·click and drag the blue nodes in corners to change its shape. See Changing
the Shape of Media for more information.
Note: you can use keyframes to customize the size and shape of PiP
media. See Utilizing PiP Keyframes for more information.
Modifying PiP Media Properties
Click on the PiP effect Properties tab to change the properties of the PiP media. See
the following sections for detailed information on the properties you can modify
on this tab.
·Changing Object Settings
·Using Chroma Key
·Applying a Shadow
·Adding a Reflection
·Applying a Border
·Flipping PiP Media
·Enabling 3D Depth
·Applying Fades
208
CyberLink PowerDirector Help
Note: while modifying the PiP effect properties, you can select the Only
show the selected track option to hide any other media that is displayed in
the preview window while modifying.
Changing Object Settings
Use the Objec t Settings option to change some of the basic properties of the PiP
media. Use the X and Y position fields to set the precise location of the top left
corner of the PiP media on the video image. When used with keyframes, you can
manually create motion of the PiP media.
Note: CyberLink PowerDirector sets the value of the top-left corner of the
media as the 0 axis, with the bottom-right corner having a value of 1.0, 1.0.
The center position in the video frame is 0.500, 0.500. You can more easily
adjust clip position and motion on the M otion tab. See Adding Motion to
PiP Media for motion information.
When you create motion for PiP media, you indicate where (Position) on the video
image you want the PiP media to appear by adding keyframes. To create the
motion, CyberLink PowerDirector will ensure the PiP media is in the desired
position at the specified time (keyframe).
Use the Scale sliders to change PiP media size, or Opacity to make it more
transparent.
Note: select the Maintain aspect ratio option if you want to ensure the
PiP media's aspect ratio does not change while you are moving or resizing
it. Deselect this option if you want to change the PiP media's shape or alter
its aspect ratio.
To rotate the PiP media, use the Rotation slider to set the angle.
Note: you can use keyframes to customize each of these object settings.
See Utilizing PiP Keyframes for more information.
Ease In/Ease Out
Creating motion for PiP media, by changing the Position, Scale, or Rotation object
settings at different keyframes, can cause the PiP media to appear jerky, as it speeds
up and slows down when it moves through the frame, changes its size, or rotates in
the video frame. To make the movement look smoother, use the Ease in/out
options. Select Ease in to slow down the PiP media as it enters a keyframe. Select
Ease out if you want it to gradually accelerate out of the keyframe.
209
Creating PiP Effects
Using Chroma Key
Select the Chrom a K ey option to add a chroma key (green screen) effect to your PiP
media. Once enable, do this:
1. Click on and then select the color in the image or video clip that you
want to replace/make transparent.
2. Adjust the Tolerance of hue, Tolerance of saturation, and Tolerance of
luminance sliders to remove the selected color/background (green screen).
Adjust until the image or video behind your PiP media is completely revealed,
without any loss of quality on the PiP media.
3. Use the Edge sharpness slider to fine tune the edges of the PiP media on the
revealed background. Using this slider can make the PiP effect look more
authentic by sharpening the edges.
Applying a Shadow
Select the Shadow* option to add a shadow on the PiP media. Available options
allow you to change the shadow's color, direction, and distance from the PiP effect.
You can also set the opacity and blur levels of the shadow using the available
sliders.
Note: * optional feature in CyberLink PowerDirector. Check the version
table on our web site for detailed versioning information.
Adding a Reflection
Select the Reflection option to reflect the PiP media onto the background media.
Use the Distance slider to set space between the reflection and the PiP media. Use
the Opacity slider to set the opacity of the reflection.
Applying a Border
Select the Border option to add a border around the PiP media. Use the Size slider
to set the width of the border, and the Blur and Opacity sliders to customize its
appearance.
210
CyberLink PowerDirector Help
Selecting Border Color
When selecting the color of the border, you have the following options in the Fill
type drop-down:
·Uniform color: select this option if you want the border to be one solid color.
Click the colored square to open the color palette and select the desired
border color.
·2 color gradient: select this option if you want the border color to change
from one color to another using a gradient. Click the colored squares to set
the beginning and ending colors, and then drag the Gradient direction
control to set which way the color flows.
·4 color gradient*: select this option if you want the border to consist of four
colors. Click the colored squares to set the colors in each of the four corners
of the border.
Note: * optional feature in CyberLink PowerDirector. Check the version
table on our web site for detailed versioning information.
Flipping PiP Media
Select the Flip option to flip the PiP media upside down or from left to right,
depending on your requirement.
Enabling 3D Depth
If you are creating a 3D video production, select the 3D Settings* option to give the
PiP media a 3D effect.
Note: when using this feature, select the button to enable 3D mode for
best editing results. See Previewing in 3D Mode for more information on
using this mode. * Optional feature in CyberLink PowerDirector. Check the
version table on our web site for detailed versioning information.
Once enabled, use the slider to set the amount of depth you want the PiP media to
have in 3D. Dragging the slider left will make the 3D PiP object seem nearer to the
audience (in the foreground), while dragging it right will make it appear farther
away (in the background).
211
Creating PiP Effects
Note: you can use keyframes to customize when the 3D depth is applied.
See Utilizing PiP Keyframes for more information.
Applying Fades
Select the Fades option to apply a fade effect on the PiP media. Select whether to
enable a fade-in and/or fade-out on the PiP media.
Note: when a fade is applied, note that keyframes are added to the Opacity
keyframe timeline so you can customize the length of the fade, if required.
See Utilizing PiP Keyframes for more information.
Adding Motion to PiP Media
Click on the Motion tab to add motion* to PiP media, allowing it to move across
the screen. You can choose from a number of predefined motion paths or create
your own custom PiP motion. You can also add a rotation effect to the PiP media.
Note: * optional feature in CyberLink PowerDirector. Check the version
table on our web site for detailed versioning information.
Using a Motion Path Template
To add motion to PiP media you can select a motion path template on the Motion
tab that fits your requirements. Note that keyframes are added to the Position track
of the PiP Designer keyframe timeline. These motion path templates have
predefined motion in them, but you can customize the motion. See Customizing
PiP Motion and Utilizing PiP Keyframes for detailed information on using keyframes
to customize PiP motion.
Customizing PiP Motion
The PiP Designer uses keyframes to customize the motion of PiP media. Keyframes
are frames of your video that define the start and end points of an effect, which in
this example is motion.
Note: some PiP objects have predefined motion already applied.
212
CyberLink PowerDirector Help
To customize the motion of PiP media:
Note: once you are done customizing the PiP media motion you can use the
motion blur effect to make it look smother and more natural. See Applying
Motion Blur for more information.
·drag an existing keyframe to a new location in the preview window. The PiP
media will follow the modified path to get to the changed keyframe position.
·drag the path line to alter the path the PiP media takes to get to the next
keyframe.
·use the player controls to find a position on the motion path, and then click
on the Position track of the keyframe timeline to add a new keyframe at a new
position, if required.
Customizing the Speed of PiP Effect Motion
You have full control over the speed to the PiP media's motion. The following three
factors determine the speed of the PiP media's motion.
Note: on the Properties tab in Object Settings you can manually adjust
the PiP media position at keyframes and use ease in/out to make the
movement look smoother. See Changing Object Settings for more
information.
213
Creating PiP Effects
Duration of the PiP Clip in the Timeline
The longer the duration of PiP media clip, the slower the PiP object's motion is. For
example, if the PiP media clip is 10 seconds, it takes the PiP media 10 seconds to
travel from the first Position keyframe to the last Position keyframe.
Distance Between Keyframes
The distance between each keyframe also contributes to the speed of the PiP media
motion. The further the distance between each keyframe, the quicker the PiP media
needs to move to get to the next keyframe.
Keyframe Timeline
The keyframe timeline is located below the preview window. Each keyframe in the
motion path has a corresponding marker on the keyframe timeline.
Note: if you cannot find the keyframe timeline in the PiP Designer, just click
the button under the preview window to display it.
If the PiP media clip on the timeline has a duration of 10 seconds, the keyframe
timeline is 10 seconds long. To increase the speed of a PiP media's motion, drag a
keyframe marker closer to previous keyframe marker.
214
CyberLink PowerDirector Help
Saving a Custom PiP Motion Path
Once you finish modifying your PiP motion path you can save it for future use. To
save a motion path, click on to save it as a custom path. It is then available
in motion path list the next time you want to use it.
Customizing PiP Effect Rotation
Select the R otation S ettings option to customize the rotation of moving PiP media.
Use the slider to set the amount the PiP media will rotate as it moves across the
screen. Select whether PiP media rotates counter clockwise, or clockwise.
Note: click the button to reset the rotation amount to 0. Any added
rotation is removed.
Applying Motion Blur
Select the Motion blur* option to make PiP media movement appear smoother,
giving it a more natural and authentic look.
Note: * optional feature in CyberLink PowerDirector. Check the version
table on our web site for detailed versioning information.
Once selected, use the available sliders as follows:
·Blur length: drag this slider to set the duration (number of frames) you want
blended into a single frame (the blur). Dragging the slider right will apply
more of a blur to the moving PiP media.
215
Creating PiP Effects
·Blur density: drag this slider to set the number of samples (of PiP media) used
per frame. Dragging the slider right will make the PiP media less blurry as it
adds samples to fill the missing content caused by the movement.
Utilizing PiP Keyframes
Use keyframes when modifying your PiP media to define the start and end points
of the customized effects. In the PiP Designer you can use keyframes to change the
PiP media clip's opacity, size (scale), rotation, motion, shape (freeform), and 3D
depth.
Note: once you have customized the effects on PiP media using keyframes,
you can right click on the clip in the timeline and select Copy Keyframe
Attributes. This allows you to paste all of its keyframe attributes (including
motion) onto another clip in the timeline, applying the same effects to the
clip.
Keyframe Timeline
A custom keyframe timeline is generated for each PiP media clip when you open it
in the PiP Designer. In the below example, because the media clip is 10 seconds
long on the project timeline, the keyframe timeline is also 10 seconds.
Note: if you cannot find the keyframe timeline in the PiP Designer, just click
the button under the preview window to display it.
If you'd like to view the movie timeline, click the button.
216
CyberLink PowerDirector Help
The keyframe timeline lets you precisely place each keyframe, so you can time the
applied effect in your movie production.
Adding Keyframes
To add a keyframe to the keyframe timeline, do this:
Note: if you cannot find the keyframe timeline in the PiP Designer, just click
the button under the preview window to display it.
1. Use the player controls to find the moment in your PiP media clip where you
want its properties to change.
2. Click next to the property you want to change to add a keyframe to the
corresponding keyframe track.
3. Use the features in the PiP Designer to modify the properties of the effect as
required for this keyframe. In this example we are modifying the opacity of
the PiP media clip at the beginning of the clip.
217
Creating PiP Effects
Note: notice above that when opacity is changed, a keyframe is
automatically added at the current timeline slider position.
218
CyberLink PowerDirector Help
When previewed, at the first keyframe the PiP media is the completely
transparent, and then slowly gets more opaque until it reaches the specified
opacity level by the time the playback slider reaches the second keyframe.
219
Creating PiP Effects
It will maintain this opacity until the playback slider reaches the last keyframe,
unless you add more keyframes or change the properties of the last keyframe.
Note: you can also modify the properties of a keyframe by right clicking on
it and selecting Duplicate Previous Keyframe or Duplicate Next
Keyframe. Doing this copies the properties of the specified keyframe to the
keyframe you right clicked on.
4. Repeat these steps to create the kind of effect you want in your video
production using keyframes to modify the PiP media clip's properties and
motion.
Modifying and Removing Keyframes
At any time you can modify the keyframes added, by selecting it and changing the
PiP media clip's properties, or by dragging the keyframe to another position on the
keyframe timeline.
To remove a keyframe, select it on the keyframe timeline and then click .
Saving and Sharing PiP Objects
Once you are finished modifying/customizing a PiP object you can save it to your
PiP objects library for future use, upload it to DirectorZone to share it with others,
or back it up on CyberLink Cloud*.
Note: * optional feature in CyberLink PowerDirector. Check the version
table on our web site for detailed versioning information.
·click on Share to upload your custom template to DirectorZone or back it up
on CyberLink Cloud. See Sharing and Backing Up PiP Objects for more
information.
·click on Save As to save a modified template as a new template to the PiP
Objects Room.
·click on OK to save a new template to the PiP Objects Room.
Sharing and Backing Up PiP Objects
You can share your customized PiP objects with other CyberLink PowerDirector
users by uploading them to DirectorZone. If you have a CyberLink Cloud
220
CyberLink PowerDirector Help
subscription you can back up all your customized templates by storing them on
CyberLink Cloud.
To share and back up your PiP objects, do this:
1. Do either of the following:
·in the PiP Designer, click on Share, enter a name for the custom template,
and then click OK.
·select the PiP object in the library, and then click .
2. In the upload window, enter the information as follows:
·Upload to: select where you want to upload the template.
·Title: name of the template as it will display once uploaded.
·Style: select a style or category for the template.
·Type: if required, select the type of template you are uploading.
·Tags: enter some keyword search tags that will help users find the template
when searching.
Note: separate each tag you enter with a space. If you want to use two words
as the tag, just put quotes around them, e.g. "dollar bill".
·Collection: enter the name of the collection you want the template added to.
·Description: enter a short description of your template.
3. Click Next to proceed.
4. Confirm the copyright disclaimer, and then click Next to proceed with the
upload.
5. Click on Finish to close the upload window.
221
Adding Particle Effects
Adding Particle Effects
Chapter 12:
Click the button to open the Particle Effects Room to access a library of effects
you can place on a video track to add a particle effect (snow, cloud cover, fire
effects, and more) on top of a video or image.
To insert a particle effect to the timeline, do one of the following:
Note: you can download additional particle effects from the DirectorZone
web site. See Downloading from DirectorZone for more information.
·use the timeline slider to set the position where you want the particle effect,
select it in the library, and then click to add it to the
selected video track.
·use the timeline slider to set the position where you want the particle effect,
right-click on it in the library, and then select Add to Timeline to add it to the
selected video track.
You can also manually drag and drop a particle effect to a desired position on a
video track to add it to the timeline.
When adding a particle effect to the timeline (inserting or dragging and dropping),
if the timeline slider is over an existing clip, or you drop it on an existing clip, you
are prompted to use one of the ripple editing options to insert the clip:
·Overwrite: select to overwrite the existing clip with the particle effect.
·Insert: select to split the clip and insert the particle effect between the two
portions. CyberLink PowerDirector also only moves the clips on the same
track to the right.
·Insert and Move All Clips: select to split the clip and insert the particle effect
between the two portions. CyberLink PowerDirector also moves all of the
media clips on the timeline that lie to the right of the inserted clip, right.
·Crossfade: select to lay the particle effect over a portion of the existing clip
and auto add a fade transition between the two clips.
222
CyberLink PowerDirector Help
Note: the Crossfade option does not overwrite the content on the track,
instead adding an overlap transition between the two clips. See Setting
Transition Behavior for more information. The Crossfade option is only
available if the end of the new clip is not over any existing content on the
track.
·Replace: select to replace a current clip on the timeline with the particle
effect. Use this option if you don't want to change the structure of the current
content on the timeline.
Note: if the duration of the clip you are replacing is longer or shorter than
the particle effect, CyberLink PowerDirector automatically resizes it to fit
the original clip's duration.
If the timeline slider is in a gap between two clips on a timeline track when inserting
a particle effect, you are prompted to use this ripple editing option to insert the
clip:
·Trim to Fit: select to have CyberLink PowerDirector auto set the duration of
the particle effect to fit the gap to the right of the timeline slider.
Once added to the timeline, select the particle effect and then click the Designer
button to edit its properties in the Particle Designer. See Modifying Particle Effects
in the Particle Designer for more information. For information on setting the
amount of time the particle effect appears in your video production, see Setting a
Media Clip's Duration.
223
Adding Particle Effects
Modifying Particle Effects in the
Particle Designer
You can completely customize particle effects, and all of its particle object
properties, in the Particle Designer*. To open the Particle Designer, select a particle
effect on the timeline and then click the Designer button.
A - Particle Object Properties Tab, B - Particle Object Properties, C - Particle Object Motion Tab, D - Add
Objects, Images, Backgrounds, E - Particle Object, F - Background Video, G - Mode Selection, H -
Zoom Tools, I - Display/Hide Keyframe Timeline, J - TV Safe Zone/Grid Lines, K - Upload to Internet, L
- Particle Effect Keyframe Timeline
Note: * optional feature in CyberLink PowerDirector. Check the version
table on our web site for detailed versioning information.
224
CyberLink PowerDirector Help
You can also open the Particle Designer by:
·clicking on in the Particle Room to create a new particle effect template
from scratch by importing a custom image.
·selecting a particle effect in the Particle Room and then clicking on the
button to edit it.
Mode Selection and Zoom Tools
When modifying particle effects in the Particle Designer use the mode selection and
zoom tools for assistance.
Note: when modifying particle effects in the Particle Designer, use the
player controls to preview, and click to preview the effect at full screen.
You can also click to hide the keyframe timeline for a larger view of
the preview window.
Mode Selection
In the Particle Designer there are two selection modes. Click the button to
enable the object selection. When selected, you can freely click and move the
particle objects, images, etc. to different areas of the video frame.
Click the button to enable a mode that lets you drag the view in the Particle
Designer. This mode is especially helpful when applying particle motion effects if
the object starts off screen.
Zoom Tools
Use the zoom tools and to zoom out and in on the preview window
when modifying the particle effect. You can also select the viewer zoom amount
from the drop-down to set the size of the particle effect preview. Select Fit to resize
the particle effect so that is fits in the Particle Designer's viewer window.
Note: you can also hold down the Ctrl key on your keyboard and then use
the mouse scroll wheel to zoom in or out on the particle effect.
225
Adding Particle Effects
Adding Objects, Images, and
Backgrounds
Each particle effect template can contain one or more particle objects, or attributes
that create the desired effect. It may also include a background and other images.
Note: you can give all the added objects, images, and backgrounds custom
names in the Particle Designer to make them easily identifiable in the
keyframe timeline. Just enter the desired name in the Selected object
field.
Adding New Particle Objects
You can add additional particle objects to a particle effect template.
To add a new particle object to a particle effect, click on the button. CyberLink
PowerDirector adds a default particle object to the particle effect template. See
Modifying Particle Object Properties for more information on customizing the
default particle object to fit the particle effect you are trying to create.
Adding Images
You can insert your own images into your particle effect template.
To add a image, do this:
1. Click on the button.
2. Browse to and then select the image on your computer you want to add, and
then click Open.
3. Once added, resize and reposition the image in the Particle Designer as
required.
Setting Backgrounds
Your particle effect can consist of a background that the particle objects emit over.
You can choose from the default backgrounds, or import your own custom
background.
226
CyberLink PowerDirector Help
To set a background, do this:
1. Click on the button.
2. Select:
·Add Default Background Image: if you want to select one of the backgrounds
provided with your copy of CyberLink PowerDirector. Select the background,
and then click Open.
·Add Custom Background Image: if you want to import your own custom
background. Select the background, and then click Open.
3. When prompted, set the adjustment settings for the background, as required.
Note: to remove the imported background image, just click the
button.
Modifying Particle Object Range and
Position
You can increase the range of the particle object so that it covers more of the
background, or modify the position or direction particles fall/emit from their source
point. You can also change the position and size of images and backgrounds used
in the effect.
Note: click on to use the TV safe zone and grid lines to help with the
precise placement of the particle object on the video. Select Snap to
Reference Lines to have the particle effect snap to the grid lines, TV safe
zone, and boundary of the video area.
To modify range and position of objects, image, and backgrounds in a particle
effect, do this:
·to change the position and source (emit) point of a particle object, select the
particle object in the keyframe timeline, and then click and drag to a new
position.
·if the particle effect has an image, select the Image track in the keyframe
timeline. Next click and drag a corner or side to resize the image. Click on
to drag the image to a new position, if required.
227
Adding Particle Effects
·to rotate a particle object, select it in the keyframe timeline, and then click
and drag to the desired orientation.
·to change the range and direction an effect emits from the particle object's
source point, select the particle object in the keyframe timeline, and then click
and drag to a new position.
Modifying Particle Object Properties
Click on the particle object Properties tab to change the properties of the selected
particle object. See the following sections for detailed information on the properties
you can modify on this tab.
·Selecting Emit Method
·Selecting Particle Style
·Adding/Deleting Particles
·Modifying Parameters
·Enabling 3D Depth
·Adding Color
·Applying Fades
Selecting Emit Method
Select a particle object in the keyframe timeline and then the Emit Method option
to select how the particles emit from the source point. You can have them emit
from a single point, from a line, or spray out in a circle.
Select the Mask option, and then select a mask from the list (or click to
import a custom mask image) to create a masked area where particles emit from.
Depending on the mask you select/import and how you resize it, the particles will
emit differently.
Selecting Particle Style
Select a particle object in the keyframe timeline and then the Particle Style option
to select the style of the emitting particle object. Depending on the property you
228
CyberLink PowerDirector Help
select, the particle shape and behavior changes. Select the style that best suits the
effect you are trying to accomplish.
Adding/Deleting Particles
Particle objects can consist of one or more particles, or small customizable images.
Select a particle object in the keyframe timeline and then the Add/Delete Particles
option to add or remove individual particles from a particle object.
Click on and then select Insert a Default Image if you want to select one of the
particle images provided with your copy of CyberLink PowerDirector. Select Insert a
Custom Image if you want to import your own custom particle image. You can add
as many custom particles as you like to a particle object.
Select an existing particle and then click to delete it from the particle object.
Modifying Parameters
Select a particle object in the keyframe timeline and then the Modify Parameters
option to completely customize the properties of the particle object as follows:
Note: you can use keyframes to customize the parameters of particle
objects. See Utilizing Particle Keyframes for more information.
·Emit rate: use the slider or enter in a value in the box provided to set the rate
or speed particles emit from the source point.
·Max count: use the slider or enter in a value in the box provided to set the
number of particles that emit from the source point.
·Life: use the slider or enter in a value in the box provided to set the life, or how
long the particle displays in the effect. The lower the number, the shorter
amount of time each particle displays before fading out. For example, if you
enter 100, the life will equal the entire length of the clip.
·Life variation: use the slider or enter in a value in the box provided to set the
amount of variation there is in particle life. For example, if you enter 50, then
half of the particles will die out before they meet the specified life amount.
·Size: use the slider or enter in a value in the box provided to set the size of the
particle.
229
Adding Particle Effects
·Size variation: use the slider or enter in a value in the box provided to set the
amount of variation there is in particle size. For example, if you enter 50, then
half of the particles will equal the defined size.
·Speed: use the slider or enter in a value in the box provided to set the speed of
the particle.
·Speed variation: use the slider or enter in a value in the box provided to set
the amount of variation there is in particle speed. For example, if you enter 50,
then half of the particles will have the defined speed.
·Wave (amplitude): use the slider or enter in a value in the box provided if you
want your particle to travel in a wave pattern. The higher the number, the
bigger the amplitude of the wave. If the value is 0, then the particle travels in a
straight line.
·Wave (amplitude) variation: use the slider or enter in a value in the box
provided to set the amount of variation there is in wave's amplitude. For
example, if you enter 50, then half of the particles will have the same
amplitude.
·Wave (frequency): use the slider or enter in a value in the box provided if you
want your particle to travel in a wave pattern. The higher the number, the
larger the frequency of the wave. If the value is 0, then the particle travels in a
straight line.
·Wave (frequency) variation: use the slider or enter in a value in the box
provided to set the amount of variation there is in wave's frequency. For
example, if you enter 50, then half of the particles will have the same
frequency.
·Symmetry: use the slider or enter in a value to set the symmetry of the wave.
The higher the value, the more asymmetrical the wave will be.
·Rotation speed: use the slider or enter in a value in the box provided to set the
rotation speed of the particle. The higher the value, the faster it rotates.
Depending on whether the parameter has a positive or negative value
determines the direction of the rotation.
·Rotation speed variation: use the slider or enter in a value in the box provided
to set the amount of variation there is in the particle's rotation speed. For
example, if you enter 50, then half of the particles will have the same rotation
speed.
230
CyberLink PowerDirector Help
·Gravity: use the slider or enter in a value in the box provided to set the
amount of gravity applied to the particle. Depending on whether the
parameter has a positive or negative value determines the direction of the
gravitational pull.
Enabling 3D Depth
Select a particle object in the keyframe timeline and then the 3D Settings* option if
you are creating a 3D video production and want the particle object to have a 3D
effect.
Select Enable 3D depth to enable, and then use the slider to set the amount of
depth you want the particle object to have in 3D. Dragging the slider left will make
the 3D particle object seem nearer to the audience (in the foreground), while
dragging it right will make it appear farther away (in the background).
Note: when using this feature, select the button to enable 3D mode for
best editing results. See Previewing in 3D Mode for more information on
using this mode. * Optional feature in CyberLink PowerDirector. Check the
version table on our web site for detailed versioning information.
Adding Color
Select a particle object in the keyframe timeline and then the Color option if you
want to add or change the color of the particles. To do this, select E nable c olor and
then set the following options:
·Select color: click the colored box to select the color of the selected particle
object.
·Opacity: use this slider to set the opacity or transparency level of the particle
object.
·Enable particle overlay: select this option to enable an overlay on colored
particles to change their appearance, if required.
Applying Fades
231
Adding Particle Effects
Select a particle object in the keyframe timeline and then the Fades option to apply
a fade effect to it. Select whether to enable a fade-in and/or fade-out on the particle
object.
Note: if you cannot find the keyframe timeline in the Particle Designer, just
click the button under the preview window to display it.
When a fade is applied, note that a keyframe indicator is added to the particle
object's track on the keyframe timeline, indicating the duration of the fade.
You can click and drag the keyframe indicator to customize the duration of the
fade, if required.
232
CyberLink PowerDirector Help
Adding Motion to Particle Objects
Click on the Motion tab to add motion to particle objects, by enabling the particle's
source to move across the screen. You can choose from a number of predefined
motion path templates or create your own custom motion path. The path
properties of a particle object are similar to a PiP object. See Adding Motion to PiP
Effects for detailed information on customizing a particle object's motion.
Utilizing Particle Keyframes
Use keyframes when modifying particle object parameters to define the start and
end points of the customized effects.
Keyframe Timeline
A custom keyframe timeline is generated for each particle effect clip when you
open it in the Particle Designer. In the below example, because the particle effect
clip is 10 seconds long on the project timeline, the keyframe timeline is also 10
seconds.
Note: if you cannot find the keyframe timeline in the Particle Designer, just
click the button under the preview window to display it.
If you'd like to view the movie timeline, click the button.
233
Adding Particle Effects
The keyframe timeline lets you precisely place each keyframe, so you can time the
applied effect in your movie production. You can also click and drag the beginning
of a particle object or image track in the keyframe timeline, to set precisely when
the effect first appears in the particle effect.
Click and drag the end of the track to set when you want the effect to end.
Adding Keyframes
To add a keyframe to the keyframe timeline, do this:
1. Use the player controls to find the moment in your particle object where you
want its parameters to change.
2. In the Modify Parameters section on the Properties tab, click the button
next to the parameter you want to change.
3. If required, click the arrow next to the corresponding particle track to display
the parameter keyframe track.
234
CyberLink PowerDirector Help
4. Click next to the parameter you want to change to add a keyframe to the
parameter keyframe track.
5. Use the sliders in the Modify Parameters section to modify the parameters of
the object as required for this keyframe. In this example we are modifying the
emit rate of the particles from the source point at the second keyframe.
6. Repeat these steps to create the kind of effect you want in your video
production using keyframes to modify the particle object parameters.
Modifying and Removing Keyframes
At any time you can modify the keyframes added, by selecting it and changing the
particle object's parameters, or by dragging the keyframe to another position on
the keyframe timeline.
To remove a keyframe, select it on the keyframe timeline and then click .
Saving and Sharing Particle Effect
Templates
Once you are finished modifying your particle effect template you can save it to
your particle effects library for future use, upload it to DirectorZone to share it with
others, or back it up on CyberLink Cloud*.
235
Adding Particle Effects
Note: * optional feature in CyberLink PowerDirector. Check the version
table on our web site for detailed versioning information.
·click on Share to upload your custom template to DirectorZone or back it up
on CyberLink Cloud. See Sharing and Backing Up Particle Effect Templates for
more information.
·click on Save As to save a modified template as a new template to the Particle
Room.
·click on OK to save a new template to the Particle Room.
Sharing and Backing Up Particle Effect
Templates
You can share your customized particle effect templates with other CyberLink
PowerDirector users by uploading them to DirectorZone. If you have a CyberLink
Cloud subscription you can back up all your customized templates by storing them
on CyberLink Cloud.
To share and back up your particle effect templates, do this:
1. Do either of the following:
·in the Particle Designer, click on Share, enter a name for the custom template,
and then click OK.
·select the particle effect template in the library, and then click .
2. In the upload window, enter the information as follows:
·Upload to: select where you want to upload the template.
·Title: name of the template as it will display once uploaded.
·Style: select a style or category for the template.
·Type: if required, select the type of template you are uploading.
·Tags: enter some keyword search tags that will help users find the template
when searching.
Note: separate each tag you enter with a space. If you want to use two words
as the tag, just put quotes around them, e.g. "dollar bill".
236
CyberLink PowerDirector Help
·Collection: enter the name of the collection you want the template added to.
·Description: enter a short description of your template.
3. Click Next to proceed.
4. Confirm the copyright disclaimer, and then click Next to proceed with the
upload.
5. Click on Finish to close the upload window.
237
Adding Title Effects
Adding Title Effects
Chapter 13:
Click the button to open the Title Room to access a library of title effect
templates, which when applied to your project, add credits or comments to your
production. You can add title effects to a video track or to the title track.
To insert a title effect to the timeline, do one of the following:
Note: once the latest content pack is installed, the Title Room includes title
sets, or groups of four themed title templates. These title sets are useful if
you want to add titles with themed animations that include video opening and
closing credits.
·use the timeline slider to set the position where you want the title, select the
title effect template in the library, and then click to add it
to the selected video track.
·use the timeline slider to set the position where you want the title, select the
title effect template in the library, and then click to add it
to the title track.
·use the timeline slider to set the position where you want the title, right-click
on the title effect template in the library, and then select Add to Timeline to
add it to the title track.
You can also manually drag and drop a title effect template to a desired position on
the title track (or any video track) to add it to the timeline.
Note: you can now add video effects onto entire title effect clips in the
timeline, like any other media clip. See Adding Video Effects for more
information.
When adding a title effect to the timeline (inserting or dragging and dropping), if
the timeline slider is over an existing clip, or you drop it on an existing clip, you are
prompted to use one of the ripple editing options to insert the clip:
·Overwrite: select to overwrite the existing clip with the title effect.
·Insert: select to split the clip and insert the title effect between the two
portions. CyberLink PowerDirector also only moves the clips on the same
track to the right.
238
CyberLink PowerDirector Help
·Insert and Move All Clips: select to split the clip and insert the title effect
between the two portions. CyberLink PowerDirector also moves all of the
media clips on the timeline that lie to the right of the inserted clip, right.
·Crossfade: select to lay the title effect over a portion of the existing clip and
auto add a fade transition between the two clips.
Note: the Crossfade option does not overwrite the content on the track,
instead adding an overlap transition between the two clips. See Setting
Transition Behavior for more information. The Crossfade option is only
available if the end of the new clip is not over any existing content on the
track.
·Replace: select to replace a current clip on the timeline with the title effect.
Use this option if you don't want to change the structure of the current
content on the timeline.
Note: if the duration of the clip you are replacing is longer or shorter than
the title effect, CyberLink PowerDirector automatically resizes it to fit the
original clip's duration.
If the timeline slider is in a gap between two clips on a timeline track when inserting
a title effect, you are prompted to use this ripple editing option to insert the clip:
·Trim to Fit: select to have CyberLink PowerDirector auto set the duration of
the title effect to fit the gap to the right of the timeline slider.
Once added to the timeline, select the title effect template and then click the
Designer button to edit it in the Title Designer. See Modifying Titles in the Title
Designer for more information. For information on setting the amount of time the
title effect appears in your video production, see Setting a Media Clip's Duration.
239
Adding Title Effects
Modifying Titles in the Title
Designer
In the Title Designer you can completely customize the title effects in your project.
Title effects contain character presets, animation, and background options that you
can modify to fit your video project.
To open the Title Designer, select a title effect on the timeline and then click the
Designer button.
A - Text Properties Tab, B - Title Properties, C - Title Animation Effect Tab, D - Title Motion Tab, E - Insert
Text/Images/Particles/Backgrounds, F - Background Video, G - Title Text, H - Mode Selection, I -
Zoom Tools, J - Display/Hide Keyframe Timeline, K - TV Safe Zone/Grid Lines, L - Align Objects, M -
Upload to Internet, N - Title Keyframe Timeline
240
CyberLink PowerDirector Help
You can also open the Title Designer by:
·clicking on in the Title Room and then select:
·2D Title to create a new 2D title template from scratch. See Modifying 2D
Text Properties for information on editing its title text properties.
·3D-Like Title to create a new title template with 3D-Like effect properties.
See Modifying 3D-Like Text Properties for information on editing its title
text properties.
·selecting an existing title effect in the Title Room and then clicking on to
edit the existing template.
Mode Selection and Zoom Tools
When modifying title effects in the Title Designer use the mode selection and zoom
tools for assistance.
Note: when modifying title effects in the Title Designer, use the player
controls to preview, and click to preview the effect at full screen. You
can also click to hide the keyframe timeline for a larger view of the
preview window.
Mode Selection
In the Title Designer there are two selection modes. Click the button to enable
the object selection. When selected, you can freely click and move the title text,
particles, images, etc. to different areas of the video frame.
241
Adding Title Effects
242
CyberLink PowerDirector Help
Click the button to enable a mode that lets you drag the view in the Title
Designer. This mode is especially helpful if zoomed in on the title effect.
243
Adding Title Effects
244
CyberLink PowerDirector Help
Zoom Tools
Use the zoom tools and to zoom out and in on the preview window
when modifying the title effect. You can also select the viewer zoom amount from
the drop-down to set the size of the title effect preview. Select Fit to resize the title
effect so that is fits in the Title Designer's viewer window.
Note: you can also hold down the Ctrl key on your keyboard and then use
the mouse scroll wheel to zoom in or out on the title effect.
245
Adding Title Effects
Adding Text, Particles, Images, and
Backgrounds
Each title effect template can contain one or more title text boxes. It can also
contain particle effects, images, and backgrounds that the text displays over.
Adding Title Text
You can add additional title text boxes that contain the text you want to display in
your video production.
To add new title text, click on the button and then click in the preview
window to add the title text box to the desired position. Type in the required text in
the new title text box.
See Modifying Title Text and Image Properties for more information on customizing
the added title text's properties.
Adding Particle Effects
You can add particle effects to a title effect template. See Adding Particle Effects for
more detailed information on particle effects.
To add a particle effect to a title effect, click on the button and then select the
particle effect you want to add to the template.
Note: the properties of particle effects cannot be modified once added to a
title template. However, you can adjust the effects start and end time in the
title effect's keyframe timeline.
246
CyberLink PowerDirector Help
Adding Images
You can insert your own images into your title effect template.
To add a image, do this:
1. Click on the button.
2. Browse to and then select the image on your computer you want to add, and
then click Open.
3. Once added, resize and reposition the image in the Title Designer as required.
See Modifying Title Text and Image Properties if you would like to use chroma key
to make the image in the title effect transparent. You can also add shadows,
reflections and more on the inserted image.
Inserting Backgrounds
Your title effect can consist of a background that the title text displays over.
To set a background, do this:
1. Click on the button.
2. Browse to and then select the image on your computer you want to use as the
background, and then click Open.
3. When prompted, set the adjustment settings for the background, as required.
Note: to remove the imported background image, just click the
button.
Modifying Title Effect Position
You can change the position and orientation of the title text and images in a title
effect, quickly and easily.
Note: click on to use the TV safe zone and grid lines to help with the
precise placement of the title effect on the master video. Select Snap to
Reference Lines to have the title effect snap to the grid lines, TV safe
zone, and boundary of the video area.
247
Adding Title Effects
To modify title text and image position or orientation:
·click on the title text or an image, and then drag it to a new position.
·if editing a 2D title, click on above the title text or image, and drag it right
or left to change its orientation.
·if the title effect contains an image, select it and then click and drag a corner
or side to resize the image.
Modifying Title Text and Image
Properties
Click on the Object tab to change the properties of selected title text or images you
inserted into the title effect. The properties that are available on the tab depend on
the type of title effect (2D or 3D-like title) you are editing. See Modifying 2D Title
Effect Properties if you are editing a 2D title effect template, or Modifying 3D-Like
Title Effect Properties if editing 3D-Like title effect template.
Modifying 2D Title Effect Properties
If you are creating or editing a 2D title effect template, on the object properties tab
you can modify everything from the text size, style, color, as well as add shadows,
borders, reflections, and more to both title text and inserted images.
Applying Character Presets to Title Text
Select the Character Presets option to apply a defined character preset to title text.
After you have applied a defined character preset you can refine it using the other
properties on the tab, if required.
To apply a character preset to title text, ensure the text box is selected in the
preview window and then click on a character preset in the list.
Note: once you are done customizing all of the text properties on the tab,
click on to save the character preset to your favorites. To find and
use saved character presets, select M y Favorites in the Character types
drop-down.
248
CyberLink PowerDirector Help
Customizing Font Type
Select the Font Type option to set the font type and size of selected title text. You
can also select the font face color, bold or italicize text, change the line and text
spacing, and set the text alignment in the text box.
If the font type you are using supports it, you can select the Kerning check box to
reduce the space between the letters in the title text.
Customizing Font Face
Select the Font F ac e option to customize the font color, blur, and opacity. Once
selected, use the Blur and Opacity sliders to customize its appearance.
When customizing the font face color, you have the following options in the Fill
type drop-down:
·Uniform color: select this option if you want the font to be one solid color.
Click the colored square to open the color palette and select the desired font
color.
·2 color gradient: select this option if you want the font color to change from
one color to another using a gradient. Click the colored squares to set the
beginning and ending colors, and then drag the Gradient direction control to
set which way the color flows.
·4 color gradient*: select this option if you want the font to consist of four
colors. Click the colored squares to set the colors in each of the four corners
of the text.
Note: * optional feature in CyberLink PowerDirector. Check the version
table on our web site for detailed versioning information.
Using Chroma Key
Select the Chrom a K ey option and then Apply chroma key to add a green screen
effect to an image you inserted into the title effect. Select Once enabled, do this:
1. Click on and then select the color in the image that you want to replace/
make transparent.
249
Adding Title Effects
2. Adjust the Tolerance of hue, Tolerance of saturation, and Tolerance of
luminance sliders to remove the selected color. Adjust until the image or
video behind your inserted image is completely revealed, without any loss of
quality on the image.
3. Use the Edge sharpness slider to fine tune and sharpen the edges of the
inserted image on the revealed background.
Adding a Reflection
Select the Reflection option to add a reflection of title text or an inserted image
onto the background media. Use the Distance slider to set space between the
reflection and the object. Use the Opacity slider to set the opacity of the reflection.
Applying Shadow
Select the Shadow option to add a shadow to selected title text or an inserted
image. Available options allow you to change the shadow's color, direction,
distance from the object, and add an opacity or blur effect.
Applying Border
Select the Border option to add a border around selected title text or an inserted
image. Available options allow you to change the border's size, and add a opacity
or blur effect.
You can customize the border color using the following options in the Fill type
drop-down:
·Uniform color: select this option if you want the border to be one solid color.
Click the colored square to open the color palette and select the desired
border color.
·2 color gradient: select this option if you want the border color to change
from one color to another using a gradient. Click the colored squares to set
the beginning and ending colors, and then drag the Gradient direction
control to set which way the color flows.
·4 color gradient*: select this option if you want the border to consist of four
colors. Click the colored squares to set the colors in each of the four corners
of the border.
250
CyberLink PowerDirector Help
Note: * optional feature in CyberLink PowerDirector. Check the version
table on our web site for detailed versioning information.
Enabling 3D Depth
If you are creating a 3D video production, select the 3D Settings* to give selected
title text or an inserted image a 3D effect.
Note: when using this feature, select the button to enable 3D mode for
best editing results. See Previewing in 3D Mode for more information on
using this mode. * Optional feature in CyberLink PowerDirector. Check the
version table on our web site for detailed versioning information.
Once enabled, use the slider to set the amount of depth you want the object to
have in 3D. Dragging the slider left will make the 3D object seem nearer to the
audience (in the foreground), while dragging it right will make it appear farther
away (in the background).
Flipping Images
Select Flip if you want to to flip an inserted image upside down or from left to right,
depending on your requirement.
Apply Fades to Images
You can select Fade to enable a fade effect on an inserted image. Select whether to
enable a fade-in and/or fade-out on the image.
Note: when a fade is applied, note that keyframes are added to the Opacity
keyframe timeline so you can customize the length of the fade, if required.
See Utilizing PiP Keyframes for more information.
Changing Object Settings
Use the Objec t Settings option to change some of the basic properties of selected
title text or an inserted image. Use the X and Y position fields to set the precise
location of the top left corner of the object on the video image. When used with
keyframes, you can manually create motion for the title object.
251
Adding Title Effects
Note: CyberLink PowerDirector sets the value of the top-left corner of the
object as the 0 axis, with the bottom-right corner having a value of 1.0, 1.0.
The center position in the video frame is 0.500, 0.500. You can more easily
adjust title text position and motion on the Motion tab. See Applying Motion
to Title Text for motion information.
When you create motion for an object, you indicate where (Position) on the video
image you want the object to appear by adding keyframes. To create the motion,
CyberLink PowerDirector will ensure the object is in the desired position at the
specified time (keyframe).
Use the Scale sliders to change an object's size, or Opacity to make it more
transparent.
Note: select the Maintain aspect ratio option if you want to ensure the
object's aspect ratio does not change while you are moving or resizing it.
Deselect this option if you want to change the object's shape or alter its
aspect ratio.
To rotate an object, hover your mouse over , click and then drag your mouse left
or right as required. You can also manually enter a rotation amount in the Rotation
filed and then press the enter key to rotate it.
Note: you can use keyframes to customize all of these object settings when
editing title text. See Utilizing Title Effect Keyframes for more information.
Ease In/Ease Out
Creating motion for title text, by changing the Position, Scale, or Rotation object
settings at different keyframes, can cause the title text to appear jerky, as it speeds
up and slows down when it moves through the frame, changes its size, or rotates in
the video frame. To make the movement look smoother, use the Ease in/out
options. Select Ease in to slow down the title text as it enters a keyframe. Select Ease
out if you want it to gradually accelerate out of the keyframe.
Modifying 3D-Like Title Effect Properties
If you are creating or editing a 3D-Like title effect template, on the object properties
tab you can modify the text size, style, color, as well as its extrusion, opacity,
texture, and rotation settings.
Note: see The Difference Between 3D and 3D-Like Effects to learn more
about both types of effects.
252
CyberLink PowerDirector Help
Applying Character Presets to 3D-Like Title Text
Select the Character Presets option to apply a defined character preset to 3D-Like
title text. After you have applied a defined character preset you can refine it using
the other properties on the tab, if required.
To apply a character preset to 3D-Like title text, ensure the text box is selected in the
preview window and then click on a character preset in the list.
Note: once you are done customizing all of the 3D-Like text properties,
click on to save the character preset to your favorites. To find and
use saved character presets, select M y Favorites in the Character types
drop-down.
Customizing Font Type Settings
Select the Font Type Settings option to set the font type and size of the selected 3D-
Like title text. You can also select the font face color, bold or italicize the text, and
set the text spacing in the text box.
If the font type you are using supports it, you can select the Kerning check box to
reduce the space between the letters in the title text.
Customizing Font Face Settings
In Font Face Settings you can customize the font extrusion and opacity amount. To
set the font color, click the colored square to open the color palette and select the
desired color of the 3D-Like title text.
Note: when applying an extrusion to the 3D-Like title text, the angle of the
extruded text changes as you move the text to different areas of the video
frame.
Using Chroma Key
Select the Chrom a K ey option to add a chroma key (green screen) effect to an
inserted image. Once enable, do this:
1. Click on and then select the color in the image that you want to replace/
make transparent.
253
Adding Title Effects
2. Adjust the Tolerance of hue, Tolerance of saturation, and Tolerance of
luminance sliders to remove the selected color. Adjust until the image or
video behind your inserted image is completely revealed, without any loss of
quality on the image.
3. Use the Edge sharpness slider to fine tune and sharpen the edges of the
inserted image on the revealed background.
Adding a Reflection
Select the Reflection option to add a reflection of the 3D-Like title text or inserted
image onto the background media. Use the Distance slider to set space between
the reflection and the 3D-Like object.
Applying Shadow
Select the Shadow option to add a shadow to an inserted image. Available options
allow you to change the shadow's color, direction, distance from the object, and
add an opacity or blur effect.
Applying Border
Select the Border option to add a border around an inserted image. Available
options allow you to change the border's size, and add a opacity or blur effect.
You can customize the border color using the following options in the Fill type
drop-down:
·Uniform color: select this option if you want the border to be one solid color.
Click the colored square to open the color palette and select the desired
border color.
·2 color gradient: select this option if you want the border color to change
from one color to another using a gradient. Click the colored squares to set
the beginning and ending colors, and then drag the Gradient direction
control to set which way the color flows.
·4 color gradient*: select this option if you want the border to consist of four
colors. Click the colored squares to set the colors in each of the four corners
of the border.
254
CyberLink PowerDirector Help
Note: * optional feature in CyberLink PowerDirector. Check the version
table on our web site for detailed versioning information.
Customizing 3D Rotation Settings
Select the 3D Rotation Settings option to customize the rotation of your 3D-Like
title text. If you applied extrusion in the font face settings, use the available sliders
to rotate the 3D text to generate your preferred 3D-Like effect and orientation.
Applying 3D Texture Settings
Select the 3D Texture Settings option to apply texture to the 3D-Like text by
selecting a text skin from the list. Click the Add Texture button to import your own
image. Based on the color properties of the imported image, CyberLink
PowerDirector applies a custom texture to the title text.
Enabling 3D Depth
If you are creating a 3D video production, select the 3D Settings*option to give 3D-
Like title text or an inserted image a 3D effect.
Note: when using this feature, select the button to enable 3D mode for
best editing results. See Previewing in 3D Mode for more information on
using this mode. * Optional feature in CyberLink PowerDirector. Check the
version table on our web site for detailed versioning information.
Once enabled, use the slider to set the amount of depth you want the 3D-Like
object to have in 3D. Dragging the slider left will make the 3D object seem nearer to
the audience (in the foreground), while dragging it right will make it appear farther
away (in the background).
Flipping Images
Select Flip if you want to to flip an inserted image upside down or from left to right,
depending on your requirement.
Apply Fades to Images
255
Adding Title Effects
You can select Fade to enable a fade effect on an inserted image. Select whether to
enable a fade-in and/or fade-out on the image.
Note: when a fade is applied, note that keyframes are added to the Opacity
keyframe timeline so you can customize the length of the fade, if required.
See Utilizing PiP Keyframes for more information.
Changing Object Settings
Use the Objec t Settings option to change some of the basic properties of an
inserted image. Use the X and Y position fields to set the precise location of the top
left corner of the object on the video image.
Note: CyberLink PowerDirector sets the value of the top-left corner of the
object as the 0 axis, with the bottom-right corner having a value of 1.0, 1.0.
The center position in the video frame is 0.500, 0.500.
Use the Scale sliders to change an object's size, or Opacity to make it more
transparent.
Note: select the Maintain aspect ratio option if you want to ensure the
object's aspect ratio does not change while you are moving or resizing it.
Deselect this option if you want to change the object's shape or alter its
aspect ratio.
To rotate an object, hover your mouse over , click and then drag your mouse left
or right as required. You can also manually enter a rotation amount in the Rotation
filed and then press the enter key to rotate it.
Applying Animation Effects to Title Text
Click on the Effects tab to apply animations to title text, such as text fades, text
motion, or wipes.
Note: once you are done customizing the title text animation you can use
the motion blur effect to make it look smother. See Applying Motion Blur for
more information.
To apply animation to text, do this:
1. Select the title text you wish to animate in the preview window.
2. Select the Starting Effect option and then select an animation from the
available list.
256
CyberLink PowerDirector Help
3. Select the Ending Effect option and then select an animation from the
available list.
Customizing the Speed of Title Text Effect
You can modify the speed of a title text's animation. The following two factors
determine the speed for the animation to complete.
Note: on the Text tab you can manually adjust the title text position at
keyframes and use ease in/out to make the movement look smoother. See
Changing Object Settings for more information.
Duration of the Title Effect Clip in the Timeline
The longer the duration of the title effect clip in your project's timeline, the longer it
takes for the title effect animation to complete. For example, if the title effect clip is
20 seconds, it takes the title effect 20 seconds to complete the starting and ending
animation.
Note: if you cannot find the keyframe timeline in the Title Designer, just
click the button under the preview window to display it.
Keyframe Timeline
A custom keyframe timeline is generated for each title effect when you open it in
the Title Designer. In the above example, because the title effect clip is 20 seconds
long on the project timeline, the keyframe timeline is also 20 seconds.
Note: if you cannot find the keyframe timeline in the Title Designer, just
click the button under the preview window to display it.
257
Adding Title Effects
If you'd like to view the movie timeline, click the button.
The keyframe timeline lets you precisely place each keyframe, so you can time the
applied effect in your movie production. The title effect animation has four
keyframes.
The first two keyframes indicate the start and end points for the starting effect,
while the last two indicate the start and end points for the ending effect.
The darker green section indicates the time it takes for the starting/ending effect to
complete. If you would like to change the start or end time of the effect or how
long it takes for the starting or ending effect to complete, just drag a keyframe to
the desired position in the timeline.
Note: the lighter green section indicates how long the title effect displays on
screen once the starting effect animation is complete.
258
CyberLink PowerDirector Help
Applying Motion Blur
Select the Enable motion blur option if your title text has an animation effect
applied. Motion blur makes the animation appear smoother.
Once selected, use the available sliders as follows:
·Blur length: drag this slider to set the duration (number of frames) you want
blended into a single frame (the blur). Dragging the slider right will apply
more of a blur to the title text.
·Blur density: drag this slider to set the number of samples (of title effect) used
per frame. Dragging the slider right will make the title text less blurry as it
adds samples to fill the missing content caused by the movement.
Adding Motion to Title Text
Click on the Motion tab to add motion* to title text, allowing it to move across the
screen. You can choose from a number of predefined motion paths or create your
own custom title text motion.
Note: * optional feature in CyberLink PowerDirector. Check the version
table on our web site for detailed versioning information.
Using a Motion Path Template
To add motion to title text you can select a motion path template on the Motion
tab that fits your requirements. Note that keyframes are added to the Position track
of the Title Designer keyframe timeline. These motion path templates have
predefined motion in them, but you can customize the motion. See Customizing
Title Text Motion and Utilizing Title Effect Keyframes for detailed information on
using keyframes to customize title text motion.
Customizing Title Text Motion
The Title Designer uses keyframes to customize the motion of title text. Keyframes
are frames of your video that define the start and end points of an effect, which in
this example is motion.
259
Adding Title Effects
Note: if you added an animation effect to your title text, it may already have
motion. However, you can combine these two types of effects to create
impressive titles in your production.
To customize the motion of title text:
·drag an existing keyframe to a new location in the preview window. The title
text will follow the modified path to get to the changed keyframe position.
·drag the path line to alter the path the title text takes to get to the next
keyframe.
·use the player controls to find a position on the motion path, and then click
on the Position track of the keyframe timeline to add a new keyframe at a new
position, if required.
Customizing the Speed of Title Text Motion
You have full control over the speed to the title text's motion. The following three
factors determine the speed of the title text's motion.
Note: on the Properties tab in Object Settings you can manually adjust
the title text position at keyframes and use ease in/out to make the
movement look smoother. See Changing Object Settings for more
information.
Duration of the Title Effect in the Timeline
260
CyberLink PowerDirector Help
The longer the duration of title effect clip, the slower the title text's motion is. For
example, if the title effect clip is 10 seconds, it takes the title text 10 seconds to
travel from the first Position keyframe to the last Position keyframe.
Distance Between Keyframes
The distance between each keyframe also contributes to the speed of the title text
motion. The further the distance between each keyframe, the quicker the title text
needs to move to get to the next keyframe.
Keyframe Timeline
The keyframe timeline is located below the preview window. Each keyframe in the
motion path has a corresponding marker on the keyframe timeline.
Note: if you cannot find the keyframe timeline in the Title Designer, just
click the button under the preview window to display it.
If the title effect clip on the timeline has a duration of 10 seconds, the keyframe
timeline is 10 seconds long. To increase the speed of title text motion, drag a
keyframe marker closer to previous keyframe marker.
261
Adding Title Effects
Saving a Custom Title Text Motion Path
Once you finish modifying your title text path you can save it for future use. To
save a motion path, click on to save it as a custom path. It is then available
in motion path list the next time you want to use it.
Utilizing Title Effect Keyframes
Use keyframes when modifying your title effects to define the start and end points
of text effects. In the Title Designer you can use keyframes to change the title
effect's opacity, size (scale), rotation, motion, and position.
Note: if you cannot find the keyframe timeline in the Title Designer, just
click the button under the preview window to display it.
Adding Keyframes
To add a keyframe to the keyframe timeline, do this:
1. Use the player controls to find the moment in your title effect where you want
its properties to change.
2. Click next to the text property you want to change to add a keyframe to the
corresponding keyframe track.
3. Use the features in the Title Designer to modify the properties of the title
effect as required for this keyframe. In this example we are modifying the
opacity of the title effect at the beginning of the clip.
262
CyberLink PowerDirector Help
Note: notice above that when opacity is changed, a keyframe is
automatically added at the current timeline slider position.
263
Adding Title Effects
When previewed, at the first keyframe the title effect is the completely
transparent, and then slowly gets more opaque until it reaches the specified
opacity level by the time the playback slider reaches the second keyframe.
264
CyberLink PowerDirector Help
It will maintain this opacity until the playback slider reaches the last keyframe,
unless you add more keyframes or change the properties of the last keyframe.
Note: you can also modify the properties of a keyframe by right clicking on
it and selecting Duplicate Previous Keyframe or Duplicate Next
Keyframe. Doing this copies the properties of the specified keyframe to the
keyframe you right clicked on.
4. Repeat these steps to create the kind of effect you want in your video
production using keyframes to modify the title effect's properties.
Modifying and Removing Keyframes
At any time you can modify the keyframes added, by selecting it and changing the
title effect's object properties, or by dragging the keyframe to another position on
the keyframe timeline.
To remove a keyframe, select it on the keyframe timeline and then click .
Saving and Sharing Title Templates
Once you finish modifying your title template you can save it to your title effects
library for future use, upload it to DirectorZone to share it with others, or back it up
on CyberLink Cloud*.
Note: * optional feature in CyberLink PowerDirector. Check the version
table on our web site for detailed versioning information.
·click on Share to upload your custom template to DirectorZone or back it up
on CyberLink Cloud. See Sharing and Backing Up Title Templates for more
information.
·click on Save As to save a modified template as a new template to the Title
Room.
·click on OK to save a new template to the Title Room.
Sharing and Backing Up Title Templates
You can share your customized title templates with other CyberLink PowerDirector
users by uploading them to DirectorZone. If you have a CyberLink Cloud
265
Adding Title Effects
subscription you can back up all your customized templates by storing them on
CyberLink Cloud.
To share and back up your title templates, do this:
1. Do either of the following:
·in the Title Designer, click on Share, enter a name for the custom template,
and then click OK.
·select the title template in the library, and then click .
2. In the upload window, enter the information as follows:
·Upload to: select where you want to upload the template.
·Title: name of the template as it will display once uploaded.
·Style: select a style or category for the template.
·Type: if required, select the type of template you are uploading.
·Tags: enter some keyword search tags that will help users find the template
when searching.
Note: separate each tag you enter with a space. If you want to use two words
as the tag, just put quotes around them, e.g. "dollar bill".
·Collection: enter the name of the collection you want the template added to.
·Description: enter a short description of your template.
3. Click Next to proceed.
4. Confirm the copyright disclaimer, and then click Next to proceed with the
upload.
5. Click on Finish to close the upload window.
266
CyberLink PowerDirector Help
Creating Custom Masks in
the Mask Designer
Chapter 14:
In the Mask Designer you can create custom masks that are added directly to media
clips on the timeline. Masks let you hide portions of the video image, only
displaying the portions of the media clip that you want. To open the Mask Designer,
select a media clip on the timeline and then select Designer > Mask Designer.
Note: * optional feature in CyberLink PowerDirector. Check the version
table on our web site for detailed versioning information.
267
Creating Custom Masks in the Mask Designer
A - Mask Properties Tab, B - Mask Properties, C - Motion Tab, D - Media Clip/Video Being Masked, E -
Mask, F - Mode Selection, G - Zoom Tools, H - Display/Hide Keyframe Timeline, I - TV Safe Zone/Grid
Lines, J - Upload to Internet, K - Mask Keyframe Timeline
When you are done customizing your mask in the Mask Designer, click the OK
button to save your changes. Your changes are applied to the selected media clip
and updated on the video timeline. If you want to edit the mask further, just
reselect the media clip on the timeline and then reenter the Mask Designer by
selecting Designer > Mask Designer.
Mode Selection and Zoom Tools
When modifying masks in the Masks Designer use the mode selection and zoom
tools for assistance.
Note: when modifying masks in the Mask Designer, use the player controls
to preview, and click to preview the video at full screen. You can also
click to hide the keyframe timeline for a larger view of the preview
window.
Mode Selection
In the Mask Designer there are two selection modes. Click the button to
enable the mask selection. When selected, you can freely click and move the mask
to different areas of the video frame.
Click the button to enable a mode that lets you drag the view in the Mask
Designer. This mode is especially helpful when applying masks with motion that
start off screen.
Zoom Tools
Use the zoom tools and to zoom out and in on the preview window
when modifying masks. You can also select the viewer zoom amount from the
drop-down to set the size of the mask preview. Select Fit to resize the mask so that
is fits in the Mask Designer's viewer window.
268
CyberLink PowerDirector Help
Note: you can also hold down the Ctrl key on your keyboard and then use
the mouse scroll wheel to zoom in or out on the mask.
Selecting Masks
Click on the Mask tab and then select a mask in Mask Properties to overlay portions
of the media clip you selected on the timeline.
Click and drag the edges of the mask to move and resize it as required. See
Modifying Mask Size and Position for more information.
The area that is white in the mask thumbnail, is the part of the mask that is
transparent. However, you can select the Invert mask option to invert the portion
of the media that is being masked.
269
Creating Custom Masks in the Mask Designer
Use the Feather r adius slider if you want to adjust the softness on the mask's edges.
270
CyberLink PowerDirector Help
Creating Custom Masks
In the Mask Designer you can import your own images to create custom masks.
You can also create masks in the Mask Composer using title text and images.
Importing Images
To create a mask using an imported image, click on the Load Image button in the
Mask Properties section of the Mask tab, and then import an image from your
computer's hard drive.
271
Creating Custom Masks in the Mask Designer
272
CyberLink PowerDirector Help
273
Creating Custom Masks in the Mask Designer
As with the mask templates, by default, the lighter areas of the imported image
become transparent. Once imported, change the properties and mask objects
settings to customize to your requirements.
274
CyberLink PowerDirector Help
Mask Composer
Clicking on the Create Mask button in the Mask Properties section of the Mask tab
will open the Mask Composer, where you can create a custom mask using title text
and images.
275
Creating Custom Masks in the Mask Designer
Editing Title Text
Click on the title text object and then enter the text you want to use in your custom
mask.
Note: if required you can add more than one title text object in the mask by
clicking on the button and then clicking in the preview window to
adding the title text box to the desired position.
276
CyberLink PowerDirector Help
Use the Font Type options to set the font type and size of the selected title text. You
can also bold or italicize text, change the line and text spacing, and set the text
alignment in the text box. If the font type you are using supports it, you can select
the Kerning check box to reduce the space between the letters in the title text.
277
Creating Custom Masks in the Mask Designer
Mask Object Properties
In the Obj ec t Settings section you can change some of the basic properties of the
mask. In the Position section, you can manually position the mask on the video
frame, using the X and Y position fields to set the precise location of the top left
corner of the mask.
Note: CyberLink PowerDirector sets the value of the top-left corner of the
mask as the 0 axis, with the bottom-right corner having a value of 1.0, 1.0.
The center position in the video frame is 0.500, 0.500.
Use the Scale sliders to change the mask's size, or Opacity to make it less
transparent.
Note: select the Maintain aspect ratio option if you want to ensure the
mask's aspect ratio does not change while you are moving or resizing it.
Deselect this option if you want to change the mask's shape or alter its
aspect ratio.
278
CyberLink PowerDirector Help
To rotate the mask, enter the Rotation amount in the field provided.
Importing Images
In the Mask Composer you can also click on the button to import images for
use in your custom mask. The lighter areas of the imported image become
transparent once imported.
When you are done creating your mask, click OK to close the Mask Composer. Your
changes will be saved and the new mask will be available in Mask Properties of the
Mask Designer.
279
Creating Custom Masks in the Mask Designer
If you want to make further edits to your custom mask, just right click on its
thumbnail and then select Modify to reenter the Mask Composer.
Modifying Mask Size and
Position
You can change the size, position, and orientation of the mask. The resizing options
are unrestricted. You can reduce the mask to miniature size or enlarge as much as
you want.
Note: click on to use the TV safe zone and grid lines to help with the
precise placement of the masks on the video image. Select Snap to
Reference Lines to have the mask snap to the grid lines, TV safe zone,
and boundary of the video area.
To modify mask size, position, or orientation:
·click and drag a corner or side to resize the mask.
280
CyberLink PowerDirector Help
Note: in the Mask Scale section on the Mask Object Settings, you can
deselect the M aintain aspect ratio option to resize the mask more freely.
·click on the mask and drag it to a new position.
·click on above the mask and drag it left or right to change its orientation.
·click and drag the blue nodes in corners to change its shape. See Changing
the Shape of Media for more information.
Note: you can use keyframes to customize the size and shape of masks.
See Utilizing Mask Keyframes for more information.
Modifying Mask Object Settings
On the Mask tab, click on the Object Settings section to change some of the basic
properties of the mask.
Note: while modifying the mask's object settings, you can select the Only
show the selected track option to hide any other media that is displayed in
the preview window while modifying.
In the Mask Position section, you can manually position the mask on the video
frame, using the X and Y position fields to set the precise location of the top left
corner of the mask. When used with keyframes, you can manually create motion of
the mask.
Note: CyberLink PowerDirector sets the value of the top-left corner of the
mask as the 0 axis, with the bottom-right corner having a value of 1.0, 1.0.
The center position in the video frame is 0.500, 0.500. You can more easily
adjust mask position and motion on the Motion tab. See Adding Motion to
Masks for motion information.
When you create motion for masks, you indicate where (Mask Position) on the
video image you want the mask to appear by adding keyframes. To create the
motion, CyberLink PowerDirector will ensure the mask is in the desired position at
the specified time (keyframe).
Use the Mask S cale sliders to change the mask's size, or Mask Opacity to make it
more transparent.
Note: select the Maintain aspect ratio option if you want to ensure the
mask's aspect ratio does not change while you are moving or resizing it.
Deselect this option if you want to change the mask's shape or alter its
aspect ratio.
281
Creating Custom Masks in the Mask Designer
To rotate the mask, enter the Rotation amount in the field provided.
Note: you can use keyframes to customize each of these object settings.
See Utilizing PiP Keyframes for more information.
Ease In/Ease Out
Creating motion for masks, by changing the Mask Position, Mask Scale, or Rotation
object settings at different keyframes, can cause the mask to appear jerky, as it
speeds up and slows down when it moves through the frame, changes its size, or
rotates in the video frame. To make the movement look smoother, use the Ease in/
out options. Select E ase in to slow down the mask as it enters a keyframe. Select
Ease out if you want it to gradually accelerate out of the keyframe.
Adding Motion to Masks
Click on the Motion tab to add motion* to masks, allowing them to move across
the screen. You can choose from a number of predefined motion paths or create
your own custom motion. You can also add a rotation effect to the mask.
Note: * optional feature in CyberLink PowerDirector. Check the version
table on our web site for detailed versioning information.
Using a Motion Path Template
To add motion to mask you can select a motion path template on the Motion tab
that fits your requirements. Note that keyframes are added to the Position track of
the Mask Designer keyframe timeline. These motion path templates have
predefined motion in them, but you can customize the motion. See Adding Motion
to Masks and Utilizing Mask Keyframes for detailed information on using keyframes
to customize mask motion.
Customizing Mask Motion
The Mask Designer uses keyframes to customize the motion of masks. Keyframes
are frames of your video that define the start and end points of an effect, which in
this example is motion.
282
CyberLink PowerDirector Help
Note: some masks have predefined motion already applied.
To customize the motion of masks:
·drag an existing keyframe to a new location in the preview window. The mask
will follow the modified path to get to the changed keyframe position.
·drag the path line to alter the path the mask takes to get to the next keyframe.
·use the player controls to find a position on the motion path, and then click
on the Position track of the keyframe timeline to add a new keyframe at a new
position, if required.
Customizing the Speed of Mask Motion
You have full control over the speed to the mask's motion. The following three
factors determine the speed of the mask's motion.
Note: on the Properties tab in Object Settings you can manually adjust
the mask position at keyframes and use ease in/out to make the movement
look smoother. See Changing Object Settings for more information.
Distance Between Keyframes
283
Creating Custom Masks in the Mask Designer
The distance between each keyframe contributes to the speed of the mask motion.
The further the distance between each keyframe, the quicker the mask needs to
move to get to the next keyframe.
Keyframe Timeline
The keyframe timeline is located below the preview window. Each keyframe in the
motion path has a corresponding marker on the keyframe timeline.
Note: if you cannot find the keyframe timeline in the Mask Designer, just
click the button under the preview window to display it.
If the selected media clip on the timeline has a duration of 10 seconds, the
keyframe timeline is 10 seconds long. To increase the speed of a mask's motion,
drag a keyframe marker closer to the previous keyframe marker.
Saving a Custom Mask Motion Path
Once you finish modifying your mask's motion path you can save it for future use.
To save a motion path, click on to save it as a custom path. It is then
available in motion path list the next time you want to use it.
284
CyberLink PowerDirector Help
Utilizing Mask Keyframes
Use keyframes when modifying your masks to define the start and end points of
the customized effects. In the Mask Designer you can use keyframes to change the
mask's position, size (mask scale), opacity, rotation, and motion.
Keyframe Timeline
A custom keyframe timeline is generated for each mask when you open it in the
Mask Designer. In the below example, because the selected media clip is 10 seconds
long on the project timeline, the keyframe timeline is also 10 seconds.
Note: if you cannot find the keyframe timeline in the Mask Designer, just
click the button under the preview window to display it.
If you'd like to view the movie timeline, click the button.
The keyframe timeline lets you precisely place each keyframe, so you can time the
applied effect in your movie production.
285
Creating Custom Masks in the Mask Designer
Adding Keyframes
To add a keyframe to the keyframe timeline, do this:
Note: if you cannot find the keyframe timeline in the Mask Designer, just
click the button under the preview window to display it.
1. Use the player controls to find the moment in your media clip where you
want the mask's properties to change.
2. Click next to the property you want to change to add a keyframe to the
corresponding keyframe track.
3. Use the features in the Mask Designer to modify the properties of the effect as
required for this keyframe. In this example we are modifying the opacity of
the mask at the beginning of the media clip.
286
CyberLink PowerDirector Help
Note: notice above that when opacity is changed, a keyframe is
automatically added at the current timeline slider position.
287
Creating Custom Masks in the Mask Designer
When previewed, at the first keyframe the mask is the completely transparent,
and then slowly gets more opaque until it reaches the specified opacity level
by the time the playback slider reaches the second keyframe.
288
CyberLink PowerDirector Help
It will maintain this opacity until the playback slider reaches the last keyframe,
unless you add more keyframes or change the properties of the last keyframe.
Note: you can also modify the properties of a keyframe by right clicking on
it and selecting Duplicate Previous Keyframe or Duplicate Next
Keyframe. Doing this copies the properties of the specified keyframe to the
keyframe you right clicked on.
4. Repeat these steps to create the kind of effect you want in your video
production using keyframes to modify the mask's properties and motion.
Modifying and Removing Keyframes
At any time you can modify the keyframes added, by selecting it and changing the
mask's properties, or by dragging the keyframe to another position on the keyframe
timeline.
To remove a keyframe, select it on the keyframe timeline and then click .
Saving and Sharing Masks
Once you are finished modifying/customizing a mask you can save it to your mask
library for future use. You can also share the PiP part of the mask on DirectorZone,
or back it up on CyberLink Cloud*.
Note: * optional feature in CyberLink PowerDirector. Check the version
table on our web site for detailed versioning information.
·click on Share to upload the PiP part of the custom mask to DirectorZone or
back it up on CyberLink Cloud. See Saving and Sharing PiP Objects for more
information.
·click on Save As to save a modified mask as a new mask in the Mask Designer
mask library.
Note: masks created after selecting a video clip on the timeline cannot be
saved or shared. You can only save and share masks created with image
backgrounds.
289
Using Transitions
Using Transitions
Chapter 15:
Click the button to open the Transition Room to access a library of transitions
that you can use on or between image and video clips in your video production.
You can also use the available audio transitions between two audio clips on the
voice or music tracks, or on an audio track.
Transitions let you control how media appears and disappears in your project, and
changes, or transitions, from one clip to the next. You can add a transition to a
single clip, or between two clips on a track.
Adding Transitions to a Single
Clip
By adding a transition to a single clip, you can control how the clip appears and/or
disappears in your production. For example, you can add transitions to PiP video
(including images, video clips, color boards, PiP objects, paint animation objects,
title effects, and particle effects) and fully control its appearance in your final video.
Note: you can set the default behavior and duration of transitions added to
the timeline on the Editing preferences tab. See Editing Preferences for
more information.
To add a transition to a single clip, do this:
1. Click on to open the Transition Room.
2. Select a transition effect and then drag it to the beginning (prefix transition) or
ending (postfix transition) of a clip on a video track.
3. To change the duration of the transition, click on the Duration button or click
and drag its start/end points within the clip.
290
CyberLink PowerDirector Help
Prefix Transition
Postfix Transition
291
Using Transitions
Note: you can add transitions to all the video, image, and effect clips on the
timeline at once by clicking , choosing Apply Random Transition to
All Videos or Apply Fading Transition to All Videos, and then the
desired transition behavior. You can also do this for all the audio clips by
selecting Apply Random Audio Transition to All Audio.
Adding Transitions Between
Two Clips
You can also add a transition between two image and video clips on a video track
or between two audio clips on any of the audio related (audio, voice or music)
tracks. To add a transition between two clips, do this:
1. Click on to open the Transition Room.
292
CyberLink PowerDirector Help
2. Select a transition effect and then drag it between the two clips on a track.
3. To change the duration of the transition, click on the Duration button or click
and drag its start/end points within the clips.
Note: you can add transitions to all the video, image, and effect clips on the
timeline at once by clicking , choosing Apply Random Transition to
All Videos or Apply Fading Transition to All Videos, and then the
desired transition behavior. You can also do this for all the audio clips by
selecting Apply Random Audio Transition to All Audio.
Using Audio Transitions
You can use audio transitions to transition between two audio files on an audio
track, or between two video clips that contain audio. Audio transitions can also be
added at the beginning or end of a single audio or video clip.
Note: when you add an audio transition between two video clips, the fade
transition is automatically added on the corresponding video track. The
video transition cannot be removed, but it can be replaced with another
video transition in the transition library.
To add an audio transition to a clip, do this:
1. Click on to open the Transition Room.
2. Select the Audio tag on the left to display the available audio transitions.
3. Select one of the transitions and then drag it to the desired position
(beginning (prefix transition), ending (postfix transition), or between two clips).
4. To change the duration of the transition, click on the Duration button or click
and drag its start/end points within the clips.
293
Using Transitions
Setting Transition Behavior
Once you have added a transition between two clips, you can set its behavior.
Transitions between two clips in CyberLink PowerDirector have one of the following
behaviors:
294
CyberLink PowerDirector Help
Note: you can set the default behaviour of transitions added to the timeline
on the Editing preferences tab. See Editing Preferences for more
information.
·Cross Transition: when using a cross transition, the two clips are side by side
on the timeline and the transition acts like a bridge between them. For
example, if you add a two second transition between two five second clips,
the total duration is 10 seconds. The transition begins at the four second mark
of the first clip, and ends at the one second mark of the second clip.
·Overlap Transition: when using an overlap transition, the two clips overlap
while the transition is taking place. This allows for parts of the two clips to
play over each other during the transition. Using the same example as above,
the total duration is eight seconds, with the transition playing for two seconds
over both clips.
To set a transition's behavior, do this:
1. Click on the transition between two clips.
2. Click the Modify button to change to the other transition type, or right-click
on the transition and then select Modify Transition.
3. In the Transition Settings panel, set the behavior of the transition.
Modifying Transition Settings
Some transitions have settings you can modify in the Transition Settings panel.
These settings may include the ability to modify the background color used in the
transition, the direction of the transition effect, the type of effect used, and more.
295
Using Transitions
Note: if you are modifying the settings of an alpha transition, the
Transition Desi gner button is available in the Transition Settings panel.
Click it to perform more advanced modifications on the alpha transition.
See Modifying Alpha Transitions in the Transition Designer for more
information.
To check if a transition you are using has adjustable settings, select it on the
timeline and then click the Modify button to open the Transition Settings panel. If
there is a setting available, adjust as required to achieve your desired results.
Note: you can also set the transition behavior in the Transition Settings
panel. See Setting Transition Behavior for more information.
Modifying Alpha Transitions in
the Transition Designer
In the Transition Designer* you can modify the existing alpha transitions in the
transition library, or create new ones from scratch. Alpha transitions are wipes that
use custom images or masks to create the transition effect.
Note: * optional feature in CyberLink PowerDirector. Check the version
table on our web site for detailed versioning information.
296
CyberLink PowerDirector Help
To open the Transition Designer, click on to enter the Transition Room, and
then select the Alpha transition tag on the left. Next, select an alpha transition in
the library and then click the button.
A - Alpha Transition Properties, B - Transition Effect Preview, C - Transition Effect Keyframe Timeline
To create a new alpha transition, enter the Transition Room and then click the
button to open the Transition Designer. See Creating New Alpha Transitions for
more detailed information.
Note: you can also open the Transition Designer when editing an alpha
transition's settings by clicking the Transi tion Designer button in the
Transition Settings panel.
297
Using Transitions
Creating New Alpha Transitions
You can create new custom alpha transitions using your own imported images.
Note: when you create a new alpha transition, it is saved under the Custom
tag in the transition library, not under the Alpha tag.
To create a new alpha transition, do this:
1. Click to enter the Transition Room and then the button above the
transition library.
2. Browse to and then select the image you want to use in the alpha transition.
Once selected, click the Open button to import it into the Transition Designer.
Note: for the best results, it is recommended that you use images that
contain gradients.
3. Proceed to modify the properties of the alpha transition as required. See
Modifying Alpha Transition Properties for more detailed information.
Note: once the image is imported, it is converted to grayscale for use in the
Transition Designer.
Modifying Alpha Transition Properties
In the Properties tab of the Transition Designer you can customize the alpha
transition's properties. See the following sections for detailed information on the
properties you can modify on this tab.
·Alpha Transition Overview
·Changing Image Properties
·Applying a Border
·Customizing the Shift Progression
·Setting Edge Sharpness
298
CyberLink PowerDirector Help
Alpha Transition Overview
Alpha transitions use an image's properties to perform the transition, i.e. shift from
one clip to another when used in your video production.
The image in the Transition Designer is converted to grayscale for use in the alpha
transition. By default, the areas that are blackest are the areas that are revealed
(transitioned) first, followed by the grays, and then the whitest areas. In the example
below, the center of the heart is black, so the B is revealed in that area first.
Note: you can invert the transition area so that the whitest areas are
revealed first. See Inverting Transition Area for more information.
While the whitest outside areas are the last parts to be revealed.
299
Using Transitions
Note: you can fully customize the progression of the shift (from A to B) in
the alpha transition. See Customizing the Shift Progression for more
information.
Changing Image Properties
In the Image section of the Transition Designer you can change some of the
properties for the image used in the alpha transition. If required, change the
position of the focus area in the Image preview, or the area of the image that will be
used in the alpha transition.
300
CyberLink PowerDirector Help
Deselect the Keep aspect ratio option if you want more control on the shape of the
focus area. Note that the aspect ratio of the focus area matches your current
project's aspect ratio.
301
Using Transitions
Select the Flip upside dow n option if you want to flip the image vertically, or Flip
left to right if you want to flip it horizontally.
Applying a Border
You can apply a color border on the edge of the transition line. To do this, select
the Border option and then set the level of Opacity on the border to adjust its
appearance.
302
CyberLink PowerDirector Help
Selecting Border Color
When selecting the color of the border, you have the following options in the Fill
type drop-down:
·Uniform color: select this option if you want the border to be one solid color.
Click the colored square to open the color palette and select the desired
border color.
·2 color gradient: select this option if you want the border color to change
from one color to another using a gradient. Click the colored squares to set
the beginning and ending colors.
Customizing the Shift Progression
In this section you can customize the shift progression of the alpha transition, or
how it transitions from one clip to another when used in your video production.
Shift Progression Timeline
The shift progression timeline is a graphical representation of how the transition
progresses, i.e. how the alpha transition shifts from the A to the B as shown in the
below example.
303
Using Transitions
304
CyberLink PowerDirector Help
305
Using Transitions
The timeline along the top is the keyframe timeline and is generated for the alpha
transition when you open it in the Transition Designer. In the below example,
because the transition duration is two seconds long (by default in the transition
library), the keyframe timeline is also two seconds. If you increased the duration of
the transition in the timeline to five seconds, the keyframe timeline would then be
five seconds long.
306
CyberLink PowerDirector Help
If alpha transition you are editing is on the timeline, click the button
to view the movie timeline.
The scale to the left represents the progression from the A to the B, and the line
shows the progress.
You can modify the shift progression as required, by changing the beginning and
ending points, or adding keyframes to precisely customize the shift progression, or
transition from one clip to another when used in your production.
Adding Keyframes
To add a keyframe to the keyframe timeline, do this:
307
Using Transitions
1. Use the player controls to find the moment in the transition where you want
the progression to shift.
2. Click in the Shift Progression section to add a keyframe to the progression
line.
3. If required, use the Shift slider to change the progression position of the line.
In this above example, the transition will now shift 75% from A to B in the first
second of the transition, and then progress the final 25% in the last second.
4. Repeat these steps to customize the shift progression as required using
keyframes.
Removing Keyframes
To remove a keyframe, drag the timeline slider over it so that it is highlighted and
then click .
Inverting Transition Area
Select the Invert transition area option if you want the whitest areas of the alpha
transition image to transition first, followed by the grays, and then the blackest
areas.
308
CyberLink PowerDirector Help
309
Using Transitions
Setting Edge Sharpness
In the Edge section, use the slider to set the sharpness of the transition line by
adjusting its gradient level. Dragging it left will make it sharper,
310
CyberLink PowerDirector Help
while dragging it right will make it softer or more blurry.
Saving Alpha Transitions
Once you are finished modifying/customizing an alpha transition you can save it to
your transition library for future use, upload it to DirectorZone to share it with
others, or back it up on CyberLink Cloud*.
Note: * optional feature in CyberLink PowerDirector. Check the version
table on our web site for detailed versioning information.
·click on Share to upload your custom template to DirectorZone or back it up
on CyberLink Cloud. See Sharing and Backing Up PiP Objects for more
information.
311
Using Transitions
·click on Save As to save a modified template as a new template to the
Transition Room.
·click on OK to save a new template to the Transition Room.
Note: when you create a new alpha transition, or edit an existing one, it is
saved under the Custom tag in the transition library, not under the Alpha
tag.
Sharing and Backing Up Alpha Transitions
You can share your customized alpha transitions with other CyberLink
PowerDirector users by uploading them to DirectorZone. If you have a CyberLink
Cloud subscription you can back up all your customized alpha transitions by
storing them on CyberLink Cloud.
To share and back up your alpha transitions, do this:
1. Do either of the following:
·in the Transitions Designer, click on Share, enter a name for the custom
template, and then click OK.
·select the alpha transitions in the library, and then click .
2. In the upload window, enter the information as follows:
·Upload to: select where you want to upload the template.
·Title: name of the template as it will display once uploaded.
·Style: select a style or category for the template.
·Type: if required, select the type of template you are uploading.
·Tags: enter some keyword search tags that will help users find the template
when searching.
Note: separate each tag you enter with a space. If you want to use two words
as the tag, just put quotes around them, e.g. "dollar bill".
·Collection: enter the name of the collection you want the template added to.
·Description: enter a short description of your template.
3. Click Next to proceed.
312
CyberLink PowerDirector Help
4. Confirm the copyright disclaimer, and then click Next to proceed with the
upload.
5. Click on Finish to close the upload window.
313
Mixing Audio and Recording Voice-Overs
Mixing Audio and
Recording Voice-Overs
Chapter 16:
Your production's audio can make or break your video production. Use the Audio
Mixing Room to mix the audio levels of your production, or record a voice-over in
the Voice-Over Room to add narration to your video.
Adjusting Audio Clip Volume
Levels
Your video production may contain audio in one of the audio tracks, the music
track, or the voice track. Since the audio may have been recorded at different levels,
the result could produce an overwhelming and confusing soundtrack.
Click to open the Audio Mixing Room to mix all of the audio levels into a more
harmonious soundtrack for your video, or mix the levels in track on each individual
clip using volume keys.
Mixing Audio In-Track
You can manually change the volume level at any point in an audio or video clip in
the timeline.
Note: for easier audio syncing, you can increase the timeline scale by
selecting the Enable timeline scale for audio track in Editing
Preferences.
To change the volume level of an audio track in the timeline, click on the audio
level line at the point where you want to change the audio level to set a volume
key. Drag the volume key up to increase the volume or down to decrease the
volume.
314
CyberLink PowerDirector Help
Note: to remove a volume key, drag it outside the clip's borders.
Mixing Audio in the Audio Mixing Room
Click to gain access to the audio mixer in the Audio Mixing Room, to set the
audio level for each track using the available controls.
A - Audio Tracks in Timeline, B - Master Volume Controls, C - Fade In/Out Controls, D - Normalize
Volume, E - Audio Level Meter, F - Master Gain Control
315
Mixing Audio and Recording Voice-Overs
When you enter the Audio Mixing Room, the audio at the current position of the
timeline slider is available for mixing. Use the player controls to locate the position
in your video where you want to mix the audio.
To mix the audio in the timeline, do this:
·select a clip in the timeline, and then use the master volume controls to
increase or decrease the volume at the current position.
·if there is more than one audio clip on the voice or music track, or on any of
the audio tracks, click the Normalize* button to have CyberLink
PowerDirector set the volume for all the clips to the same level.
Note: * optional feature in CyberLink PowerDirector. Check the version table
on our web site for detailed versioning information.
·use the master gain control sliders to increase or decrease the volume of all
the media on a track.
·use the audio level meter to view the audio level, or loudness in decibels,
during playback. If the audio levels rise to the red levels, you can adjust the
master volume to lower the audio level.
Note: if audio in a clip enters the red level of the audio level meter, CyberLink
PowerDirector marks the area on the timeline in red. Use the master volume
controls and audio level meter to fix the problem area as required.
Adding Fade Effects to Audio Clips
To add a fade-in/fade-out effect to an audio clip, do this:
1. Click open the Audio Mixing Room
2. Select the audio clip in the timeline.
3. Ensure the timeline slider is at the beginning of the audio clip, and then click
to add a fade-in effect.
4. Drag the timeline slider to the position in your audio clip where you want the
audio to start fading out, and then click effect.
Note: when you add fade effects, volume keys are added to the audio clip in
the timeline. You can adjust these volume keys to customize the fade effect.
See Mixing Audio In-Track for more information on adjust volume keys.
316
CyberLink PowerDirector Help
Restoring Audio Clip Volume Levels
If you are dissatisfied with the volume level of any audio clip, you can easily restore
the clip's original volume level. To do this, right-click on the audio clip and then
select Restore to Original Volume Level.
Recording Voice-Overs
Click to open the Voice-Over Recording Room and record a narration with a
microphone while watching a preview of your video production.
Note: access to the Voice-Over Recording Room is only available if
CyberLink PowerDirector detects there is a microphone or other audio input
device available.
A - Recording Volume Level, B - Recording Preferences, C- Record/Stop Button, D- Fade-In/Out
317
Mixing Audio and Recording Voice-Overs
When you capture your voice-over, the audio is placed on the voice track and is
automatically synchronized with the video. Set your recording preferences as
follows:
·click Device to select your audio device and input.
·click Profile to set the quality of the recorded audio.
·click Preferences to set a recording time limit or three second delay before
recording begins to ensure you are ready to record. You can also set auto
fades.
·select Mute all tracks when recording if you want CyberLink PowerDirector to
mute all the other audio while you are recording the voice over.
·select fade-in the voice over, or to add a fade-out effect.
To record a voice over, do this:
1. Set the recording volume level using the available slider.
2. Click to begin recording. Record your voice over as you
watch the video in the preview window.
3. Click to stop recording. The captured voice clip is placed on
the voice track.
318
CyberLink PowerDirector Help
Adding Chapters
Chapter 17:
Click the button to open the Chapter Room*. Chapters are used to ease
navigation of your finalized production if you decide to burn it to a disc. Chapters
allow viewers to watch only the content they want or easily find their place if the
disc was stopped before completion.
Note: for best results, adding chapters should be the last editing step
before burning your video production to disc. * Optional feature in
CyberLink PowerDirector. Check the version table on our web site for
detailed versioning information.
Adding Chapter Markers
To auto add chapter markers in the Chapter Room do one of the following:
·select Insert chapter at the start of each clip on the first video track to add a
chapter marker before each clip on the top track in the timeline.
·select Insert chapters at fixed intervals, and then enter the interval (in minutes)
in the field provided.
·select Insert chapters evenly and then enter the number of chapters in the
field provided, to set a specified number of chapters evenly in your project.
Click the Start button to auto add the chapter markers as specified.
To set chapter markers manually, navigate to a point in your video production and
then click . To remove a chapter marker, select it and then click . Click
to remove all of the chapter markers in your production.
Setting Chapter Thumbnails
You can set the thumbnail image for each of your chapters, which display in the
disc menu on a finalized disc. Just drag the timeline slider to the frame in your
video production you want to use as the chapter thumbnail, and then click the
button.
319
Adding Subtitles
Adding Subtitles
Chapter 18:
CyberLink PowerDirector lets you add subtitles to your video production, either for
a disc or imprinted on a video file. You can also import subtitles from a file, extract
them from an MKV file, or add them manually in the Subtitle Room.
To add subtitles to your video production, click on in the Subtitle Room and
then to select one of the following types of subtitles:
·Create subtitles for discs/files*: select this option to create subtitles that are
compatible with most DVD/BDMV/AVCHD/MKV playback software and can be
switched on/off like those found on commercial discs.
Note: when you select Create subtitles for discs/files, there is a Subtitles
option by default in your created disc menu in the Create Disc window. Text
formatting for disc subtitles is more limited. * Optional feature in CyberLink
PowerDirector. Check the version table on our web site for detailed
versioning information.
·Create subtitles imprinted on a video file: select this option to blend subtitles
into the video.
Note: if you are creating subtitles for an MKV file, make sure you select the
Create subtitles for disc/files option, not the option where the subtitles
are imprinted on the video file.
Adding Subtitle Markers
Subtitle markers are the placeholders for the subtitle text added to your production.
They are added to display at the exact time the dialogue is spoken in the video
production, and display until it has completed. Unless you are importing subtitles
from an SRT file or extracting them from an MKV file, you must add all the subtitle
markers manually to your video production.
To manually add subtitle markers to your video production, you can:
·click the play button on the player controls and then click the button
at the beginning of every piece of dialogue spoken to create all the subtitle
markers required for your production. Continue this process until the video is
320
CyberLink PowerDirector Help
complete, and then click the stop button to load the subtitle markers into the
Subtitle Room.
·use the player controls to find the position in the video where you want to
add the subtitle, and then click the button to add a single subtitle
marker.
Once you have added the subtitle markers, the next step is to edit the subtitle text
and duration. See Editing Subtitles for more information.
Importing Subtitles from a File
Click the button in the Subtitle Room to import subtitles from a file* in the
SRT or TXT formats. This allows you to compose subtitles outside the program or
retrieve them from another source, and then import them into CyberLink
PowerDirector.
Note: when an SRT file is imported, the subtitle markers are created
automatically in the Subtitle Room. However for TXT files you must first add
all of the subtitle markers before you can import the file. See Adding
Subtitle Markers fore more information.
If importing from a TXT file, you should ensure the subtitle markers in the Subtitle
Room match the number of lines of subtitle text in the file. When composing the
subtitles in a TXT file, each subtitle should be placed on a new line in the file.
CyberLink PowerDirector detects each line, and then imports the corresponding
text into the subtitles markers in the Subtitle Room.
Note: * optional feature in CyberLink PowerDirector. Check the version
table on our web site for detailed versioning information.
Extracting Subtitles from an
MKV File
CyberLink PowerDirector lets you extract the subtitles from an MKV file, importing
them directly into the Subtitles Room. This allows you to manually edit the
subtitles, and then re-produce the file with the updated subtitle text.
To extract subtitles from an MKV file, do this:
321
Adding Subtitles
1. Import the MKV file into the media library, and then place the video file on the
timeline.
2. Right-click on the file, select Extract Subtitles, and then the language of the
subtitles you want to extract.
3. CyberLink PowerDirector will extract the subtitles into the Subtitle Room.
Once you have extracted the subtitles from the file, you can then edit the subtitle
text. See Editing Subtitles for more information.
Editing Subtitles
Once the subtitle markers are added in the Subtitle Room, you can perform a
variety of edits on them, including editing subtitle text, changing the subtitle text
font, positioning them on the screen, and more.
To edit the subtitles in your video production, do this:
·double-click on each subtitle marker in the timeline (or in the Subtitle Text
column), and then enter the text as required.
·click the button to set the position of the subtitles on the screen. Use
the X position slider to set its position on the horizontal, use the Y position
slider to set its vertical position.
·click the button to format the subtitle text as required. If you are
creating a 3D video production, use the 3D Depth* slider to set the amount of
depth you want the subtitles to have in 3D. Dragging the slider left will make
the 3D subtitles seem nearer to the audience (in the foreground), while
dragging it right will make them appear farther away (in the background).
Note: when using this feature, select the button to enable 3D mode for
best editing results. See Previewing in 3D Mode for more information on
using this mode. * Optional feature in CyberLink PowerDirector. Check the
version table on our web site for detailed versioning information.
·to remove a subtitle marker, select it and then click the button.
Note: once you are done editing the subtitles, you can click the
button to export and save them as an SRT file.
322
CyberLink PowerDirector Help
Syncing Subtitles
To ensure the subtitles in your video production sync with the video dialogue, you
can manually adjust the start and end time for each subtitle marker, or the duration
they display on screen.
To set a start time for a subtitle marker, do either of the following:
·double click on the Start Time column for the subtitle marker, and then enter
a time code.
·position your cursor at the beginning of the subtitle marker on the subtitle
track, and then drag it to the new position.
To set an end time for a subtitle, do either of the following:
·double click on the E nd T im e column for the subtitle marker, and then enter a
time code.
·position your cursor at the end of the subtitle marker on the subtitle track,
and then drag it to the new position.
You can also easily set the duration of each subtitle marker by selecting it on the
subtitle track and then clicking the Duration button above the timeline. In the
Duration Settings window, enter in the how long you want it to display, and then
click on OK.
323
Producing Your Project
Producing Your Project
Chapter 19:
When you are done editing your project, it's time to produce it. Producing simply
means compiling (or rendering) the separate elements your project contains into a
playable file. As your production may be destined for many different uses,
CyberLink PowerDirector has several options suited for all your requirements. You
can even produce just your project's audio into a music file, creating your own
production soundtrack in one easy step.
Utilizing Intelligent SVRT
Intelligent SVRT* (Smart Video Rendering Technology) is a proprietary rendering
technology from CyberLink that assists in the output of your video productions by
suggesting which video profile you should use.
Note: * optional feature in CyberLink PowerDirector. Check the version table
on our web site for detailed versioning information.
Based on the format of original video clips in your project, what portions of the
clips were modified (and therefore require rendering during production), and which
portions of them were not changed (and thus can be skipped over during the
rendering process), Intelligent SVRT suggests the video profile that will result in the
best output quality possible, and save you the most time during production.
To utilize Intelligent SVRT, do one of the following:
·when editing your video production in the Edit window, right-click on the
timeline and select Show SVRT Track.
·in the Produce window, click the Intelligent SVRT button on the Standard 2D
or 3D tab.
In the Intelligent SVRT dialog that displays, CyberLink PowerDirector auto selects
the video profile it suggests you use to output your video production, and some
other video profiles you can utilize.
Note: view the SVRT information in the Edit window for more detailed
information, including which video clips need rendering. If you viewing the
SVRT information in the Produce window, click the Details (Edit) button to
quickly switch to the Edit window.
324
CyberLink PowerDirector Help
To select a video profile, just select it in the Intelligent SVRT dialog and then click
Apply when you are in the Produce window. The selected video profile is auto
highlighted and selected as you proceed to produce. The video profile you used is
also saved in the dialog, and will always be available when utilizing Intelligent SVRT.
Produce Window
Click the Produce button to compile your video production into a file that is ready
for a variety of uses, including sharing with others, uploading to the Internet, or for
burning to disc at a later date.
A - Output in a Standard 2D Format, B - Output in a 3D Format, C - Output to a Device, D - Production
Profiles (Video/Audio File Formats), E - Upload to Online Web Site, F - Production Preview, G -
Production Details, H - Profile Settings, I - Production Preferences
Note: before producing a movie production, make sure that all of your video
clips have the same interlacing format. This is an extremely important step
to take before production, as it can drastically affect final video quality. If
you produce your movie and find the video quality unsatisfactory, verify if the
interlacing format of all of your video clips is the same. If your clips have
different interlacing formats, set them all to the same format, then produce
your movie again. For more information, see Setting TV (Video Clip
Interlacing) Format.
325
Producing Your Project
In the produce window, select the production option that matches the task you
want to perform. You can select one of the following production options:
Tab
Description
Standard 2D
Click on the Standard 2D tab if you want to output
your production to a 2D video file that you can
watch on a computer or burn to a disc at a later
date. You can also output just the audio into a
audio file for playback on a variety of devices. See
Outputting to a Standard 2D File for more
information.
360 Video
When editing a 360 video project, select this tab to
output it as a 360 virtual reality video file. See
Producing a 360 Video for more information.
3D
Click on the 3D tab if you want to output your
production in a 3D video file format. See
Outputting in a 3D Format for more information.
Device
Click on the Device tab if you want to produce
your video and then output it to a camcorder or
portable device. See Outputting to a Device for
more information.
Online
Click on the Online tab if you want to upload your
video to YouTube, Facebook, Dailymotion, or
Vimeo. See Uploading Video to Social Web Sites for
more information.
Note: you can also produce multiple created video production projects at
one time in the Edit window using the Ba tch Produce feature. See Batch
Produce for more information.
Outputting to a Standard 2D File
You can output your video production as a standard 2D video file, which you can
watch on a computer, burn to disc, or output to a portable device. You can also
output just the audio into a audio file format for playback.
Note: if you're not sure which video file format you should output your
production in, click the Intelligent SVRT button for assistance. See Utilizing
Intelligent SVRT for more information on using this feature.
326
CyberLink PowerDirector Help
You can output your project to one of the following formats:
Note: if you're editing a vertical video 9:16* project, only the H.264 AVC* and
audio output options are available.
·AVI
·MPEG-2*
·Windows Media
·H.264 AVC*
·H.265 HEVC*
·XAVC S™*
·Audio file
To output your video production in standard 2D, do this:
Note: if there is any 3D media in your video production, you must ensure the
file's 3D source format is set prior to production to ensure the media displays
properly in 2D. CyberLink PowerDirector will incorporate the specified eye
frames into your 2D video. See Setting 3D Source Format for more
information.
1. Select a video file format by clicking it (or the audio file option if you just want
to output your production's audio).
Note: if you select the H.265 HEVC or H.264 AVC output format, you must
also select the container from the drop-down. You can choose from the
.M2TS, .MKV, or .MP4 container file format. If you want to output to an audio
file, select the audio file format in the drop-down that displays. You can
output in the WMA, WAV, or M4A file format.
2. Select the Profile name/Quality you want to use to create the file. This
selection determines the video resolution, file size, and overall quality of the
outputted file. See Customizing Profiles for more information.
Note: in some versions of CyberLink PowerDirector, the H.265 HEVC, H.264
AVC, and WMV video file formats support up to 4K* resolution (Ultra HD).
Before production, be sure to select the desired video resolution in the
Profi le name/Qual ity drop-down. * optional feature in CyberLink
PowerDirector. Check the version table on our web site for detailed
versioning information.
327
Producing Your Project
3. Configure the production options as required. See Configuring Production
Options for more information.
4. Check the production details and that the file will be outputted to the folder
on your computer where you want it. Click to set another output
folder.
5. Click the Start button to begin producing your file.
Customizing Profiles
After you select a file format for your outputted file, depending on the format you
selected, there may be quality settings you can customize in the profiles section.
These quality settings are called profiles, and can consist of a video file's resolution,
bitrate compression, audio compression type, and more.
Before you output your production, you may want to create a new quality profile,
edit an existing one, or select a different profile and other options from one of the
available drop-downs in the production options section.
Configuring Production Options
Before you begin producing your file, you can select from the following production
options:
Note: the options that are available depend on the file format you selected
and the version of CyberLink PowerDirector that is installed on your
computer.
·Fast video rendering technology: SVRT and Hardware video encoder are
options that can reduce production time. The Hardware video encoder
option is only enabled if your computer supports hardware acceleration
(NVIDIA graphics card that supports CUDA, an AMD graphics card that
supports AMD Accelerated Parallel Processing, or a computer with Intel Core
Processor Family technology), and you are outputting in a file format that
supports it (H.264 and MPEG-4).
·Dolby Digital 5.1: select this preference if you want to include Dolby Digital
5.1 audio in your produced video file.
328
CyberLink PowerDirector Help
·x.v.Color: x.v.Color is a color system that can display a wider color range than
usual. CyberLink PowerDirector can generate an x.v.Color-compliant stream,
which is backward compatible with RGB displays, while offering the
opportunity to achieve better visual quality if your playback environment is
x.v.Color ready.
·Upload a copy to CyberLink Cloud*: if you have a CyberLink Cloud
subscription, select this option if you also want the program to upload the
produced file to your CyberLink Cloud storage space after production.
Note: if you selected to upload a copy of the produced file to CyberLink
Cloud, PowerDirector will ask you if you want to convert it before uploading.
Click Yes to convert it to an .MP4 file that is playable on a portable device,
or No if you want to upload the original produced file.
·Enable preview during production: select this option to preview your movie
during production. Selecting this option will increase the time required to
produce your file.
Note: * optional feature in CyberLink PowerDirector. Check the version
table on our web site for detailed versioning information.
Producing a 360° Video
You can output your 360°* video file in the H.264 AVC (.MP4) format.
Note: * optional feature in CyberLink PowerDirector. Check the version
table on our web site for detailed versioning information.
To output your video production, do this:
1. Select a video file format by clicking it H.264 AVC (.MP4).
2. Select the Profile name/Quality you want to use to create the file. This
selection determines the video resolution, file size, and overall quality of the
outputted file.
Note: H.264 AVC video file format supports up to 4K resolution (Ultra HD).
Before production, be sure to select the desired video resolution in the
Profi le name/Qual ity drop-down.
3. Check the production details and that the file will be outputted to the folder
on your computer where you want it. Click to set another output
folder.
329
Producing Your Project
4. If required, select Enable preview during production to preview your video
during production. Selecting this option will increase the time required to
produce your file.
Note: a 360° video preview is not available during production.
5. Click the Start button to begin producing your file.
Playing Your 360° Video
Once the production is complete, the 360° video file is automatically imported into
your media library. To play it back, just select it in the media library and then use
the playback and 360 controls. See Playing 360° Media Files for more information.
360° video files can also be played on compatible VR (virtual reality) devices, or you
can upload and then play it on YouTube and Facebook. See Uploading a 360° Video
for more information.
Outputting in a 3D Format
You can output your production in a 3D* video file format. To output your project
to a file, select the 3D tab and then select the desired file format.
Note: if you're not sure which video file format you should output your
production in, click the Intelligent SVRT button for assistance. See
Utilizing Intelligent SVRT for more information on using this feature. *
Optional feature in CyberLink PowerDirector. Check the version table on
our web site for detailed versioning information.
You can output your production to one of the following file formats:
·Windows Media
·MPEG-2*
·H.264 AVC*
To output your video production in 3D, do this:
Note: if there is any 2D media in your video production, you must convert it
to 3D before production. See Power Tools: 2D to 3D for more information.
1. Select a 3D video file format by clicking it.
330
CyberLink PowerDirector Help
Note: if you select the H.264 AVC output format, you must also select the
container from the drop-down. You can choose from the .M2TS, .MKV, or
.MP4 container file format.
2. Select the 3D output format from the drop-down. See 3D Output Formats for
more information.
3. Select the Profile name/Quality you want to use to create the file. This
selection determines the video resolution, file size, and overall quality of the
outputted file. See Customizing Profiles for more information.
Note: in some versions of CyberLink PowerDirector, the H.264 AVC/WMV
video file formats support up to 4K* resolution (Ultra HD). Before production,
be sure to select the desired video resolution in the Profile name/
Quality drop-down. * optional feature in CyberLink PowerDirector. Check
the version table on our web site for detailed versioning information.
4. Configure the production options as required. See Configuring Production
Options for more information.
5. Check the production details and that the file will be outputted to the folder
on your computer where you want it. Click to set another output
folder.
6. Click the Start button to begin producing your file.
3D Output Formats
Once you select a video file format (or container), you need to select the 3D output
source format. This selection specifies how the 3D content is displayed. You can
select one of the following 3D output source formats:
·Side-by-Side Half Width (L/R): a side-by-side 3D source format optimized for
4:3 or non-HD video productions.
·Side-by-Side Full Width (L/R): a side-by-side 3D source format optimized for
HD video productions.*
Note: * 3D MPEG-2 videos cannot be outputted with this source format. The
side-by-side full width format is only available when the Ultra version of
CyberLink PowerDirector is installed on a 64-bit operating system.
·H.264 Multi-View Coding: a Multi-View Coding (MVC) source format.
·Anaglyph: a red/cyan source format. Select this format if you do not have a
3D display device, to watch a 3D video production with anaglyphic 3D glasses.
331
Producing Your Project
Customizing Profiles
After you select a file format for your outputted file, depending on the format you
selected, there may be quality settings you can customize in the profiles section.
These quality settings are called profiles, and can consist of a video file's resolution,
bitrate compression, audio compression type, and more.
Before you output your production, you may want to create a new quality profile,
edit an existing one, or select a different profile and other options from one of the
available drop-downs in the production options section.
Configuring Production Options
Before you begin producing your file, you can select from the following production
options:
Note: the options that are available depend on the file format you selected
and the version of CyberLink PowerDirector that is installed on your
computer.
·Fast video rendering technology: SVRT and Hardware video encoder are
options that can reduce production time. The Hardware video encoder
option is only enabled if your computer supports hardware acceleration
(NVIDIA graphics card that supports CUDA, an AMD graphics card that
supports AMD Accelerated Parallel Processing, or a computer with Intel Core
Processor Family technology), and you are outputting in a file format that
supports it (H.264 and MPEG-4).
·Dolby Digital 5.1: select this preference if you want to include Dolby Digital
5.1 audio in your produced video file.
·x.v.Color: x.v.Color is a color system that can display a wider color range than
usual. CyberLink PowerDirector can generate an x.v.Color-compliant stream,
which is backward compatible with RGB displays, while offering the
opportunity to achieve better visual quality if your playback environment is
x.v.Color ready.
·Upload a copy to CyberLink Cloud*: if you have a CyberLink Cloud
subscription, select this option if you also want the program to upload the
produced file to your CyberLink Cloud* storage space after production.
332
CyberLink PowerDirector Help
Note: if you selected to upload a copy of the produced file to CyberLink
Cloud, PowerDirector will ask you if you want to convert it before uploading.
Click Yes to convert it to an .MP4 file that is playable on a portable device,
or No if you want to upload the original produced file.
·Enable preview during production: select this option to preview your movie
during production. Selecting this option will increase the time required to
produce your file.
Note: * optional feature in CyberLink PowerDirector. Check the version
table on our web site for detailed versioning information.
Outputting to a Device
Select the Device tab if you want to output your video production back to a DV or
an HDV* tape.
Note: you must manually locate the position on your HDV camcorder tape
where you want to write back your content to before proceeding.
You can also output your production to a file that you can then copy back to an
HDD (hard disk drive) camcorder*. Or output it in a file format that is compatible
with a number of portable devices, including for an iPod/iPhone/iPad, PS3*/PSP/
Walkman, Xbox/Zune, and a wide variety of mobile phones*.
To output your video production to a device, do this:
Note: if there is any 2D media in your video production, you must convert it
to 3D before production. See PowerTools: 2D to 3D for more information.
1. Select a device type by clicking it. If you are writing back to a DV or HDV
camcorder, ensure it is connected and turned on.
2. Select the Profile Type or Profile name/Quality you want to use to create the
file. This selection determines the video resolution, file size, and overall quality
of the outputted file. See Customizing Profiles for more information.
3. Configure the production options as required. See Configuring Production
Options for more information.
4. Check the production details and that the file will be outputted to the folder
on your computer where you want it. Click to set another output
folder.
333
Producing Your Project
5. Click the Start button to begin producing your file.
Customizing Profiles
After you select the format of your produced project file, depending on your
selection, there may be video quality settings you can customize in the video
profiles section.
These video quality settings are called profiles, and can consist of your video's
resolution, bitrate compression, audio compression type, and more.
Before you output your production, you may want to create a new quality profile,
edit an existing one, or select a different profile and other options from one of the
available drop-downs in the production options section.
Configuring Production Options
Before you begin producing, you can select from the following production options:
Note: the preferences that are available depend on the file format you
selected and the version of CyberLink PowerDirector that is installed on
your computer.
·Fast video rendering technology: SVRT and Hardware video encoder are
options that can reduce production time (available for creating an HDD
camcorder file only). The H ardware video encoder option is only enabled if
your computer supports hardware acceleration (NVIDIA graphics card that
supports CUDA technology, an AMD graphics card that supports AMD
Accelerated Parallel Processing, or a computer with Intel Core Processor
Family technology), and you are outputting in a file format that supports it
(H.264 and MPEG-4).
·Dolby Digital 5.1: select this preference if you want to include Dolby Digital
5.1 audio in your produced video file (available for creating an HDD
camcorder file only).
·x.v.Color: x.v.Color is a new color system that can display a wider color range
than usual (available for creating an HDD camcorder file only). CyberLink
PowerDirector can generate an x.v.Color-compliant stream, which is backward
compatible with RGB displays, while offering the opportunity to achieve
better visual quality if your playback environment is x.v.Color ready.
334
CyberLink PowerDirector Help
·Upload a copy to CyberLink Cloud*: if you have a CyberLink Cloud
subscription, select this option if you also want the program to upload the
produced file to your CyberLink Cloud* storage space after production.
Note: if you selected to upload a copy of the produced file to CyberLink
Cloud, PowerDirector will ask you if you want to convert it before uploading.
Click Yes to convert it to an .MP4 file that is playable on a portable device,
or No if you want to upload the original produced file.
·Delete the file after the write back is complete: select this option to have
CyberLink PowerDirector delete the produced video file after it has written it
back to your DV or HDV camcorder.
·Enable preview during production: select this option to preview your movie
during production. Selecting this option will increase the time required to
produce your file.
Note: * optional feature in CyberLink PowerDirector. Check the version
table on our web site for detailed versioning information.
Uploading Video to Online Media Sites
Click on the Online tab to upload your video production to one of the following
online media web sites:
·Facebook
·YouTube
·Dailymotion
·Vimeo
·Niconico Douga
·Youku
Note: in some versions of CyberLink PowerDirector, you can produce and
upload up to 4K* resolution (Ultra HD) video to social web sites. Before
production, be sure to select the desired video resolution in the Profile
name/Quality drop-down.
Uploading Video to Facebook
To upload your video to Facebook®, do this:
335
Producing Your Project
1. Click the Facebook button.
2. Select the desired quality of your video from the Profile type drop-down list.
3. Enter a Title and Description for your video in the fields provided. The text
you enter is included on Facebook once uploaded.
4. Configure the production options as required. See Configuring Production
Options for more information.
5. Click Start to begin.
6. Click Authorize and then grant CyberLink PowerDirector permission to upload
videos to your Facebook account by following the steps in the Facebook
Authorization windows.
7. CyberLink PowerDirector proceeds to produce and upload the video file. Click
Close when done to return to the program.
Configuring Production Options
Before you begin producing, you can select from the following production options:
·Hardware video encoder: this option is only enabled if your computer
supports hardware acceleration (NVIDIA graphics card that supports CUDA, an
AMD graphics card that supports AMD Accelerated Parallel Processing, or a
computer with Intel Core Processor Family technology), and you are
outputting in a file format that supports it.
·Enable preview during production: select this option to preview your movie
during production. Selecting this option will increase the time required to
produce your file.
·Specify the Output folder, or the location where the produced video file that
will be uploaded is saved. Click if you want to select another output
folder or change the name of the produced file.
Uploading Video to YouTube
To upload your video to YouTube, do this:
336
CyberLink PowerDirector Help
Note: if the size/length of the your video exceeds the maximum allowed,
CyberLink PowerDirector will separate the video into smaller/shorter videos,
upload these videos, and then create a playlist for you on YouTube.
1. Click the YouTube Videos button.
2. Select the desired quality of your video from the Profile type drop-down. The
quality you select will result in the corresponding quality option being
available after the video is fully processed on YouTube.
Note: the quality option available on YouTube is also dependent on the
original captured video quality and the bandwidth of the user who is
watching the video.
3. Enter a Title and Description for your video in the fields provided. The text
you enter is included on YouTube once uploaded. Also select one of the
Video c ategories and enter in some keyword Tags that users can search for to
find your video.
4. Set whether you want the video to be Public or Private once it is uploaded to
YouTube.
Note: sign in to DirectorZone and then select Share in CyberLink
DirectorZone Video Gallery if you want to show others how you adjusted
the clips in your video production. When selected, an animated version of
your project's storyboard displays, along with your uploaded video, on
DirectorZone.
5. Configure the production options as required. See Configuring Production
Options for more information.
6. Click Start to begin.
7. Click Authorize and then grant CyberLink PowerDirector permission to upload
videos to your YouTube account by following the steps in the YouTube
Authorization windows.
8. CyberLink PowerDirector proceeds to produce and upload the video file. Click
Close when done to return to the program.
Uploading to YouTube 3D
If the video production you are uploading is a 3D production, select the Share as a
3D video* option to upload it to YouTube in a 3D video source format. Once
uploaded, you will be able to watch it on YouTube in 3D.
337
Producing Your Project
Note: * optional feature in CyberLink PowerDirector. Check the version
table on our web site for detailed versioning information.
Configuring Production Options
Before you begin producing, you can select the following production preference:
·Hardware video encoding: this option is only enabled if your computer
supports hardware acceleration (NVIDIA graphics card that supports CUDA, an
AMD graphics card that supports AMD Accelerated Parallel Processing, or a
computer with Intel Core Processor Family technology), and you are
outputting in a file format that supports it.
·Enable preview during production: select this option to preview your movie
during production. Selecting this option will increase the time required to
produce your file.
·Specify the Output folder, or the location where the produced video file that
will be uploaded is saved. Click if you want to select another output
folder or change the name of the produced file.
Uploading Video to Dailymotion
To upload your video to Dailymotion, do this:
Note: if the size/length of the your video exceeds the maximum allowed,
CyberLink PowerDirector will separate the video into smaller/shorter videos,
upload these videos, and then create a playlist for you on Dailymotion.
1. Click the Dailymotion button.
2. Select the desired quality of your video from the Profile type drop-down. The
quality you select will result in the corresponding quality option being
available after the video is fully processed on Dailymotion.
Note: the quality option available on Dailymotion is also dependent on the
original captured video quality and the bandwidth of the user who is
watching the video.
3. Enter a Title and Description for your video in the fields provided. The text
you enter is included on Dailymotion once uploaded. Also select one of the
338
CyberLink PowerDirector Help
Video c ategories and enter in some keyword Tags that users can search for to
find your video.
4. Set whether you want the video to be Public or Private once it is uploaded to
Dailymotion.
Note: sign in to DirectorZone and then select Share in CyberLink
DirectorZone Video Gallery if you want to show others how you adjusted
the clips in your video production. When selected, an animated version of
your project's storyboard displays, along with your uploaded video, on
DirectorZone.
5. Configure the production options as required. See Configuring Production
Options for more information.
6. Click Start to begin.
7. Click Authorize and then grant CyberLink PowerDirector permission to upload
videos to your Dailymotion account by following the steps in the Dailymotion
Authorization windows.
8. CyberLink PowerDirector proceeds to produce and upload the video file. Click
Close when done to return to the program.
Configuring Production Options
Before you begin producing, you can select the following production options:
·Hardware video encoder: this option is only enabled if your computer
supports hardware acceleration (NVIDIA graphics card that supports CUDA, an
AMD graphics card that supports AMD Accelerated Parallel Processing, or a
computer with Intel Core Processor Family technology), and you are
outputting in a file format that supports it.
·Enable preview during production: select this option to preview your movie
during production. Selecting this option will increase the time required to
produce your file.
·Specify the Output folder, or the location where the produced video file that
will be uploaded is saved. Click if you want to select another output
folder or change the name of the produced file.
Uploading Video to Vimeo
To upload your video to Vimeo, do this:
339
Producing Your Project
Note: if the size/length of the your video exceeds the maximum allowed,
CyberLink PowerDirector will separate the video into smaller/shorter videos,
upload these videos, and then create a playlist for you on Vimeo.
1. Click the Vimeo button.
2. Select the desired quality of your video from the Profile type drop-down. The
quality you select will result in the corresponding quality option being
available after the video is fully processed on Vimeo.
Note: the quality option available on Vimeo is also dependent on the
original captured video quality and the bandwidth of the user who is
watching the video.
3. Enter a Title and Description for your video in the fields provided. The text
you enter is included on Vimeo once uploaded. Also enter in some keyword
Tags that users can search for to find your video.
4. Set whether you want the video to be Public or Private once it is uploaded to
Vimeo.
Note: sign in to DirectorZone and then select Share in CyberLink
DirectorZone Video Gallery if you want to show others how you adjusted
the clips in your video production. When selected, an animated version of
your project's storyboard displays, along with your uploaded video, on
DirectorZone.
5. Configure the production options as required. See Configuring Production
Options for more information.
6. Click Start to begin.
7. Click Authorize and then grant CyberLink PowerDirector permission to upload
videos to your Vimeo account by following the steps in the Vimeo
Authorization windows.
8. CyberLink PowerDirector proceeds to produce and upload the video file. Click
Close when done to return to the program.
340
CyberLink PowerDirector Help
Configuring Production Options
Before you begin producing, you can select the following production options:
·Hardware video encoder: this option is only enabled if your computer
supports hardware acceleration (NVIDIA graphics card that supports CUDA, an
AMD graphics card that supports AMD Accelerated Parallel Processing, or a
computer with Intel Core Processor Family technology), and you are
outputting in a file format that supports it.
·Enable preview during production: select this option to preview your movie
during production. Selecting this option will increase the time required to
produce your file.
·Specify the Output folder, or the location where the produced video file that
will be uploaded is saved. Click if you want to select another output
folder or change the name of the produced file.
Uploading Video to Niconico Douga
To upload your video to Niconico Douga, do this:
Note: if the size/length of the your video exceeds the maximum allowed,
CyberLink PowerDirector will separate the video into smaller/shorter videos,
upload these videos, and then create a playlist for you on Niconico Douga.
1. Click the Niconico Douga button.
2. Enter your Niconico Douga Username and Password. If you don't have an
account, click the Sign Up to Niconico link to get one.
3. Select the desired quality of your video from the Profile type drop-down. The
quality you select will result in the corresponding quality option being
available after the video is fully processed on Niconico Douga.
Note: the quality option available on Niconico Douga is also dependent on
the original captured video quality and the bandwidth of the user who is
watching the video.
4. Enter a Title and Description for your video in the fields provided. The text
you enter is included on Niconico Douga once uploaded. Also enter in some
keyword Tags that users can search for to find your video.
341
Producing Your Project
5. Set whether you want the video to be Public or Private once it is uploaded to
Niconico Douga.
Note: sign in to DirectorZone and then select Share in CyberLink
DirectorZone Video Gallery if you want to show others how you adjusted
the clips in your video production. When selected, an animated version of
your project's storyboard displays, along with your uploaded video, on
DirectorZone.
6. Configure the production options as required. See Configuring Production
Options for more information.
7. Use the player controls in the preview window to find the frame of video in
your production you want to use as the video's thumbnail on the Niconico
Douga web site, and then click the Set Thumbnail button.
8. Click Start to begin.
9. Click Authorize and then grant CyberLink PowerDirector permission to upload
videos to your Niconico Douga account by following the steps in the Niconico
Douga Authorization windows.
10. CyberLink PowerDirector proceeds to produce and upload the video file. Click
Close when done to return to the program.
Configuring Production Options
Before you begin producing, you can select the following production options:
·Hardware video encoder: this option is only enabled if your computer
supports hardware acceleration (NVIDIA graphics card that supports CUDA, an
AMD graphics card that supports AMD Accelerated Parallel Processing, or a
computer with Intel Core Processor Family technology), and you are
outputting in a file format that supports it.
·Enable preview during production: select this option to preview your movie
during production. Selecting this option will increase the time required to
produce your file.
·Specify the Output folder, or the location where the produced video file that
will be uploaded is saved. Click if you want to select another output
folder or change the name of the produced file.
342
CyberLink PowerDirector Help
Uploading Video to Youku
To upload your video to Youku, do this:
Note: if the size/length of the your video exceeds the maximum allowed,
CyberLink PowerDirector will separate the video into smaller/shorter videos,
upload these videos, and then create a playlist for you on Youku.
1. Click the Youku button.
2. Select the desired quality of your video from the Profile type drop-down. The
quality you select will result in the corresponding quality option being
available after the video is fully processed on Youku.
Note: the quality option available on Youku is also dependent on the
original captured video quality and the bandwidth of the user who is
watching the video.
3. Enter a Title and Description for your video in the fields provided. The text
you enter is included on Youku once uploaded. Also select one of the Video
categories and enter in some keyword Tags that users can search for to find
your video.
4. Set whether you want the video to be Public or Private once it is uploaded to
Dailymotion.
Note: sign in to DirectorZone and then select Share in CyberLink
DirectorZone Video Gallery if you want to show others how you adjusted
the clips in your video production. When selected, an animated version of
your project's storyboard displays, along with your uploaded video, on
DirectorZone.
5. Configure the production options as required. See Configuring Production
Options for more information.
6. Click Start to begin.
7. Click Authorize and then grant CyberLink PowerDirector permission to upload
videos to your Youku account by following the steps in the Youku
Authorization windows.
8. CyberLink PowerDirector proceeds to produce and upload the video file. Click
Close when done to return to the program.
343
Producing Your Project
Configuring Production Options
Before you begin producing, you can select the following production options:
·Hardware video encoder: this option is only enabled if your computer
supports hardware acceleration (NVIDIA graphics card that supports CUDA, an
AMD graphics card that supports AMD Accelerated Parallel Processing, or a
computer with Intel Core Processor Family technology), and you are
outputting in a file format that supports it.
·Enable preview during production: select this option to preview your movie
during production. Selecting this option will increase the time required to
produce your file.
·Specify the Output folder, or the location where the produced video file that
will be uploaded is saved. Click if you want to select another output
folder or change the name of the produced file.
Uploading a 360° Video
On the Online tab you can upload your 360°* video to either Facebook or YouTube.
Once uploaded, you can click and drag on the Facebook/YouTube player window,
or use any available 360 controls, to rotate and view the entire 360° video.
Note: in some versions of PowerDirector, you can produce and upload up to
4K resolution (Ultra HD) video to social web sites. Before production, be
sure to select the desired video resolution in the Profile name/Quality
drop-down. * optional feature in CyberLink PowerDirector. Check the
version table on our web site for detailed versioning information.
Uploading 360° Video to Facebook
To upload your 360° video to Facebook®, do this:
1. Click the Facebook button.
2. Select the desired quality of your video from the Profile type drop-down list.
3. Enter a Title and Description for your video in the fields provided. The text
you enter is included on Facebook once uploaded.
344
CyberLink PowerDirector Help
4. If required, select Enable preview during production to preview your video
during production. Selecting this option will increase the time required to
produce the file before upload.
5. Click Start to begin.
6. Click Authorize and then grant PowerDirector permission to upload videos to
your Facebook account by following the steps in the Facebook Authorization
windows.
7. PowerDirector proceeds to produce and upload the video file. Click Close
when done to return to the program.
Uploading 360° Video to YouTube
To upload your 360° video to YouTube, do this:
Note: if the size/length of the your video exceeds the maximum allowed,
PowerDirector will separate the video into smaller/shorter videos, upload
these videos, and then create a playlist for you on YouTube.
1. Click the YouTube Videos button.
2. Select the desired quality of your video from the Profile type drop-down. The
quality you select will result in the corresponding quality option being
available after the video is fully processed on YouTube.
Note: the quality option available on YouTube is also dependent on the
original captured video quality and the bandwidth of the user who is
watching the video.
3. Enter a Title and Description for your video in the fields provided. The text
you enter is included on YouTube once uploaded. Also select one of the
Video categories and enter in some keyword Tags that users can search for to
find your video.
4. Set whether you want the video to be Public or Private once it is uploaded to
YouTube.
Note: sign in to DirectorZone and then select Share video on
DirectorZone if you want to show others how you adjusted the clips in your
video production. When selected, your uploaded video also displays on
DirectorZone.
5. If required, select Enable preview during production to preview your video
during production. Selecting this option will increase the time required to
produce the file before upload.
345
Producing Your Project
6. Click Start to begin.
7. Click Authorize and then grant PowerDirector permission to upload videos to
your YouTube account by following the steps in the YouTube Authorization
windows.
8. PowerDirector proceeds to produce and upload the video file. Click Close
when done to return to the program.
Batch Produce
CyberLink PowerDirector lets you produce multiple projects an once using the
Batch Produce feature. In the Batch Produce window, you can import multiple
CyberLink PowerDirector projects in the .pds format and output them as video files
in a variety of formats all in one sitting.
To perform a batch production, do this:
Note: if you are currently working on a video production, you must save and
close it before you can perform a batch production.
1. Select File > Batch Produce from the menu.
2. Click , and then browse to and select the CyberLink PowerDirector
project you want to add to the production queue.
3. If required, click on the file name in the Outputted File Name column to
change the name of the outputted video file.
4. If required, click on to edit the task's production profile settings as
follows:
Note: if required, click on the Intelligent SVRT button for assistance on
selecting an output profile. See Utilizing Intelligent SVRT for more
information.
·Output folder: if required, select another location on your computer where
the file will be outputted to by clicking to set another output folder.
·Production type: select whether you want to output the selected task as a
video file, video file for a device, or a 3D* video file.
·Media file format: select the format of the outputted video file from this drop-
down.
346
CyberLink PowerDirector Help
Note: based on your first two selections, the available drop-downs that
follow will differ. Use them to select 3D* output format, profile, etc.
Click OK to close the Profile Settings window and set your changes.
5. If your computer supports hardware acceleration (NVIDIA graphics card that
supports CUDA, an AMD graphics card that supports AMD Accelerated Parallel
Processing, or a computer with Intel Core Processor Family technology) and
you are outputting in a file format that supports it (H.264 and MPEG-4), select
the Enable GPU hardware video encoder automatically option if
you want CyberLink PowerDirector to use it, when available, during the
batch production.
6. Click Start to begin the production of all the tasks in the list.
Note: select the Shut down computer after production option to have
CyberLink PowerDirector shut down the program and your computer once
all the tasks are produced.
347
Creating Discs
Creating Discs
Chapter 20:
After you finish creating your video production, click on Create Disc to burn your
movie onto a disc, complete with a disc menu. You can also import additional
videos and CyberLink PowerDirector projects, creating multi-layered professional
looking disc in just a few simple steps.
A - Disc Content Tab, B - Menu Preferences Tab, C - 2D Disc Preferences Tab, D - 3D Disc Preferences
Tab, E - Disc Menu Font Properties, F - Disc Menu Preview Window, G - Set Buttons Per Page, H - Burn
to Disc, I - Preview Disc Menu, J - Disc Menu Properties, K - Menu Navigation Controls, L - Disc
Content
Discs created in CyberLink PowerDirector can have one or more titles (video files or
CyberLink PowerDirector projects), which are called Scenes on the final disc. Each
title (or Scene) can have multiple chapters and include subtitles.
To create a disc menu and then burn your video production to disc, do this:
1. Click on the Create Disc button to open the Create Disc window. The video
production you were working on is automatically imported into the window.
348
CyberLink PowerDirector Help
2. On the Content tab, click the and buttons to import
additional titles (video files and/or PowerDirector projects) onto your disc. See
Importing Additional Disc Content for more detailed information.
3. Click on the Menu Preferences tab and then select the menu in the library that
you want to use on your disc. See Selecting a Disc Menu for more detailed
information on selecting disc menus, or for information on customizing your
own.
4. Edit the selected disc menu's properties, including customizing menu text, the
number of buttons, background music, and more. See Editing Disc Menu
Properties for more information.
5. If required, right-click on your selected disc menu's thumbnail in the library
and select Modify to perform advanced editing on it in the Menu Designer.
You can also create new disc menus and 3D* menus in the Menu Designer.
See Customizing Disc Menus in the Menu Designer for more detailed
information.
6. The last step is to burn your production to disc. Do one of the following:
·if your project is a standard 2D video production, click the 2D Disc tab. See
Burning a Disc in 2D for more information.
·if your project is a 3D* video production, click the 3D D isc tab. See Burning a
Disc in 3D for more information.
Note: * optional feature in CyberLink PowerDirector. Check the version
table on our web site for detailed versioning information.
Importing Additional Disc
Content
The Content tab contains your current video production that will be burned to disc.
On this tab you can import additional titles (video files and CyberLink
PowerDirector projects), which, with your current video production, are called
Scenes on the disc menu.
On the Content tab you can add additional titles to your disc by doing the
following:
349
Creating Discs
·click on to import additional video files that you want on your
created disc.
·click on to import any saved CyberLink PowerDirector projects that
you want on your created disc.
Note: as you add content, click on the M enu Structure button to view the
structure of your disc menu. In the structure tree you can see all the titles/
scenes (videos and projects) on your disc and any chapters within each
title.
While importing videos and CyberLink PowerDirector projects on to the Content
tab, use the following buttons to:
·hover your mouse over the title and then click on on its thumbnail to play
back the title.
· - edit the selected title in the Edit window of CyberLink PowerDirector.
· - remove the selected title from the disc menu.
Click on Show Chapters to view the chapters in the selected title (video or project).
You can click the button to set/edit the selected title's chapters in the Chapters
Room. For more information on editing chapters see Adding Chapters.
Note: as you add content to your disc, note the capacity information at the
bottom of the window. Click to toggle the disc capacity display or
to view the Disc Production Summary at any time.
When you are done adding all the content you want on your disc, you can reorder
all the titles simply by dragging them to the position you want.
350
CyberLink PowerDirector Help
The order of the titles on the Content tab is the order they are burned to disc.
Selecting a Disc Menu
Click on the Menu Preferences tab to select the disc menu template in your menu
library that you want to include on your disc. To preview the pages in a disc menu,
just click on its thumbnail in the library.
Note: if you want to create a new disc menu from scratch, click the Create
Menu button at the top of the Menu Preferences tab. See Customizing Disc
Menus in the Menu Designer for more information on customizing it.
Most of the disc menu templates in CyberLink PowerDirector are multi-layered, and
can consist of the following pages:
Note: if you do not want to include a menu on your burned disc, select the
No M enu template in the menu library. When you play the burned disc, it
will automatically start playing the first title/scene.
·a main menu home (Root menu) page. This is the first menu page that
displays when you play the disc. It can contain a menu opening, motion
thumbnails, and more.
351
Creating Discs
Note: you can choose not to include a root menu on your disc. See
Configuring Disc Menu Settings for more information.
·if you have more than one title (video or project), your disc will have a Scenes
page in the Disc Preview Window. Note that when in the Menu Designer, it is
called the Titles page. If you choose to not include a root menu, the scenes
page becomes the page displayed when you play the disc.
·a Chapters page where you can navigate through your titles. This page is
available if you added chapters in the Chapter Room.
·a Subtitles page that lets you enable/disable the subtitles on your disc.
Note: the Subtitles page in a disc menu is only available if you selected
Create subtitles for disc when creating subtitles in the Subtitle Room.
See Adding Subtitles for more information.
To select the disc menu template for your disc, do either of the following:
Note: after you select your menu template be sure to edit its properties. You
can edit the text, menu music, and more right in the disc menu preview
window on the right. See Editing Disc Menu Properties for more information.
You can also customize a disc menu's buttons, background, individual
pages, and much more in the Menu Designer. See Customizing Disc Menus
in the Menu Designer for more information.
·Right-click on the menu template's thumbnail in the menu library that you
want to use and then select:
·Apply to set the menu page to the current menu page you are viewing in
the disc menu preview window. For example, if you navigate to the scenes
page in the disc menu preview window and you select Apply, that menu
template is only used on the scenes page of the menu.
·Apply to All Pages to apply the menu template to all the pages in your
menu, i.e. home/root, titles/scenes, chapters.
·Click on a menu template thumbnail in the menu library that you want to use
and then select:
·Apply to set the menu page to the current menu page you are viewing in
the disc menu preview window. For example, if you navigate to a chapters
page in the disc menu preview window and you select Apply, that menu
template is only used on the chapters page of the menu.
352
CyberLink PowerDirector Help
·Apply to All Pages to apply the menu template to all the pages in your
menu, i.e. home/root, titles/scenes, chapters.
Note: if required, you can download and import additional disc menu
templates from DirectorZone. See Downloading from DirectorZone for more
information.
Editing Disc Menu Properties
CyberLink PowerDirector gives you full creative control over the look of your disc
menu. Use the menu navigation controls in the disc menu preview window to
preview the design and behavior of the selected disc menu.
If you want to view the titles/scenes, chapters, or subtitles page, click in the disc
menu preview window on the right, and then use the button and the other
menu navigation controls to navigate through the disc menu. Or click the Preview
button at the bottom of the window to view what your burned disc will look like
when played on a disc player.
Note: to perform more advanced editing on a selected disc menu template using
the Menu Designer, right-click on the menu template in the menu library and then
select M odify. See Customizing Disc Menus in the Menu Designer for more
information.
Configuring Disc Menu Settings
At the bottom of the Menu Preferences tab you can configure the disc menu
settings as follows:
·Include root menu: select this option if you want a root menu or home page
on your disc. If you deselect this option, the scenes page is displayed by
default when you play the burned disc.
·Include menu opening video: deselect this option if you don't want the disc
menu to include the menu opening video that is available in some disc
menus. This option is different than the first play video, which you can
include whether this item is selected or not.
·Show thumbnail index: select to add numbering to each scene and chapter
thumbnail on your menu pages.
·Enable motion thumbnail: deselect this option if you want to disable the
motion preview in the video title thumbnails in your disc menu.
353
Creating Discs
Editing Disc Menu Text
To edit the menu text that appears on the menu page, including clickable menu
button text, double-click on it in the disc menu preview window, and then enter the
new text. You can modify menu text style, size, and alignment using the disc menu
font properties options located at the top of the disc menu window.
To change the position of any menu text on your menu, just click and drag it to the
new position.
Note: when changing disc menu text position in the preview window, click
to enable the TV safe zone to help with the placement of the selected
clip in the video display area.
Setting Disc Menu Music
Some of the pre-designed disc menu templates contain menu music. In the disc
menu properties area, you can:
·click on to edit or replace the menu's background music. See Setting
Background Music for more information.
·click to remove the current background music from the disc menu.
Setting Background Music
If you are using background music in your disc menu, click the button to
perform the following functions:
Note: the final duration of your disc menu's background music is dependent
on the time entered in the Duration field in the Playback Mode Settings
window, not the length of the music file used. See Setting Disc Playback
Mode for more information on setting your menu's duration.
·click the button to add or replace the current disc menu background
music.
·if required, trim the background music using the player controls and the
mark-in/mark-out indicators.
354
CyberLink PowerDirector Help
·if required, set the menu music to gradually Fade-in or Fade-out.
·if the length of your menu music file is not as long as the specified duration,
select the Auto repeat option to loop it.
When you are done setting the background music options, click Apply to All Pages
to set the music for all the pages in the disc menu, or Apply to set it just for the
current menu page you are viewing in the disc menu preview window.
Adding a First Play Video
Use this option to add a video (or an existing CyberLink PowerDirector project) as a
first play video to your created disc. The first play video plays automatically when
the disc is inserted into a disc player, before the disc menu loads. No navigation
buttons are available during the first play, and viewers cannot fast forward past this
segment.
In a professional production, this is usually a copyright notice or warning. However,
you may prefer to use a personal introduction or other video clip instead.
To set a video clip as the first play video, do this:
·click and select the video that you want.
·click to remove the video set as the first play video.
·click to preview the first play video.
Note: if you are creating a 3D video production and burning it to disc in 3D,
you can use a 3D video clip as the first play video. Once added, click to
set the 3D source format of the clip. See Setting 3D Source Format for more
detailed information.
355
Creating Discs
Setting Disc Playback Mode
Click the button open the Playback Mode Settings window and set how the
disc plays back any scenes/titles that are on your disc.
Note: disc playback mode determines how the titles/scenes (videos and
projects added on the Content tab) play back on your disc, not the
chapters contained within each title/scenes. If your disc only has one title
on it, the settings for disc playback mode have no affect on the burned disc.
In the Playback Mode Settings window you can set the following:
·choose from one of the three available playback modes based on the
available descriptions. Your disc will follow the selected behavior when
inserted or play is pressed on your disc player.
·Auto menu time out: select this option if you want the disc content to play
automatically when you insert the disc into a disc player. When selected, your
content plays automatically after displaying the disc menu for the specified
duration. If you do not select this option, your menu loops endlessly until you
press the play button on your disc player.
·Duration: enter in the duration the content (background video, background
music, etc.) in your disc menu is displayed. The minimum duration allowed is
10 seconds, while your disc can be up to 99 seconds long before it loops back
to the beginning.
Note: the duration you enter is also the length of your menu's background
music, even if the selected music file's length is longer than the duration
specified.
Specifying Buttons Per Page
When creating a disc with multiple titles or chapters, you can select the number of
buttons that display on each of the Titles (Scenes) and Chapters menu pages.
To change the number of buttons that display on a title or chapter page, you must
first navigate to the page via the disc menu preview window. Next select the
number of Buttons per page you want on each title and chapter page from the
drop-down above the disc menu preview window. Each individual title and chapter
page can have a different number of buttons, allowing you to make each page
unique.
356
CyberLink PowerDirector Help
Note: the maximum number of buttons that can display on each menu page
is dependent on the design of the menu template. If you want more buttons
on a page, see Adding Menu Buttons for more information.
Modifying Menu Object Properties
You can modify the properties of a disc menu's objects directly in the preview
window, in both the Create Disc module and the Menu Designer. Menu objects
include text, added images, video thumbnails, menu buttons, navigation buttons,
etc. To modify the properties of a menu object, just select it and then perform any
of the following options:
·Modify Menu Object Position
·Align Menu Objects
Modifying Menu Object Position
You can change the position and orientation of the title text, images, thumbnails,
buttons, etc. in the disc menu.
Note: click on to use the TV safe zone and grid lines to help with the
precise placement of the precise placement of buttons, images, text, etc. on
your menu pages. Select Snap to Reference Lines to have the objects
snap to the grid lines, TV safe zone, and boundary of the menu area.
To modify menu object position or orientation:
·click on a menu object, and then drag it to a new position.
·when in the Menu Designer, click on above the selected object and then
drag it right or left to change its orientation.
·when in the Menu Designer, select images and buttons, and then click and
drag a corner or side to resize them.
Aligning Menu Objects
To align menu objects in the disc menu, select the object and then the desired
alignment from the drop-down. If you just want to align the buttons, click the
button at the top of the Menu Designer window.
357
Creating Discs
Customizing Disc Menus in the
Menu Designer
You can perform more advanced editing on your disc menu in the Menu Designer*.
You can also create a brand new disc menu template from scratch.
To edit an existing disc menu, right-click on the disc menu template in the library
on the Menu Preferences tab and then select on Modify. To create a new disc menu
template, click on the Create Menu button.
A - Change Object Properties Tab, B - Menu Properties, C - Set Button Properties Tab, D - Menu Page
View (Edit page), E - Add Media/Image/Text/Button, F - Set Title/Scene Button Type, G - Mode
Selection, H - Zoom Tools, I - TV Safe Zone/Grid Lines, J - Align Objects, K - Select Video Effect, L - Set
Menu Motion, M - Navigation Buttons, N - Upload to Internet, O - Enable 3D Depth, P - Thumbnail
Button, Q - Text Menu Button
358
CyberLink PowerDirector Help
Note: * optional feature in CyberLink PowerDirector. Check the version
table on our web site for detailed versioning information.
In the Menu Designer you can edit all three possible disc menu pages. Note that the
titles/scenes (videos and projects on your disc) and chapters pages always have the
same layout.
To modify a specific page, select Root Menu, Titles/Chapters Menu, or Subtitles
Menu from the Edit page drop-down menu.
Note: the subtitles menu page is only available if you selected Create
subtitles for disc when you added subtitles in the Subtitle Room. See
Adding Subtitles for more information.
Mode Selection, Zoom Tools, and Context
Menu
When customizing menus in the Menu Designer use the mode selection, zoom
tools, and context menu for assistance.
Note: when modifying menus in the Menu Designer, use the player controls to
preview, and click to preview the menu at full screen.
Mode Selection
In the Menu Designer there are two selection modes. Click the button to
enable object selection. When selected, you can freely click and move the menu
text, buttons, images, etc. to different areas of the menu.
Click the button to enable a mode that lets you drag the view in the Menu
Designer. This mode is especially helpful if zoomed in on the disc menu.
Zoom Tools
Use the zoom tools and to zoom out and in on the preview window
when modifying the disc menu. You can also select the viewer zoom amount from
359
Creating Discs
the drop-down to set the size of the disc menu preview. Select Fit to resize the disc
menu so that is fits in the Menu Designer's viewer window.
Note: you can also hold down the Ctrl key on your keyboard and then use
the mouse scroll wheel to zoom in or out on the disc menu.
Context Menu
When in the Menu Designer, you can right-click on an item in the preview window
to gain access to some functionality you may find useful.
In the context menu you can:
·insert images, title text, and buttons onto the menu page.
·cut, copy, paste, or delete items on the menu page.
·bring the selected item forward, or send it backward.
·quickly align selected items in the menu page how you want them.
·select Align All Menu Buttons to uniformly align all of the menu buttons on
the current menu page.
·go to Full Screen View for a larger view of the current menu page.
Setting Menu Opening and Background
You can import a video that plays in the background while the menu is loading.
Usually called a menu opening, it is seen on most commercial discs before the
menu options display.
You can also add or replace the background of your disc menu with an image or a
video file, or set a video effect that is applied to the background of your disc menu.
Including a Menu Opening
To include a video as the menu opening, click the button, select the Import
User Video For Menu Opening option, and then the video you want to use.
360
CyberLink PowerDirector Help
Note: the Include menu opening video option on the Menu Preferences
tab must be selected for this feature to work when burned to disc.
Setting Menu Background
To set or replace the background image of your menu, with either an image or a
video file. To do this, click the button and then select the Set Background
Image or Video option. Once selected, set how the background media is displayed
in the Background Media Adjustment Settings window.
Note: to remove the imported background image or video, just click the
button.
Adjusting Menu Background's Media Settings
When you import video clips and images to use as a background for your disc
menu, the Background Media Adjustment Settings window displays. In the window
you can set the following:
·Stretch Setting: on this tab, select what you want CyberLink PowerDirector to
do if the video clip or image you selected as the background has a different
aspect ratio than your disc menu template. Select Apply to all menu pages to
use this setting on all menu pages.
·Set Source Format: if you are outputting a 3D video production as a 3D-BD*
disc, click on this tab to set the 3D source format of the background video
you imported. See Setting 3D Source Format for more detailed information.
Note: * optional feature in CyberLink PowerDirector. Check the version
table on our web site for detailed versioning information.
Adding Motion to Background Images
If you imported an image to use as the menu's background, you can select a
motion effect to make your menu more engaging. To do this, select from the
available motion options in the drop-down below the preview window.
361
Creating Discs
Selecting a Video Effect Background
To apply a video effect to your disc menu's background, click on the button at
the bottom of the designer window, and then select the video effect from the list.
Use any available settings to customize the effect to your liking.
Adding Title Text and Images to Menus
You can add additional title text or import images into the disc menus.
Adding Title Text to Disc Menus
To add additional title text to your disc menu, do this:
Note: if you want to add more text menu buttons, see Adding Menu Buttons.
1. Click the button.
2. Type in the text you want to use.
See Modifying Text Object and Image Properties for information on customizing
the added title text's properties.
Adding Images in Disc Menus
Click the button to add an image to your disc menu. If you want to add an
image as the menu's background, see Setting Menu Background.
362
CyberLink PowerDirector Help
See Modifying Text Object and Image Properties if you would like to use chroma
key to make the image in the disc menu transparent. You can also add shadows,
reflections and more on the inserted image.
Modifying Text Object and Image
Properties
Click on the tab to change the properties of text objects (disc menu text,
text menu buttons, or inserted title text). You can also change the properties of
images you added into the disc menu.
Note: you cannot edit the disc menu text or text menu button content in
Menu Designer window. You must edit this text in the disc menu preview
window. See Editing Disc Menu Text for more information.
Applying Preset Character Types to Text
Objects
Select the Character Presets option to apply a defined character preset to a text
object. After you have applied a defined character preset you can refine it using the
other properties on the tab, if required.
To apply a character preset to a text object, ensure the text box is selected in the
preview window and then click on a character preset in the list.
Note: once you are done customizing all of the text properties on the tab,
click on to save the character preset to your favorites. To find and
use saved character presets, select M y Favorites in the Character types
drop-down.
Customizing Font Type
Select the Font Type option to set the font type and size of the selected text object.
You can also select the font face color, bold or italicize text, change the line and
text spacing, and set the text alignment in the text box.
If the font type you are using supports it, you can select the Kerning check box to
reduce the space between the letters in the text.
363
Creating Discs
Customizing Font Face
In Font F ac e you can customize the font color, blur, and opacity. Select to enable
the font face properties on the selected text object, and then use the Blur and
Opacity sliders to customize its appearance.
When customizing the font face color, you have the following options in the Fill
type drop-down:
·Uniform color: select this option if you want the font to be one solid color.
Click the colored square to open the color palette and select the desired font
color.
·2 color gradient: select this option if you want the font color to change from
one color to another using a gradient. Click the colored squares to set the
beginning and ending colors, and then drag the Gradient direction control to
set which way the color flows.
·4 color gradient*: select this option if you want the font to consist of four
colors. Click the colored squares to set the colors in each of the four corners
of the text.
Note: * optional feature in CyberLink PowerDirector. Check the version
table on our web site for detailed versioning information.
Using Chroma Key
Select the Chrom a K ey option and then Apply chroma key to add a green screen
effect to an image you added to the disc menu. Once enable, do this:
1. Click on and then select the color in the image that you want to replace/
make transparent.
2. Adjust the Tolerance of hue, Tolerance of saturation, and Tolerance of
luminance sliders to remove the selected color. Adjust until the background
behind your inserted image is completely revealed, without any loss of quality
on the image.
3. Use the Edge sharpness slider to fine tune and sharpen the edges of the
inserted image on the revealed background.
364
CyberLink PowerDirector Help
Adding a Reflection
Select the Reflection option to add a reflection of a selected text object or added
image onto the background media. Use the Distance slider to set space between
the reflection and the object. Use the Opacity slider to set the opacity of the
reflection.
Applying Shadow
Select the Shadow option to add a shadow to a selected text object or an added
image. Available options allow you to change the shadow's color, direction,
distance from the object, and add a opacity or blur effect.
Applying Border
Select the Border option to add a border around a selected text object or an added
image. Available options allow you to change the border's size, and add a opacity
or blur effect.
You can customize the border color using the following options in the Fill type
drop-down:
·Uniform color: select this option if you want the border to be one solid color.
Click the colored square to open the color palette and select the desired
border color.
·2 color gradient: select this option if you want the border color to change
from one color to another using a gradient. Click the colored squares to set
the beginning and ending colors, and then drag the Gradient direction
control to set which way the color flows.
·4 color gradient*: select this option if you want the border to consist of four
colors. Click the colored squares to set the colors in each of the four corners
of the border.
Note: * optional feature in CyberLink PowerDirector. Check the version
table on our web site for detailed versioning information.
365
Creating Discs
Enabling 3D Depth
If you are creating a 3D video production, select the 3D Settings* option to give a
selected text object or an imported image a 3D effect.
Note: when using this feature, select the button to enable 3D mode for
best editing results. See Previewing in 3D Mode for more information on
using this mode. * Optional feature in CyberLink PowerDirector. Check the
version table on our web site for detailed versioning information.
Once enabled, use the slider to set the amount of depth you want the object to
have in 3D. Dragging the slider left will make the 3D object seem nearer to the
audience (in the foreground), while dragging it right will make it appear farther
away (in the background).
Applying Fades to Images
If your disc menu contains an added image, select it and then the Fade option to
apply a fade effect on it. Select whether to enable a fade-in and/or fade-out on the
image.
You can adjust the fades by clicking and dragging the keyframes below the preview
window.
366
CyberLink PowerDirector Help
The section in blue is how long the image displays, while the orange parts are the
fade in and out. Shortening the orange parts will make the fade in or out happen
more quickly, so you can customize the fade as required.
367
Creating Discs
Changing Object Settings
Use the Objec t Settings option to change some of the basic properties of text
objects and inserted images. Use the X and Y position fields to set the precise
location of the top left corner of the object on the disc menu.
Note: CyberLink PowerDirector sets the value of the top-left corner of the
object as the 0 axis, with the bottom-right corner having a value of 1.0, 1.0.
The center position in the disc menu is 0.500, 0.500.
Use the Scale sliders to change an object's size, or Opacity to make it more
transparent.
Note: select the Maintain aspect ratio option if you want to ensure the
object's aspect ratio does not change while you are moving or resizing it.
Deselect this option if you want to change the object's shape or alter its
aspect ratio.
368
CyberLink PowerDirector Help
To rotate an object, hover your mouse over , click and then drag your mouse left
or right as required. You can also manually enter a rotation amount in the Rotation
filed and then press the enter key to rotate it.
Adding and Editing Menu Buttons
You can add additional menu text buttons to your disc menu. You can also set the
properties for all of the menu and navigation buttons used in the menu.
Setting the Title/Scene Menu Button Type
You can set which type of title/scene menu buttons are used in the disc menu.
From the menu button type drop-down, select one of the following types:
·Text Only: select this type if you only want clickable menu button text
displayed in your disc menu.
·Thumbnails & Text: select this type if you want each title/scene to display both
a clickable video thumbnail and text.
·Single Thumbnail: select this type to only display a video thumbnail for the
first title/scene on the page, which is not clickable. All the titles/scenes will
have clickable menu button text on the menu page.
Adding Menu Buttons
Menu buttons are the buttons that provide access to your disc's content, chapters,
and subtitles. They may consist of just text or text and an accompanying
thumbnail, depending on the menu button type set above and the design of the
disc menu template.
Note: you can add up to 14 menu buttons on each menu page.
To add a menu button, click the button. Depending on the page in your disc
menu you add the button to, the new button might just be text or button text and
a scene/chapter thumbnail.
369
Creating Discs
Note: click the button at the top of the Menu Designer to align all of
the current menu buttons in the disc menu window. If you want all newly
added menu button to auto align, click next to this button and then
select Auto Align Buttons > On.
Setting Button Properties
Click on the tab and to set the properties of all the buttons in your disc
menu.
Note: the menu button properties that are available depend on which menu
page you are currently editing.
Changing Navigation Buttons
To change the menu navigation buttons that are used in your disc menu, select the
N avigation B uttons option. Select a set of navigation button (each set contains four
navigation buttons) from the list, or click on Import Custom if you want to use your
own buttons you custom created. If you imported custom buttons, or modified an
existing set, click the Save as button to save the current buttons as a new set of
navigation buttons.
Setting Button Highlight Style
Select the Button Highlight Style option to set the highlight icon used on a menu
button thumbnail for scenes and chapter buttons. Click on Import Custom if you
want to use your own custom highlight icon.
If your disc menu is using text buttons, select the Enable text highlight option if you
want it to be highlighted on the menu when it is active on the screen. Select
Highlight color and then click the colored square to open the color palette to select
the desired highlight color used.
Setting Button Frame and Mask
370
CyberLink PowerDirector Help
If using Thumbnails & Text menu button type, select the Button Frame and Mask
option to set the frame or mask used on a menu button thumbnail. Click on Import
Custom if you want to use your own custom button frame or mask.
Setting Button Layout
Select the Button Layout to select the desired layout of the thumbnail buttons on
the selected page. The number of layouts available is dependent on the template
you are editing.
Enabling 3D Depth in Disc Menus
If you are creating a 3D video production and want your disc menu to be in 3D,
click the button and then select the desired 3D format from the drop-down.
Note: when using this feature, select the button to enable 3D mode for
best editing results. See Previewing in 3D Mode for more information on
using this mode. * Optional feature in CyberLink PowerDirector. Check the
version table on our web site for detailed versioning information.
Saving and Sharing Disc Menu
Templates
Once you are finished modifying/customizing a disc menu template you can save it
in your disc menu library for future use, upload it to DirectorZone to share it with
others, or back it up on CyberLink Cloud*.
Note: * optional feature in CyberLink PowerDirector. Check the version
table on our web site for detailed versioning information.
·click on Share to upload your custom template to DirectorZone or back it up
on CyberLink Cloud. See Sharing and Backing Up Disc Menu Templates for
more information.
·click on Save As to save a modified template as a new template to the disc
menu library.
·click on Save to save a new template to the disc menu library.
371
Creating Discs
Sharing and Backing Up Disc Menu
Templates
You can share your customized disc menu templates with other CyberLink
PowerDirector users by uploading them to DirectorZone. If you have a CyberLink
Cloud subscription you can back up all your customized templates by storing them
on CyberLink Cloud.
To share and back up your disc menu templates, do this:
1. Do either of the following:
·in the Menu Designer, click on Share, enter a name for the custom template,
and then click OK.
·select the disc menu template in the library, and then click .
2. In the upload window, enter the information as follows:
·Upload to: select where you want to upload the template.
·Title: name of the template as it will display once uploaded.
·Style: select a style or category for the template.
·Type: if required, select the type of template you are uploading.
·Tags: enter some keyword search tags that will help users find the template
when searching.
Note: separate each tag you enter with a space. If you want to use two words
as the tag, just put quotes around them, e.g. "dollar bill".
·Collection: enter the name of the collection you want the template added to.
·Description: enter a short description of your template.
3. Click Next to proceed.
4. Confirm the copyright disclaimer, and then click Next to proceed with the
upload.
5. Click on Finish to close the upload window.
372
CyberLink PowerDirector Help
Burning Your Production to Disc
Burning your video production to disc is the final stage of the create disc process.
Once your disc is burned, you are able to play it on a disc player. You can also
create a disc folder to organize your media files on your hard drive. When finalizing
your disc, you have the choice of:
·Burning a Disc in 2D
·Burning a Disc in 3D
In CyberLink PowerDirector you can burn your video production to one of the
following optical disc formats:
·DVD: DVD-R, DVD-RW, DVD+R, DVD+RW
·Blu-ray Disc(TM)*: BDXL, BD-RE, BD-R
Note: * optional feature in CyberLink PowerDirector. Check the version
table on our web site for detailed versioning information.
Burning a Disc in 2D
If you created a standard 2D video production, click on the 2D Disc tab to configure
your disc's preferences and burn it to disc.
Configuring Disc Preferences
The following preferences are available on the 2D Disc tab:
Disc Format
·select the disc format type you want to use to burn your video to a disc.
Depending on the disc format type that you select, there may be a drop-down
option to select the capacity of the disc.
Video and Audio Settings
·Select the video recording format: if available for your selected disc format,
select the recording format of the video on your disc and its aspect ratio.
·Select the video encoding format and quality: if available for your selected disc
format, select a video encoding format and video quality for your disc from
373
Creating Discs
the drop-downs. For quality, select the Smart Fit option if you want CyberLink
PowerDirector to automatically adjust the bitrate to create the best quality
video file possible, which will fit the capacity of the disc you are using.
·Select the audio encoding format and channels: select an audio format for
your disc, and the number of channels it is capable of outputting to. If
burning a DVD, Blu-ray Disc, or AVCHD disc, you can select Dolby Digital to
create a disc with Dolby Digital 2 or 5.1 surround sound. If burning a DVD or
Blu-ray Disc, you can also select DTS to have CyberLink PowerDirector use the
DTS 5.1 Producer to create a disc with DTS 5.1 surround sound.
Note: the video quality and audio type options that are available depend on
the disc format that you have selected.
·Enable CyberLink TrueTheater Surround: if available, select this option to
enable CyberLink TrueTheater Surround to enhance the menu background
music. Choose from Living Room, Theater, or Stadium.
Burning the Disc
To burn your video production and created menu to a disc in 2D, do this:
Note: before you burn the disc, you should ensure there is enough disc
space available (on the export folder drive/partition) for the temp file that is
created and then burned to the disc. For DVD production, 10 GB is required
(20 GB recommended). For Blu-ray Disc/AVCHD production, 60 GB
required (100 GB recommended). You can change the export folder to a
different drive/partition in File Preferences.
1. Click on the 2D D isc tab.
2. Click the Burn in 2D button. The Final Output window displays.
3. Configure the production preferences as follows:
·Current drive: the burning drive (or removable disc for the AVCHD format)
CyberLink PowerDirector will use to burn the production to disc. If necessary,
click the button to select another drive and configure the burn
settings. See Configuring Burn Settings for more information. If you are
burning your production to a rewritable disc, you can click to erase it.
See Erasing Discs for more information.
374
CyberLink PowerDirector Help
·Disc volume label: in the field provided, enter a label for your disc. The disc
label can be up to 16 characters long.
·Burn to disc: ensure this option is selected if you want your production
burned to a disc.
·Number of copies: in the field provided, enter the number of discs you want
CyberLink PowerDirector to burn for you in succession.
·Save as disc image: select this option if you want to create a disc image file on
your computer's hard drive. Disc images can be burned to disc at a later time
if required. Click on to specify the folder where it is created.
·Create a folder: select this option to create a disc folder on your computer that
contains all the files necessary for burning. Click on to specify the folder
where it is created. Creating a folder overwrites all of the existing data in a
directory.
·Enable x.v.Color: x.v.Color is a color system that can display a wider color
range than usual. CyberLink PowerDirector can generate an x.v.Color-
compliant stream, which is backward compatible with RGB displays, while
offering the opportunity to achieve better visual quality if your playback
environment is x.v.Color ready.
·Enable hardware video encoder: enable this option to speed up rendering and
burning time. This option is only enabled if your computer supports hardware
acceleration (NVIDIA graphics card that supports CUDA, an AMD graphics card
that supports AMD Accelerated Parallel Processing, or a computer with Intel
Core Processor Family technology).
4. When ready, click the Start Burning button to burn your production to disc.
Note: the burning process may take a few minutes, depending on the length
and quality of your video, and your computer's processing power. Be
prepared for a short wait while CyberLink PowerDirector renders your movie
and burns it to the disc. Time remaining does not include the time it takes
to finalize/close discs.
Burning a Disc in 3D
If you created a 3D* video production, click on the 3D Disc tab to configure your
disc's preferences and burn it to disc.
375
Creating Discs
Note: * optional feature in CyberLink PowerDirector. Check the version
table on our web site for detailed versioning information.
Configuring Disc Preferences
The following preferences are available on the 3D Disc tab:
Disc Format
·select the disc format type you want to use to burn your video to a disc.
Depending on the disc format type that you select, there may be a drop-down
option to select the capacity of the disc.
Video and Audio Settings
·Select the video recording format: if available for your selected disc format,
select the recording format of the video on your disc and its aspect ratio.
·Select the video encoding format and quality: if available for your selected disc
format, select a video encoding format and video quality for your disc from
the drop-downs. For quality, select the Smart Fit option if you want CyberLink
PowerDirector to automatically adjust the bitrate to create the best quality
video file possible, which will fit the capacity of the disc you are using.
·Select the audio encoding format and channels: select an audio format for
your disc, and the number of channels it is capable of outputting to. If
burning a DVD, Blu-ray Disc, or AVCHD disc, you can select Dolby Digital to
create a disc with Dolby Digital 2 or 5.1 surround sound. If burning a DVD or
Blu-ray Disc, you can also select DTS to have CyberLink PowerDirector use the
DTS 5.1 Producer to create a disc with DTS 5.1 surround sound.
Note: the video quality and audio type options that are available depend on
the disc format that you have selected.
·3D output format: select the 3D output source format of the video that is
rendered and then burned to the disc.
Note: subtitles and disc menus are not supported on 3D discs using the
side-by-side 3D source format.
376
CyberLink PowerDirector Help
·Enable CyberLink TrueTheater Surround: if available, select this option to
enable CyberLink TrueTheater Surround to enhance the menu background
music. Choose from Living Room, Theater, or Stadium.
Burning the Disc
To burn your video production and created menu to a disc in 3D, do this:
Note: before you burn the disc, you should ensure there is enough disc
space available (on the export folder drive/partition) for the temp file that is
created and then burned to the disc. For DVD production, 10 GB is required
(20 GB recommended). For Blu-ray Disc/AVCHD production, 60 GB
required (100 GB recommended). You can change the export folder to a
different drive/partition in File Preferences.
1. Click on the 3D D isc tab.
2. Click the Burn in 3D button. The Final Output window displays.
3. Configure the production preferences as follows:
·Current drive: the burning drive (or removable disc for the AVCHD format)
CyberLink PowerDirector will use to burn the production to disc. If necessary,
click the button to select another drive and configure the burn
settings. See Configuring Burn Settings for more information. If you are
burning your production to a rewritable disc, you can click to erase it.
See Erasing Discs for more information.
·Disc volume label: in the field provided, enter a label for your disc. The disc
label can be up to 16 characters long.
·Burn to disc: ensure this option is selected if you want your production
burned to a disc.
·Number of copies: in the field provided, enter the number of discs you want
CyberLink PowerDirector to burn for you in succession.
·Save as disc image: select this option if you want to create a disc image file on
your computer's hard drive. Disc images can be burned to disc at a later time
if required. Click on to specify the folder where it is created.
·Create a folder: select this option to create a disc folder on your computer that
contains all the files necessary for burning. Click on to specify the folder
377
Creating Discs
where it is created. Creating a folder overwrites all of the existing data in a
directory.
·Enable x.v.Color: x.v.Color is a color system that can display a wider color
range than usual. CyberLink PowerDirector can generate an x.v.Color-
compliant stream, which is backward compatible with RGB displays, while
offering the opportunity to achieve better visual quality if your playback
environment is x.v.Color ready.
·Enable hardware video encoder: enable this option to speed up rendering and
burning time. This option is only enabled if your computer supports hardware
acceleration (NVIDIA graphics card that supports CUDA, an AMD graphics card
that supports AMD Accelerated Parallel Processing, or a computer with Intel
Core Processor Family technology).
4. When ready, click the Start Burning button to burn your production to disc.
Note: the burning process may take a few minutes, depending on the length
and quality of your video and your computer's processing power. Be
prepared for a short wait while CyberLink PowerDirector renders your movie
and burns it to the disc. Time remaining does not include the time it takes
to finalize/close discs.
Configuring Burn Settings
Before you burn to a disc for the first time, it is advised that you click on to
set your burning configuration as follows:
·Recording drive: select the burning drive CyberLink PowerDirector will use to
burn the production to disc.
·Recording speed: set the recording speed used when burning the disc. If you
encounter errors during the burning process, try lowering the burning speed.
·Include buffer under-run protection: select this option to ensure that video is
written to disc without interruption. An interruption in video burning can
result in an unusable disc.
After you set this configuration, CyberLink PowerDirector uses the same
configuration each time you burn until you change the settings.
378
CyberLink PowerDirector Help
Erasing Discs
If you are using a rewritable disc, you can erase content that has data previously
recorded on it. This allows you to reuse the same discs over and over without the
need to continually buy new discs. Click on the button to begin erasing a
disc.
To erase a disc, select:
·the Quick option to erase the disc index contained on the disc.
·the Full option to erase all of the content the disc contains.
Click OK to erase the disc.
379
PowerDirector Preferences
PowerDirector Preferences
Chapter 21:
To set your preferences in CyberLink PowerDirector, just click the button.
General Preferences
In the Preferences window, select the General tab. The available options are as
follows:
Application:
·Maximum undo levels: enter the number (between 0 and 100) of undos (Ctrl
+Z) you would like to make available while you work on your video
production. Setting a higher number consumes more CPU resources.
·Audio channels: select the default number of channels for the audio in your
video production when editing and previewing it. If Stereo is selected,
CyberLink PowerDirector will downmix any 5.1 channel audio to two channels
during preview.
Note: when editing and previewing video or audio with 7.1 channels, it is
downmixed to the number of audio channels selected in this preference
option.
·Timeline frame rate: select the TV format (NTSC or PAL) and frame rate for
your video production. The format should correspond to the region in which
you plan to play your video (if you burn it to disc). The frame rate should
correspond to the source video footage being used in your production.
·Use drop frame timecode: if your selected TV format is NTSC, select "Yes" to
synchronize the timecode of your video to its video length in the timeline.
·Show sound waveform in timeline: select to display the sound waveform in
the timeline that represents the sound levels in audio clips.
·Enable HD video processing (shadow file): select this to speed up the editing
of high definition video by enabling CyberLink PowerDirector to process the
file faster. Enabling this consumes more CPU resources.
·Auto delete temporary files every: select to have CyberLink PowerDirector
automatically delete temporary files created while editing, every specified
380
CyberLink PowerDirector Help
number of days. Click on the Manually Delete button if you want to select and
delete specific temporary files to free up disc space.
Internet:
·Automatically check for software updates: select to periodically check for
updates or new versions of PowerDirector automatically.
Language:
·Use system default language: select this option for the language display to be
the same as the language of your operating system.
·User defined: select this option and then select the language from the drop-
down list that you want to use.
Capture Preferences
In the Preferences window, select the Capture tab. The available options are as
follows:
Capture:
·Add captured files to media library: select this option to import captured files
into the media library directly after capture.
·Add captured files to empty workspace: select this option to automatically
import captured files into an empty area in the workspace (timeline).
·Enable automatic file replacement when recording voice-over: select this
option to overwrite existing audio if the voice-over overlaps during recording.
Auto scene detection:
·Do not detect scenes after capture: select this option if you do not want to
activate the auto scene detection function after video is captured.
·After capture, detect scenes by change of video frames: select this option to
perform scene detection after video capture. Once capture is complete, the
Detect Scenes window is opened, displaying the captured video. See
Detecting Scenes in a Video Clip for more information.
·During capture, detect scenes by timecode, and then save each scene as a
separate file (DV-VCR mode only): select this option to detect scene break
signals and to save each scene as a separate file. (DV camcorders generate a
381
PowerDirector Preferences
scene break signal on the tape whenever users release the REC button.) This
feature is only available in DV camcorder capture.
DV parameters setup:
·click the DV Parameters button to set the buffer time (in the Batch capture/
Writing to tape sections) for your DV camcorder. Setting a buffer time ensures
that your DV camcorder and the batch capture/ writing to tape function begin
at the same time. Without a buffer, batch capturing or writing to tape may
begin before the camcorder is engaged. In the DV auto stop section of the DV
Parameters Setup window, select whether you want CyberLink PowerDirector
to automatically stop scanning/capturing after a specified interval of blank
tape. You can specific the interval, in seconds, in the field provided.
Confirmation Preferences
In the Preferences window, select the Confirmation tab. The available options are as
follows:
Confirmation
·Always prompt me when timeline frame rates conflict: select this option to
enable a warning message when you add a video clip to the workspace whose
frame rate conflicts with the project's timeline frame rate set in General
preferences.
·Always prompt me when aspect ratios conflict: select this option to enable a
warning message when you add a video clip to the workspace whose aspect
conflicts with that of the project.
·Enable file deletion from hard drive: select this option if you would like to
enable the deletion of files from your hard drive when in the media library.
·Enable warning when chapters are removed during editing: select this option
to enable a warning message if chapter points are deleted during video
editing.
·Always prompt me when widescreen is not supported: select this option if you
want PowerDirector to notify you when a widescreen format is not supported.
·Always prompt me when I import high definition video into the library: select
this option if you want PowerDirector to notify you when you are importing
high definition video into the media library.
382
CyberLink PowerDirector Help
·Always prompt me to confirm captured video prefix name: select this option if
you want PowerDirector to ask you for a file name when capturing videos in
the capture window. If you deselect this option, PowerDirector will auto name
the files for you.
·Always prompt me to confirm captured snapshot file name: select this option
if you want PowerDirector to ask you for a file name when capturing screen
snapshots of video. If you deselect this option, PowerDirector will auto name
the files for you.
·Always enter the full feature editor at startup: select this option if you don't
want PowerDirector to ask you which editing mode it should open every time
you launch the program. Once selected, the full feature editor is auto opened
every time you open the program.
·Always prompt me when entering 3D full screen mode: select this option if
you want PowerDirector to prompt you when it enters 3D full screen mode on
some computers that can only view 3D content at full screen.
·Always prompt me when there is a poor quality segment in Content Aware
Editing: select this option if you want PowerDirector to ask if you want to auto
fix segments of video that are shaky or have poor lighting when encountered
during the analysis process of Content Aware Editing.
·Always prompt me when entering non real-time preview mode: select this
option if you want to be prompted every time you click the play button when
non real-time preview mode is enabled.
·Always prompt me before pasting keyframes attributes: select this option if
you want to be prompted every time you try and paste a clip's keyframe
attributes onto another clip.
·Always show tips dialog when entering express projects library: select this
option if you want to see the helpful tips on how to use express projects every
time you enter the express projects library.
DirectorZone Preferences
In the Preferences window, select the DirectorZone tab. The available options are as
follows:
Auto sign in:
383
PowerDirector Preferences
·Auto sign in to DirectorZone: select this option and then enter in your e-mail
address and password to automatically sign in to DirectorZone when the
program is opened. If you do not have a DirectorZone account, click on the
Get an Account button.
Retrieve templates from DirectorZone:
·Templates Uploaded to DirectorZone: click this button when you have signed
in to your DirectorZone account if you want to download and import all of
the templates you previously uploaded to DirectorZone.
·Templates Downloaded from DirectorZone: click this button when you have
signed in to your DirectorZone account if you want to download and import
all of the templates you previously downloaded from DirectorZone.
Privacy rules:
·Allow DirectorZone to gather editing information: select this option to allow
DirectorZone to collect all of the names of the templates used in a finished
project you upload to YouTube.
Editing Preferences
In the Preferences window, select the Editing tab. The available options are as
follows:
Timeline:
·Set default transition behavior: select the default behavior of transitions
added between two clips on a timeline track. See Setting Transition Behavior
for more information on the differences between the overlap and cross
transition.
·Default workspace: select whether to display the timeline or storyboard
editing workspace by default in the Edit window.
·Add transition between photos when applying Magic Motion: select this
option to add the transition selected in Tr ansition type between photos when
using the Magic Motion tool and apply to all photos.
·Add an effect and a title when using Freeze Frame: select this option to
automatically add an effect and title effect to the timeline when you click the
Freeze Frame button.
384
CyberLink PowerDirector Help
·Enable continuous thumbnails on video clips for easy scene recognition: select
this option to enable frame thumbnails throughout the video clips inserted on
the timeline. Enabling this option makes it easier to find the different scenes
in your clips.
·Switch to move mode automatically during playback: select this option if you
want PowerDirector to auto switch to movie mode when previewing your
video production. Doing this allows you to preview all the content in your
production, instead of just the selected clip.
·Enable snap to clips in timeline: deselect this option if you don't want clips to
snap to other clips when moving them around on the timeline tracks.
·Enable timeline scale for audio track: select this option to increase the timeline
scale for more precise audio syncing. Doing this allows for easier mixing of
audio in-track by allowing syncing down to 1/10 of a frame.
385
PowerDirector Preferences
Durations:
·set the default durations (in seconds) for image files and the different effects,
transitions, titles, subtitles, etc. when placed in the timeline.
Keyboard hotkeys:
·click the Customize button to fully customize PowerDirector's keyboard
shortcut hotkeys to fit your requirements. See Customizing Keyboard Hotkeys
for detailed information.
·click the Import button to import a custom hotkey set. See Hotkey Sets for
more information.
File Preferences
In the Preferences window, select the File tab. The available options are as follows:
Default locations:
·Import folder: indicates the last folder that media was imported from. To
change this folder, click Browse and then select a new folder.
·Export folder: set the folder where captured media is saved. To change this
folder, click Browse and then select a new folder.
Note: the export folder is where produced projects are outputted to by
default. Also, when you burn a file to disc, this folder is where the temp file
is created before burning it to disc.
File name:
386
CyberLink PowerDirector Help
·Captured video prefix: enter a default name for captured video files. When
capturing from a DV/HDV tape, select the Append time information after the
file prefix option to add the date captured information to the file name.
·Production file prefix: enter a default name for your produced files.
·Snapshot file name: enter a default name for captured snapshots in both 2D
and 3D. Select a file format from the drop-down list for your snapshots. You
have the choice of BMP, JPG, GIF and PNG 2D formats, or MPO and JPS when
taking snapshots of 3D content. The captured 3D snapshots are also in 3D.
·Snapshot destination: select the location where PowerDirector saves captured
snapshots from the drop-down. You can save them as a file, copy them to
your clipboard, or set them as your wallpaper background on your computer's
desktop.
·Use original video size as snapshot image quality whenever possible: select
this option if you want the image to be the same size and quality as the
original video, instead of the smaller preview window it is taken in.
Display Preferences
In the Preferences window, select the Display tab. The available options are as
follows:
·Preview quality: select the default preview quality from the list (Full HD*, HD*,
high, normal, low) to set the resolution/quality of the video used when
previewing your movie in the preview window. The higher the quality you
select, the more resources that are required to preview your video project.
Note: Full HD and HD preview resolution are only available when the Ultra
version of CyberLink PowerDirector is installed on a 64-bit operating
system.
·Preview mode: select the default preview mode used when previewing video
production:
·Real-time Preview: synchronizes and renders clips and effects in real-time,
displaying a preview of your video at the specified frames per second.
·Non Real-time Preview: mutes the audio and displays a preview at a
reduced speed to help make editing much more fluid. Useful when editing
high-definition video, using multiple PiP tracks on a less powerful
computer, or when you receive dropped frames when previewing. By
387
PowerDirector Preferences
muting the audio and slowing down the video, CyberLink PowerDirector
lets you view more frames per second when your computer has trouble
providing a smooth preview during editing.
·Snap to reference lines*: select to have the selected objects in the preview
window snap to the grid lines, TV safe zone, and the boundary of the window.
·TV safe zone: select to enable a box on the preview window that indicates the
on-screen area of most TV displays.
·Grid lines: select the number of lines you want to display in a grid over the
video image in the preview window. Use this grid to more precisely place the
PiP media and title text where you want on the video image.
·Dual preview*: if you have a secondary display device, such as a monitor, TV,
or DV camcorder connected to your computer, you can select it from this
drop-down to extend your workspace and preview your project on a
secondary display. See Dual Preview for more detailed information.
·3D* display configuration: from the drop-down select your default 3D display
device. See 3D Configuration for more detailed information.
Note: * optional feature in CyberLink PowerDirector. Check the version
table on our web site for detailed versioning information.
Hardware Acceleration
Preferences
In the Preferences window, select the Hardware Acceleration tab. The available
options are as follows:
Hardware acceleration:
Note: ensure you download and install the latest drivers, and any related
hardware acceleration software, for your computer's graphics card to
enable this feature in CyberLink PowerDirector.
·Enable OpenCL technology to speed up video effect preview/render: if your
computer supports GPU hardware acceleration, select this option to speed up
the rendering of some video effects by tapping into the multi-core parallel
processing power of your computer.
388
CyberLink PowerDirector Help
Note: to activate hardware acceleration technology during production,
select Hardware video encoder in the production preferences section of
the produce window before production. If your computer does not support
Open CL, the wording on the UI will be replaced with the supported
hardware acceleration technology (Intel Effect Acceleration, NVIDIA CUDA,
or AMD Accelerated Parallel Processing).
·Enable hardware decoding: if your computer supports NVIDIA CUDA/AMD
Accelerated Parallel Processing/Intel Core Processor Family technology, select
this option to use hardware acceleration to decode the video during the
editing process and when producing video.
Project Preferences
In the Preferences window, select the Project tab. The available options are as
follows:
Project:
·Number of recently used projects: enter the number (between 0 and 20) of
recently used projects that you would like to make available in the File menu
when you open CyberLink PowerDirector.
·Automatically load the last project when PowerDirector opens: select this
option to automatically load the last project you were working on.
·Automatically load sample clips when PowerDirector opens: select this option
to automatically load the sample image and video clips into your media
library when the program opens.
·Auto save project every: select this to automatically save your project every
specified number of minutes, so you don't lose your changes by accident. If
you want to set a specific location for the auto save files, click the Browse
button and select a folder location on your computer.
Produce Preferences
In the Preferences window, select the Produce tab. The available options are as
follows:
Produce:
389
PowerDirector Preferences
·Reduce video blocky artifacts (Intel SSE4 optimized): select this option to
improve the production overall quality of produced video, if your computer
supports Intel SSE4 optimization.
·Reduce video noise when using MPEG-1, MPEG-2, and H.264 software
encoders: select this option if you want CyberLink PowerDirector to auto
apply video denoise when encoding MPEG-1, MPEG-2, and H.264 video during
production.
H.264 AVC:
·Allow SVRT on single IDR H.264 video: select this option if you want
CyberLink PowerDirector to use SVRT to render a movie project when you only
have one H.264 AVC clip on the timeline. See Utilizing Intelligent SVRT for
more information on SVRT.
WMV:
·Produce WMV video with Speed Mode: select this option if you want
CyberLink PowerDirector to use Speed Mode to render WMV videos more
quickly.
Improvement Program
Preferences
In the Preferences window, select the Improvement Program tab. The available
options are as follows:
CyberLink Product Improvement Program
·I want to participate: select this item if you would like to participate in the
CyberLink Product Improvement Program for PowerDirector. Once enabled,
CyberLink PowerDirector will collect information about the hardware and
software configuration of your computer system, as well as your usage
behavior and statistics related to the software. Click the Read more
information about the improvement program online link to view more
detailed information about the content collected.
Note: the CyberLink Product Improvement Program for PowerDirector will
not collect any personal information for purposes of identifying you.
390
CyberLink PowerDirector Help
CyberLink Cloud Preferences
In the Preferences window, select the CyberLink Cloud* tab. The available options
are as follows:
Note: * optional feature in CyberLink PowerDirector. Check the version
table on our web site for detailed versioning information.
·Back up and restore your program settings: If you have a CyberLink Cloud
subscription you can click Back up to CyberLink Cloud to back up program
preferences, keyboard hotkeys, and custom output profiles to CyberLink
Cloud. Click Restore from CyberLink Cloud to replace your current program
settings with the ones you previously backed up on CyberLink Cloud.
·Download folder: click the Browse button to change the folder where
CyberLink Cloud effects, projects, and media are stored when downloaded.
·Clear CyberLink Cloud cache: click the Clear Offline Cache button to free up
some disk space by emptying the temp files stored when downloading
content from CyberLink Cloud.
·Sign out from CyberLink Cloud service: if you are currently signed in to
CyberLink Cloud, click the button to sign yourself out.
Note: click the Account Information link in the bottom right corner of the
preferences windows if you want to know your CyberLink Cloud subscription
expiry date, how much storage space you have, and more.
391
PowerDirector Hotkeys
PowerDirector Hotkeys
Chapter 22:
CyberLink PowerDirector includes a number of keyboard hotkeys that can make the
whole video editing process go more quickly and smoothly.
CyberLink PowerDirector has many Default Keyboard Hotkeys, but you can also
fully customize the hotkeys to fit your requirements. See Customizing Keyboard
Hotkeys for detailed information.
Default Keyboard Hotkeys
The following is a list of the default keyboard hotkeys in CyberLink PowerDirector
when the program is first installed.
Note: if the hotkeys were modified in the Customize Keyboard Hotkeys
window, this list will no longer be accurate. Select PowerDirector Default
from the Hotkey set drop-down in the Customize Keyboard Hotkeys window
to reset them back to these default values.
·Application Menu Bar Hotkeys
·System Hotkeys
·Capture Hotkeys
·Edit Hotkeys
·Designer Hotkeys
392
CyberLink PowerDirector Help
Application Menu Bar Hotkeys
Hotkeys
Command
File
Ctrl + N
Create new project
Ctrl + Shift + W
New workspace
Ctrl + O
Open existing project
Ctrl + S
Save project
Ctrl + Shift + S
Save project as
Ctrl + Q
Import media files
Ctrl + W
Import a media folder
Alt + F9
Switch to Capture module
Alt + F10
Switch to Edit module
Alt + F11
Switch to Produce module
Alt + F12
Switch to Burn (EZProducer/Create Disc) module
Alt + P
Display project properties
Alt + F4
Exit CyberLink PowerDirector
Edit
Ctrl + Z
Undo
Ctrl + Y
Redo
Ctrl + X
Cut
Shift + X
Cut and leave gap
Ctrl + Alt + X
Cut and move clips on the same track
Alt + X
Cut and move all timeline clips after removed clip
Ctrl + C
Copy
Ctrl + V
Paste
Alt + left arrow
key
Move timeline selected object one frame left
393
PowerDirector Hotkeys
Hotkeys
Command
Alt + right arrow
key
Move timeline selected object one frame right
Shift + left arrow
key
Go to previous marker
Shift + right
arrow key
Go to next marker
Shift + M
Add marker at current timeline position
Alt + 1
Opens Magic Mix function
Alt + 2
Opens Magic Motion function
Alt + 3
Opens Magic Cut function
Alt + 4
Opens Magic Style function
Alt + 6
Opens Magic Movie Wizard
F2
Modify (selected clip in PiP/Particle/Title Designer)
Ctrl + Alt + T
Open Trim window
Delete
Delete/Remove selected item(s)
Shift + Delete
Remove and leave gap
Ctrl + Delete
Remove and move clips on the same track
Alt + Delete
Remove and move all timeline clips after removed clip
Ctrl + A
Select all
Ctrl + T
Split clip at current timeline slider position
Ctrl + P
Take a snapshot of content in the preview window
Ctrl + D
Detect scenes
Alt + H
Customize keyboard hotkeys
Alt + C
Open user preferences window
View
Tab
Switch between timeline/storyboard view
F3
Switch to Media Room
F4
Switch to Effect Room
394
CyberLink PowerDirector Help
Hotkeys
Command
F5
Switch to PiP Room
F6
Switch to Particle Room
F7
Switch to Title Room
F8
Switch to Transition Room
F9
Switch to Audio Mixing Room
F10
Switch to Voice Over Room
F11
Switch to Chapter Room
F12
Switch to Subtitle Room
+
Zoom in on timeline ruler
-
Zoom out on timeline ruler
Alt + S
View SVRT information
Playback
Page Up
Switch to Clip mode
Page Down
Switch to Movie mode
Space
Play/Pause
Ctrl + /
Stop
,
Previous unit (seek by frame, second, etc.)
.
Next unit (seek by frame, second, etc.)
Home
Go to the beginning of clip/project
End
Go to the end of clip/project
Ctrl + left arrow
key
Go to previous clip in track (Clip mode)
Ctrl + right arrow
key
Go to next clip in track (Clip mode)
Alt + up arrow
key
Next second
Alt + down arrow
key
Previous second
395
PowerDirector Hotkeys
Hotkeys
Command
Ctrl + G
Go to timecode
Ctrl + F
Fast forward
Ctrl + U
Adjust system volume
Ctrl + Backspace
Mute/Mute off
F
Full screen
System Hotkeys
Hotkeys
Command
F1
Open help file
Delete
Delete/Remove selected item(s)
Shift + F12
View hotkey list
Alt + F4
Exit CyberLink PowerDirector
Capture Hotkeys
Hotkeys
Command
Alt + R
Start/Pause recording
Space
DV play/pause preview
Ctrl + /
DV stop preview
Ctrl + ,
DV rewind
Ctrl + .
DV fast forward
Alt + Y
Add text captions on captured video
Edit Hotkeys
Hotkeys
Command
Library
396
CyberLink PowerDirector Help
Hotkeys
Command
Ctrl + A
Select all
Ctrl + Tab
Filter media type in media library
Ctrl + D
Detect scenes
Ctrl + Q
Import media files
Ctrl + W
Import a media folder
Workspace
Ctrl + Drop
Overwrite content on track when a clip is dropped on
another clip
Shift + Drop
Move all clips on the timeline to the right when a clip is
dropped on another clip
Alt + Drop
Lay the clip over the existing clip and add a transition
between the two clips when a clip is dropped on another clip
[
Mark in
]
Mark out
1
Select camera 1 in MultiCam Designer
2
Select camera 2 in MultiCam Designer
3
Select camera 3 in MultiCam Designer
4
Select camera 4 in MultiCam Designer
Designer Hotkeys
Hotkeys
Command
Ctrl + B
Make text bold
Ctrl + I
Make text italic
Ctrl + L
Left-align text
Ctrl + R
Right-align text
Ctrl + E
Center-align text
Up arrow key
Move object up
397
PowerDirector Hotkeys
Hotkeys
Command
Down arrow key
Move object down
Left arrow key
Move object left
Right arrow key
Move object right
Alt + D
Share template on DirectorZone
Customizing Keyboard Hotkeys
CyberLink PowerDirector lets you fully customize its keyboard shortcut hotkeys to
fit your requirements. You can even add hotkeys for commands that are not
available in the default keyboard hotkeys.
To customize the keyboard hotkeys, do this:
Note: click the Restore button if you need to reset a selected hotkey that
you customized, to the default value.
1. Select Edit > Keyboard Hotkeys > Customize from the menu. Or just press the
Alt+H keys on your keyboard to open the Customize Keyboard Hotkeys
window.
2. Browse to and find the hotkey command that you want to customize.
Note: if required, enter in a search keyword in the field provided for the
hotkey command you want to customize and then click . Click it
repeatedly to locate multiple instances of the inputted search keyword, if
required.
3. Click in the Hotkeys column next to the command you want to customize.
4. Press the hotkey combination on your computer's keyboard that you want to
use/replace the existing hotkey with.
Note: if the keyboard hotkey you specify is already in use in the program,
you will be asked if you want to remove it from the existing command to use
in the new specified command. The replaced command will no longer have
a keyboard hotkey associated to it.
5. Repeat the above steps to customize all the keyboard hotkeys to your
preference.
398
CyberLink PowerDirector Help
6. Once you are done, click the Apply button, enter a name for the new set of
customized keyboard hotkeys, and then click OK to apply and save the
changes.
Hotkey Sets
When you customize keyboard hotkeys in CyberLink PowerDirector, they are saved
as hotkey sets in the Customize Keyboard Hotkeys window. If required you can
create multiple sets of hotkeys, which are quickly accessible in the window.
In the Customize Keyboard Hotkeys window, you can:
·quickly switch among the saved hotkey sets by selecting the one you want to
use from the Hotkey sets drop-down and then clicking the Apply button.
Select the PowerDirector Default hotkey set to use the original hotkey
settings.
·edit an existing hotkey set by further customizing the keyboard hotkeys, and
then clicking the Apply button. Click the S av e as button to save it as a brand
new hotkey set.
·delete a custom hotkey set by selecting it in the H otkey sets drop-down and
then clicking the Delete button.
Importing and Exporting Hotkey Sets
In the Customize Keyboard Hotkeys window you can export all of the hotkey sets
you created. This saves the custom to a file that can then be imported into another
version of CyberLink PowerDirector that supports the importing of hotkey sets.
To export a hotkey set, do this:
1. Select Edit > Keyboard Hotkeys > Export from the CyberLink PowerDirector
menu.
2. Specify a file name and save location on your computer.
3. Click the Save button to complete export process.
To import a hotkey set, do this:
4. Select Edit > Keyboard Hotkeys > Import from the CyberLink PowerDirector
menu.
5. Browse to the location of the exported file in the .PDH file format.
399
PowerDirector Hotkeys
6. Click the Open button to complete the import process.
400
CyberLink PowerDirector Help
Appendix
Chapter 23:
This chapter contains reference information to help answer questions you may
have about the digital movie production process or about using CyberLink
PowerDirector.
Intelligent SVRT: When Is Used?
Intelligent SVRT can be applied to video clips in the MPEG-1, MPEG-2, H.264 and DV-
AVI (Type I) formats. In the following conditions, clips (or portions of clips) do not
require rendering during production, and SVRT can therefore be applied:
·The frame rate, frame size, and file format are the same as those of the
destination production profile.
·The bitrate is similar to that of the destination production profile.
·The TV format is the same as that of the destination production profile. For
more information, see Setting TV (Video Clip Interlacing) Format.
If all of the above conditions are met, SVRT can be used. Any clips that do not meet
the above criteria are fully rendered without SVRT.
In the following conditions, clips (or portions of clips) must be rendered during
production, and SVRT can therefore not be applied:
·Adding a title or transition effect
·Modifying the color of a video clip
·Merging two video clips (clips within 2 seconds before or after the merged
clips will be rendered)
·Splitting a video clip (clips within 2 seconds before or after the split will be
rendered)
·Trimming a video clip (clips within 2 seconds before or after the trimmed clip
will be rendered)
·If the total duration of the production is less than one minute and any portion
of the video requires rendering, the entire production will be rendered for
efficiency reasons.
401
Appendix
Licensing and Copyright
Information
This section contains the PowerDirector licensing and copyright information,
including a copy of the Intel License Agreement for Open Source Computer Library
and the GNU Lesser General Public License. There is also a list of the third-party
components used in PowerDirector.
License Disclaimer
This product includes certain copyrighted third-party software components license
under the terms of the GNU Lesser General Public License and other similar license
agreements offering free distribution of these software components offered by
other organizations, if applicable. Copies of these agreements can be found by
clicking the link associated with each of the component provided in the table
below. You may also visit http://www.gnu.org/copyleft/lesser.html for a copy of
GNU Lesser General Public License Agreement.
LGPL components and other components listed below are licensed without
warranties of any kind, either express or implied warranties, including without
limitation the implied warranties of merchantability and fitness for a particular
purpose. The entire risk as the quality and performance of these components is
with you. Please check the respective license agreement for more details.
Copyright Holders under LGPL and/or other license agreements mentioned herein
shall not be responsible for any damages, general, special, incidental or
consequential, arising out of the use or inability to use these components/software.
Please check the respective license agreement for more details.
For a list of components of such nature, and to acquire the full source code of
these licensed components, including any scripts to control compilation and
installation of the object code, please see "List of Components" below.
Downloading Source Code
You can download the machine-readable source code of the corresponding
licensed component from http://www.cyberlink.com/. Please read the copyright
notice, the warranty disclaimer, and the license agreement accompanying these
source codes.
402
CyberLink PowerDirector Help
List of Components
Component
License Information
cv.dll
Intel License Agreement for Open
Source Computer Library
cvaux.dll
Intel License Agreement for Open
Source Computer Library
highgui.dll
Intel License Agreement for Open
Source Computer Library
OptCVa6.dll
Intel License Agreement for Open
Source Computer Library
OptCVm6.dll
Intel License Agreement for Open
Source Computer Library
OptCVw7.dll
Intel License Agreement for Open
Source Computer Library
PThreadVC2.dll
GNU Lesser General Public License
403
Appendix
Licenses and Copyrights
Below are the applicable licenses and copyright information that pertain to the
components listed in the List of Components.
Dolby Laboratories
Manufactured under license from Dolby Laboratories. Dolby and the double-D
symbol are registered trademarks of Dolby Laboratories. Confidential unpublished
works. Copyright 2003-2005 Dolby Laboratories. All rights reserved.
DTS
For DTS patents, see http://patents.dts.com. Manufactured under license from DTS
Licensing Limited. DTS, the Symbol, & DTS and the Symbol together are registered
trademarks, and DTS 5.1 Producer is a trademark of DTS, Inc. © DTS, Inc. All Rights
Reserved.
404
CyberLink PowerDirector Help
XAVC S
XAVC S and are trademarks of Sony Corporation.
MPEG-2 Packaged Media Notice
ANY USE OF THIS PRODUCT IN ANY MANNER OTHER THAN PERSONAL USE THAT
COMPLIES WITH THE MPEG-2 STANDARD FOR ENCODING VIDEO INFORMATION FOR
PACKAGED MEDIA IS EXPRESSLY PROHIBITED WITHOUT A LICENSE UNDER
APPLICABLE PATENTS IN THE MPEG-2 PATENT PORTFOLOP, WHICH LICENSE IS
AVAILABLE FROM MPEG LA, LLC, 6312 S. Fiddlers Green Circle, Suite 400E,
Greenwood Village, Colorado 80111 U.S.A.
Intel License Agreement For Open Source
Computer Vision Library
Copyright © 2000, Intel Corporation, all rights reserved. Third party copyrights are
property of their respective owners.
Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without modification,
are permitted provided that the following conditions are met:
Redistribution's of source code must retain the above copyright notice, this list of
conditions and the following disclaimer.
405
Appendix
Redistribution's in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice, this list
of conditions and the following disclaimer in the documentation and/or other
materials provided with the distribution.
The name of Intel Corporation may not be used to endorse or promote products
derived from this software without specific prior written permission.
This software is provided by the copyright holders and contributors "as is" and any
express or implied warranties, including, but not limited to, the implied warranties
of merchantability and fitness for a particular purpose are disclaimed. In no event
shall Intel or contributors be liable for any direct, indirect, incidental, special,
exemplary, or consequential damages (including, but not limited to, procurement
of substitute goods or services; loss of use, data, or profits; or business interruption)
however caused and on any theory of liability, whether in contract, strict liability, or
tort (including negligence or otherwise) arising in any way out of the use of this
software, even if advised of the possibility of such damage.
GNU Lesser General Public License
Version 2.1, February 1999
Copyright (C) 1991, 1999 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
51 Franklin St, Fifth Floor, Boston, MA 02110-1301 USA
Everyone is permitted to copy and distribute verbatim copies of this license
document, but changing it is not allowed.
[This is the first released version of the Lesser GPL. It also counts as the successor of
the GNU Library Public License, version 2, hence the version number 2.1.]
Preamble
The licenses for most software are designed to take away your freedom to share
and change it. By contrast, the GNU General Public Licenses are intended to
guarantee your freedom to share and change free software--to make sure the
software is free for all its users.
This license, the Lesser General Public License, applies to some specially designated
software packages--typically libraries--of the Free Software Foundation and other
authors who decide to use it. You can use it too, but we suggest you first think
406
CyberLink PowerDirector Help
carefully about whether this license or the ordinary General Public License is the
better strategy to use in any particular case, based on the explanations below.
When we speak of free software, we are referring to freedom of use, not price. Our
General Public Licenses are designed to make sure that you have the freedom to
distribute copies of free software (and charge for this service if you wish); that you
receive source code or can get it if you want it; that you can change the software
and use pieces of it in new free programs; and that you are informed that you can
do these things.
To protect your rights, we need to make restrictions that forbid distributors to deny
you these rights or to ask you to surrender these rights. These restrictions translate
to certain responsibilities for you if you distribute copies of the library or if you
modify it.
For example, if you distribute copies of the library, whether gratis or for a fee, you
must give the recipients all the rights that we gave you. You must make sure that
they, too, receive or can get the source code. If you link other code with the library,
you must provide complete object files to the recipients, so that they can relink
them with the library after making changes to the library and recompiling it. And
you must show them these terms so they know their rights.
We protect your rights with a two-step method: (1) we copyright the library, and (2)
we offer you this license, which gives you legal permission to copy, distribute and/
or modify the library.
To protect each distributor, we want to make it very clear that there is no warranty
for the free library. Also, if the library is modified by someone else and passed on,
the recipients should know that what they have is not the original version, so that
the original author's reputation will not be affected by problems that might be
introduced by others.
Finally, software patents pose a constant threat to the existence of any free
program. We wish to make sure that a company cannot effectively restrict the users
of a free program by obtaining a restrictive license from a patent holder. Therefore,
we insist that any patent license obtained for a version of the library must be
consistent with the full freedom of use specified in this license.
Most GNU software, including some libraries, is covered by the ordinary GNU
General Public License. This license, the GNU Lesser General Public License, applies
to certain designated libraries, and is quite different from the ordinary General
Public License. We use this license for certain libraries in order to permit linking
those libraries into non-free programs.
407
Appendix
When a program is linked with a library, whether statically or using a shared library,
the combination of the two is legally speaking a combined work, a derivative of the
original library. The ordinary General Public License therefore permits such linking
only if the entire combination fits its criteria of freedom. The Lesser General Public
License permits more lax criteria for linking other code with the library.
We call this license the "Lesser" General Public License because it does Less to
protect the user's freedom than the ordinary General Public License. It also provides
other free software developers Less of an advantage over competing non-free
programs. These disadvantages are the reason we use the ordinary General Public
License for many libraries. However, the Lesser license provides advantages in
certain special circumstances.
For example, on rare occasions, there may be a special need to encourage the
widest possible use of a certain library, so that it becomes a de-facto standard. To
achieve this, non-free programs must be allowed to use the library. A more
frequent case is that a free library does the same job as widely used non-free
libraries. In this case, there is little to gain by limiting the free library to free software
only, so we use the Lesser General Public License.
In other cases, permission to use a particular library in non-free programs enables a
greater number of people to use a large body of free software. For example,
permission to use the GNU C Library in non-free programs enables many more
people to use the whole GNU operating system, as well as its variant, the GNU/Linux
operating system.
Although the Lesser General Public License is Less protective of the users' freedom,
it does ensure that the user of a program that is linked with the Library has the
freedom and the wherewithal to run that program using a modified version of the
Library.
The precise terms and conditions for copying, distribution and modification follow.
Pay close attention to the difference between a "work based on the library" and a
"work that uses the library". The former contains code derived from the library,
whereas the latter must be combined with the library in order to run.
TERMS AND CONDITIONS FOR COPYING,
DISTRIBUTION AND MODIFICATION
0. This License Agreement applies to any software library or other program which
contains a notice placed by the copyright holder or other authorized party saying it
408
CyberLink PowerDirector Help
may be distributed under the terms of this Lesser General Public License (also called
"this License"). Each licensee is addressed as "you".
A "library" means a collection of software functions and/or data prepared so as to
be conveniently linked with application programs (which use some of those
functions and data) to form executables.
The "Library", below, refers to any such software library or work which has been
distributed under these terms. A "work based on the Library" means either the
Library or any derivative work under copyright law: that is to say, a work containing
the Library or a portion of it, either verbatim or with modifications and/or translated
straightforwardly into another language. (Hereinafter, translation is included
without limitation in the term "modification".)
"Source code" for a work means the preferred form of the work for making
modifications to it. For a library, complete source code means all the source code
for all modules it contains, plus any associated interface definition files, plus the
scripts used to control compilation and installation of the library.
Activities other than copying, distribution and modification are not covered by this
License; they are outside its scope. The act of running a program using the Library
is not restricted, and output from such a program is covered only if its contents
constitute a work based on the Library (independent of the use of the Library in a
tool for writing it). Whether that is true depends on what the Library does and what
the program that uses the Library does.
1. You may copy and distribute verbatim copies of the Library's complete source
code as you receive it, in any medium, provided that you conspicuously and
appropriately publish on each copy an appropriate copyright notice and disclaimer
of warranty; keep intact all the notices that refer to this License and to the absence
of any warranty; and distribute a copy of this License along with the Library.
You may charge a fee for the physical act of transferring a copy, and you may at
your option offer warranty protection in exchange for a fee.
2. You may modify your copy or copies of the Library or any portion of it, thus
forming a work based on the Library, and copy and distribute such modifications or
work under the terms of Section 1 above, provided that you also meet all of these
conditions:
a) The modified work must itself be a software library.
b) You must cause the files modified to carry prominent notices stating that you
changed the files and the date of any change.
409
Appendix
c) You must cause the whole of the work to be licensed at no charge to all third
parties under the terms of this License.
d) If a facility in the modified Library refers to a function or a table of data to be
supplied by an application program that uses the facility, other than as an
argument passed when the facility is invoked, then you must make a good faith
effort to ensure that, in the event an application does not supply such function or
table, the facility still operates, and performs whatever part of its purpose remains
meaningful.
(For example, a function in a library to compute square roots has a purpose that is
entirely well-defined independent of the application. Therefore, Subsection 2d
requires that any application-supplied function or table used by this function must
be optional: if the application does not supply it, the square root function must still
compute square roots.)
These requirements apply to the modified work as a whole. If identifiable sections
of that work are not derived from the Library, and can be reasonably considered
independent and separate works in themselves, then this License, and its terms, do
not apply to those sections when you distribute them as separate works. But when
you distribute the same sections as part of a whole which is a work based on the
Library, the distribution of the whole must be on the terms of this License, whose
permissions for other licensees extend to the entire whole, and thus to each and
every part regardless of who wrote it.
Thus, it is not the intent of this section to claim rights or contest your rights to work
written entirely by you; rather, the intent is to exercise the right to control the
distribution of derivative or collective works based on the Library.
In addition, mere aggregation of another work not based on the Library with the
Library (or with a work based on the Library) on a volume of a storage or
distribution medium does not bring the other work under the scope of this License.
3. You may opt to apply the terms of the ordinary GNU General Public License
instead of this License to a given copy of the Library. To do this, you must alter all
the notices that refer to this License, so that they refer to the ordinary GNU General
Public License, version 2, instead of to this License. (If a newer version than version
2 of the ordinary GNU General Public License has appeared, then you can specify
that version instead if you wish.) Do not make any other change in these notices.
Once this change is made in a given copy, it is irreversible for that copy, so the
ordinary GNU General Public License applies to all subsequent copies and derivative
works made from that copy.
410
CyberLink PowerDirector Help
This option is useful when you wish to copy part of the code of the Library into a
program that is not a library.
4. You may copy and distribute the Library (or a portion or derivative of it, under
Section 2) in object code or executable form under the terms of Sections 1 and 2
above provided that you accompany it with the complete corresponding machine-
readable source code, which must be distributed under the terms of Sections 1 and
2 above on a medium customarily used for software interchange.
If distribution of object code is made by offering access to copy from a designated
place, then offering equivalent access to copy the source code from the same place
satisfies the requirement to distribute the source code, even though third parties
are not compelled to copy the source along with the object code.
5. A program that contains no derivative of any portion of the Library, but is
designed to work with the Library by being compiled or linked with it, is called a
"work that uses the Library". Such a work, in isolation, is not a derivative work of the
Library, and therefore falls outside the scope of this License.
However, linking a "work that uses the Library" with the Library creates an
executable that is a derivative of the Library (because it contains portions of the
Library), rather than a "work that uses the library". The executable is therefore
covered by this License. Section 6 states terms for distribution of such executables.
When a "work that uses the Library" uses material from a header file that is part of
the Library, the object code for the work may be a derivative work of the Library
even though the source code is not. Whether this is true is especially significant if
the work can be linked without the Library, or if the work is itself a library. The
threshold for this to be true is not precisely defined by law.
If such an object file uses only numerical parameters, data structure layouts and
accessors, and small macros and small inline functions (ten lines or less in length),
then the use of the object file is unrestricted, regardless of whether it is legally a
derivative work. (Executables containing this object code plus portions of the
Library will still fall under Section 6.)
Otherwise, if the work is a derivative of the Library, you may distribute the object
code for the work under the terms of Section 6. Any executables containing that
work also fall under Section 6, whether or not they are linked directly with the
Library itself.
6. As an exception to the Sections above, you may also combine or link a "work that
uses the Library" with the Library to produce a work containing portions of the
Library, and distribute that work under terms of your choice, provided that the
411
Appendix
terms permit modification of the work for the customer's own use and reverse
engineering for debugging such modifications.
You must give prominent notice with each copy of the work that the Library is used
in it and that the Library and its use are covered by this License. You must supply a
copy of this License. If the work during execution displays copyright notices, you
must include the copyright notice for the Library among them, as well as a
reference directing the user to the copy of this License.
Also, you must do one of these things:
a) Accompany the work with the complete corresponding machine-readable source
code for the Library including whatever changes were used in the work (which must
be distributed under Sections 1 and 2 above); and, if the work is an executable
linked with the Library, with the complete machine-readable "work that uses the
Library", as object code and/or source code, so that the user can modify the Library
and then relink to produce a modified executable containing the modified Library.
(It is understood that the user who changes the contents of definitions files in the
Library will not necessarily be able to recompile the application to use the modified
definitions.)
b) Use a suitable shared library mechanism for linking with the Library. A suitable
mechanism is one that (1) uses at run time a copy of the library already present on
the user's computer system, rather than copying library functions into the
executable, and (2) will operate properly with a modified version of the library, if the
user installs one, as long as the modified version is interface-compatible with the
version that the work was made with.
c) Accompany the work with a written offer, valid for at least three years, to give the
same user the materials specified in Subsection 6a, above, for a charge no more
than the cost of performing this distribution.
d) If distribution of the work is made by offering access to copy from a designated
place, offer equivalent access to copy the above specified materials from the same
place.
e) Verify that the user has already received a copy of these materials or that you
have already sent this user a copy.
For an executable, the required form of the "work that uses the Library" must
include any data and utility programs needed for reproducing the executable from
it. However, as a special exception, the materials to be distributed need not include
anything that is normally distributed (in either source or binary form) with the
412
CyberLink PowerDirector Help
major components (compiler, kernel, and so on) of the operating system on which
the executable runs, unless that component itself accompanies the executable.
It may happen that this requirement contradicts the license restrictions of other
proprietary libraries that do not normally accompany the operating system. Such a
contradiction means you cannot use both them and the Library together in an
executable that you distribute.
7. You may place library facilities that are a work based on the Library side-by-side
in a single library together with other library facilities not covered by this License,
and distribute such a combined library, provided that the separate distribution of
the work based on the Library and of the other library facilities is otherwise
permitted, and provided that you do these two things:
a) Accompany the combined library with a copy of the same work based on the
Library, uncombined with any other library facilities. This must be distributed under
the terms of the Sections above.
b) Give prominent notice with the combined library of the fact that part of it is a
work based on the Library, and explaining where to find the accompanying
uncombined form of the same work.
8. You may not copy, modify, sublicense, link with, or distribute the Library except
as expressly provided under this License. Any attempt otherwise to copy, modify,
sublicense, link with, or distribute the Library is void, and will automatically
terminate your rights under this License. However, parties who have received
copies, or rights, from you under this License will not have their licenses terminated
so long as such parties remain in full compliance.
9. You are not required to accept this License, since you have not signed it.
However, nothing else grants you permission to modify or distribute the Library or
its derivative works. These actions are prohibited by law if you do not accept this
License. Therefore, by modifying or distributing the Library (or any work based on
the Library), you indicate your acceptance of this License to do so, and all its terms
and conditions for copying, distributing or modifying the Library or works based on
it.
10. Each time you redistribute the Library (or any work based on the Library), the
recipient automatically receives a license from the original licensor to copy,
distribute, link with or modify the Library subject to these terms and conditions.
You may not impose any further restrictions on the recipients' exercise of the rights
granted herein. You are not responsible for enforcing compliance by third parties
with this License.
413
Appendix
11. If, as a consequence of a court judgment or allegation of patent infringement or
for any other reason (not limited to patent issues), conditions are imposed on you
(whether by court order, agreement or otherwise) that contradict the conditions of
this License, they do not excuse you from the conditions of this License. If you
cannot distribute so as to satisfy simultaneously your obligations under this License
and any other pertinent obligations, then as a consequence you may not distribute
the Library at all. For example, if a patent license would not permit royalty-free
redistribution of the Library by all those who receive copies directly or indirectly
through you, then the only way you could satisfy both it and this License would be
to refrain entirely from distribution of the Library.
If any portion of this section is held invalid or unenforceable under any particular
circumstance, the balance of the section is intended to apply, and the section as a
whole is intended to apply in other circumstances.
It is not the purpose of this section to induce you to infringe any patents or other
property right claims or to contest validity of any such claims; this section has the
sole purpose of protecting the integrity of the free software distribution system
which is implemented by public license practices. Many people have made
generous contributions to the wide range of software distributed through that
system in reliance on consistent application of that system; it is up to the author/
donor to decide if he or she is willing to distribute software through any other
system and a licensee cannot impose that choice.
This section is intended to make thoroughly clear what is believed to be a
consequence of the rest of this License.
12. If the distribution and/or use of the Library is restricted in certain countries
either by patents or by copyrighted interfaces, the original copyright holder who
places the Library under this License may add an explicit geographical distribution
limitation excluding those countries, so that distribution is permitted only in or
among countries not thus excluded. In such case, this License incorporates the
limitation as if written in the body of this License.
13. The Free Software Foundation may publish revised and/or new versions of the
Lesser General Public License from time to time. Such new versions will be similar
in spirit to the present version, but may differ in detail to address new problems or
concerns.
Each version is given a distinguishing version number. If the Library specifies a
version number of this License which applies to it and "any later version", you have
the option of following the terms and conditions either of that version or of any
later version published by the Free Software Foundation. If the Library does not
414
CyberLink PowerDirector Help
specify a license version number, you may choose any version ever published by
the Free Software Foundation.
14. If you wish to incorporate parts of the Library into other free programs whose
distribution conditions are incompatible with these, write to the author to ask for
permission. For software which is copyrighted by the Free Software Foundation,
write to the Free Software Foundation; we sometimes make exceptions for this. Our
decision will be guided by the two goals of preserving the free status of all
derivatives of our free software and of promoting the sharing and reuse of software
generally.
NO WARRANTY
15. BECAUSE THE LIBRARY IS LICENSED FREE OF CHARGE, THERE IS NO WARRANTY
FOR THE LIBRARY, TO THE EXTENT PERMITTED BY APPLICABLE LAW. EXCEPT WHEN
OTHERWISE STATED IN WRITING THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS AND/OR OTHER PARTIES
PROVIDE THE LIBRARY "AS IS" WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EITHER
EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED
WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE.
THE ENTIRE RISK AS TO THE QUALITY AND PERFORMANCE OF THE LIBRARY IS WITH
YOU. SHOULD THE LIBRARY PROVE DEFECTIVE, YOU ASSUME THE COST OF ALL
NECESSARY SERVICING, REPAIR OR CORRECTION.
16. IN NO EVENT UNLESS REQUIRED BY APPLICABLE LAW OR AGREED TO IN
WRITING WILL ANY COPYRIGHT HOLDER, OR ANY OTHER PARTY WHO MAY MODIFY
AND/OR REDISTRIBUTE THE LIBRARY AS PERMITTED ABOVE, BE LIABLE TO YOU FOR
DAMAGES, INCLUDING ANY GENERAL, SPECIAL, INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL
DAMAGES ARISING OUT OF THE USE OR INABILITY TO USE THE LIBRARY (INCLUDING
BUT NOT LIMITED TO LOSS OF DATA OR DATA BEING RENDERED INACCURATE OR
LOSSES SUSTAINED BY YOU OR THIRD PARTIES OR A FAILURE OF THE LIBRARY TO
OPERATE WITH ANY OTHER SOFTWARE), EVEN IF SUCH HOLDER OR OTHER PARTY
HAS BEEN ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES.
CLAPACK Copyright Notice
Anderson, E. and Bai, Z. and Bischof, C. and Blackford, S. and Demmel, J. and
Dongarra, J. and Du Croz, J. and Greenbaum, A. and Hammarling, S. and McKenney,
A. and Sorensen, D. LAPACK User's Guide. Third Edition. Philadelphia, PA: Society
for Industrial and Applied Mathematics, 1999. ISBN: 0-89871-447-8 (paperback)
415
Technical Support
Technical Support
Chapter 24:
If you require technical support, then this chapter can help. It includes all the
information you need to find the answers you are looking for. You may also find
answers quickly by contacting your local distributor/dealer.
Before Contacting Technical
Support
Before contacting CyberLink technical support, please take advantage of one or
more of the following free support options:
·consult the user’s guide or the online help installed with your program.
·refer to the Knowledge Base at the following link on the CyberLink web site:
http://www.cyberlink.com/support/search-product-result.do
·check the Help Resources page in this document.
When contacting technical support by e-mail or phone, please have the following
information ready:
·registered pr oduct key (your product key can be found on the software disc
envelope, the box cover, or in the e-mail received after you purchased
CyberLink products on the CyberLink store).
·the product name, version and build number, which generally can be found
by clicking on the product name image on the user interface.
·the version of Windows installed on your system.
·list of hardware devices on your system (capture card, sound card, VGA card)
and their specifications. For fastest results, please generate and attach your
system info using the DxDiag.txt.
Note: here are the steps to generate the system info DxDiag.txt file: Click
Windows (start) button, and then search for "dxdiag". Click Save All
Information button to save the DxDiag.txt file.
·the wording of any warning messages that were displayed (you may want to
write this down or take a screen capture).
416
CyberLink PowerDirector Help
·a detailed description of the problem and under what circumstances it
occurred.
Web Support
Solutions to your problems are available 24 hours a day at no cost on the CyberLink
web site:
Note: you must first register as a member before using CyberLink web
support.
CyberLink provides a wide range of web support options, including FAQs, in the
following languages:
Language
Web Support URL
English
http://www.cyberlink.com/cs-help
Traditional Chinese
http://tw.cyberlink.com/cs-help
Japanese
http://jp.cyberlink.com/cs-help
Spanish
http://es.cyberlink.com/cs-help
Korean
http://kr.cyberlink.com/cs-help
Simplified Chinese
http://cn.cyberlink.com/cs-help
German
http://de.cyberlink.com/cs-help
French
http://fr.cyberlink.com/cs-help
Italian
http://it.cyberlink.com/cs-help
Help Resources
The following is a list of help resources that may assist you when using any of
CyberLink's products.
·Access CyberLink's Knowledge base and FAQ (frequently asked questions):
http://www.cyberlink.com/cs-resource
·View video tutorials for your software: http://directorzone.cyberlink.com/
tutorial/
417
Technical Support
·Ask questions and get answers from our users on the CyberLink Community
Forum: http://forum.cyberlink.com/forum/forums/list/ENU.page
Note: CyberLink’s user community forum is only available in English and
German.
418
CyberLink PowerDirector Help
419
Index
Index
1
120Hz Time-sequential 34
2
2D
burning disc in 372
converting to 3D 164
producing in 325
2K resolution
outputting in 2D 325
outputting in 3D 329
uploading 334
3
360 video
playing 33
360° video
converting 183
editing 50
importing 58
producing 328
rendering 328
sharing 343
uploading 343
3D
burn disc in 374
configuration 386
disc menu text 365
disc menus 370
output formats 330
overview 61
particle effects 230
PiP effects 210
preferences 386
producing in 329
setting source format 59
subtitles 321
title text 254
3D mode
enabling 34
3D-BD 359
3D-Like
overview 61
3D-Ready HDTV 34
4
4 color gradient
PiP effects 209
title text 247
4K resolution
outputting in 2D 325
outputting in 3D 329
uploading 334
5
5.1 surround 379
CyberLink PowerDirector Help
420
7
7.1 channels
downmixing 379
A
Action Camera Center 96
Align 359
Anaglyph 34, 329
Android 332
Animation
paint 201
Aspect ratio
PiP media 208
setting project 49
setting video 149
title effects 250, 255
Audio
5.1 surround 379
7.1 channel 379
adding 128
AudioDirector 162
beat detection 131
capturing 62
channels 379
dB meter 314
denoise 155
editing 135, 162
extracting 73
gain 314
importing 57
keyframes 155, 157
level meter 314
mixing 314
mixing in track 313
muting 161
normalizing 314
reversing 164
speed 164
stereo 379
sync by audio 133
syncing 313, 383
syncing to video 130
transitions 292
trimming 146
unlinking 141
WaveEditor 162
waveform 130, 313
AudioDirector 162
AVCHD 2.0
burning to disc 372
capturing 65
outputting in 2D 325
B
Background music
disc menus 353
slideshows 12
themes 91
Backgrounds
adding to video 125
disc menus 360
particle effects 225
title effects 246
Batch produce 345
421
Index
Blend
manual 189
Blending 116
Blur 181
Blu-ray Discs
burning 347
disc image 374, 376
selecting 2D format 372
selecting 3D format 374
Bring forward 359
Burn
2D disc 372
3D disc 374
disc image 374, 376
disc space 373, 376
settings 377
temp file 373, 376
Buttons
highlight style 369
menu 368
navigation 369
per page 355
properties 369
C
Capture
content 66
desktop 66
media 62
preferences 67, 380
quality 67
screen 66
settings 67
CD 65
Chapters
adding 318
menu page 350
thumbnails 318
Checkerboard 34
Chroma key
pip effects 209
Clip
adding markers 40
Clip markers 131
Clip mode 29
CLPV 149, 150
Color
effects 154
fixing 155
Color boards
adding 125
creating 127
ColorDirector
accessing 154
presets 154
Confirmation preferences 381
Content aware editing 19, 135
Context menu 359
Convert 2D to 3D 164
Copy keyframe attributes 215, 284
Create disc 347
Crop
images 151
videos 165
Cross transition 293
Crossfade 124, 125, 128, 198, 221
CyberLink Cloud
account information 390
CyberLink PowerDirector Help
422
CyberLink Cloud
downloading effects 70
overview 2
pack project materials 52
preferences 390
projects 55
signing out 390
uploading disc menu
templates 371
uploading paint animations 203
uploading particle effects 235
uploading PiP effects 219
uploading title effects 264
uploading transitions 311
uploading videos 328, 331,
334
D
Dailymotion 334
dB meter 314
Default language 379
Design Studio
Menu Designer 357
Paint Designer 200
Particle Designer 223
PiP Designer 204
Title Designer 239
Transition Designer 295
Detect
faces 10
music beats 131
scenes, library 71
scenes, trim 142
Devices 332
Digital TV 65
DirectorZone
bulletin 2
downloading from 69
downloading lens profiles 96
overview 2
popular templates 2
preferences 382
uploading disc menu
templates 371
uploading paint animations 203
uploading particle effects 235
uploading title effects 264
uploading transitions 311
uploadng PiP effects 219
Disc image
2D 374
3D 376
Disc menu text
3D depth 365
Disc menus
3D 370
adding images 361
adding menu buttons 368
adding text 362
alignment 356
background 359
background music 353
creating new 357
customizing 357
duration 355
editing properties 352
first play video 354
Menu Designer 357
menu music duration 355
423
Index
Disc menus
menu objects 356
motion 360
opening, disable 352
playback mode 355
selecting 350
settings 352
uploading 370
Discs
3D menus 370
burning 372
creating 347
customizing menus 357
editing menu 352
erasing 378
importing content 348
Menu Designer 357
selecting menu 350
Display
3D 34, 386
dual preview 32
preferences 386
Dolby
copyright 403
Dolby Digital 372, 374
Download
media 68
Drawing 201
DTS 5.1 Producer 372, 374
Dual preview 32
Duration 148
DV camcorder 62
DVDs
burning 347
capturing from 66
disc image 374, 376
selecting format 372, 374
E
Easy editor 8
Edge sharpness 309
Edit
audio 162
content aware editing 135
media 135
Editing preferences 383
Effects
action 98
adding 191
blending 189
color 154
downloading 69
freeze frame 197
keyframes 158
modifying 193
motion 178
NewBlue 191
particles 221
PiP objects 198
shape 152
speed 98, 167
titles 237
video 191
Emit method 227
Emit rate 228
Enhanced stabilizer 97, 153
Equirectangular projection 58
Erase
CyberLink PowerDirector Help
424
Erase
discs 378
Paint Designer 201
Explorer view 24
Export
projects 52
projects to CyberLink Cloud 55
Express projects 25, 106
filtering 24
Extend desktop 32
Extract audio 73
F
Facebook 334
360° video 343
Fades 315
disc menu images 365
PiP effects 211
Features
overview 1
File preferences 385
Flickr 68
Formats
supported, 2D export 325
supported, 3D import 329
supported, discs 372
supported, import 57
Frame rate
preview window 30
setting project 379
Freeform
media 152
position 157
Freeze
frame 197
time 201
Full feature editor 7
G
Gain 314
Gaussian blur 181
General preferences 379
Gravity 228
Green screen 209
Grid lines 30
Group objects 37
H
H.264 AVC
outputting in 2D 325
outputting in 3D 329
H.265 HEVC
outputting in 2D 325
Hardware acceleration
preferences 387
HDMI 1.4 Enabled 34
HDV camcorder 64
Help 416
Hotkeys 391
customizing 397
default 391
425
Index
I
Images
adding 124
aspect ratio 150
blending 189
cropping 151
effects 191, 194
enhancing 153
fades 365
fixing 153
importing 57
keyframes 155
layers 189
Magic Motion 195
masks 270
opacity 157
PhotoDirector 154
shape 152
transitions 289
Import
media 57
projects 61
Insert 124
projects 61
Intelligent SVRT
overview 400
utilizing 323
Interlaced video 149
Interpolated technology 167
Invert
transition 307
iPad/iPhone/iPod 332
ISO image 374, 376
K
Keyframes
adding 158
copying 155, 215, 261, 284
effects 193
masks 284
PiP effects 215
settings 155
title effects 261
L
Language 379
Latest features 1
Layer editng 189
Lens flare 191
Lens profiles
downloading 96
Library
search 24
window 22
Life 228
Lighting
fixing 155
Link 141
Lock
range 43
Loop playback 43
CyberLink PowerDirector Help
426
M
M2TS
outputting in 2D 326
outputting in 3D 330
Magic Cut 163
Magic Fix 163
Magic Motion 194
designer 195
Magic Movie Wizard 133
Magic Style 196
Magic Tools 42
Magnifier 191
Markers
clip 40, 131
music beat 131
timeline 38
Mask Composer 274
Mask Designer 266
Masks
creating 266, 270
editing 266
images 270
keyframes 284
motion 281
object settings 280
position 279
size 279
Media
3D 59
arranging 122
blending 189
capturing 62
downloading 68
editing 135
filtering 24
flitering 25
importing 57
layers 189
searching for 24
shape 152
Menu Designer 357
Meter
sound level 314
Microphone 65
Micro-polarizer LCD 3D 34
Mix audio 314
MKV
extracting subtitles 320
outputting in 2D 326
outputting in 3D 330
subtitles 319
Mobile phone 332
Mosaic 181
Motion
tracking 172
Motion blur 204
PiP media 214
title effects 258
Motion thumbnail
disable 352
Motion Tracker 171
Movie mode 29
MP4
outputting in 2D 326
outputting in 3D 330
Multi cam
sync by audio 133
427
Index
Multi thumbnail 368
Multi trim 144
MultiCam Designer
changing 80
creating recorded content 78
hotkeys 395
importing media 75
modifying 80
overview 74
saving 80
shadow file 78
synchronizing clips 77
Music
adding 128
beat detection 131
disc menus 353
editing 162
importing 57
menu duration 355
mixing 314
slideshows 12
trimming 146
Mute audio 161
My DirectorZone 69
My projects 52
N
NewBlue 191
Niconico Douga 340
Non real-time
capture 67
preview 30
Normalize 314
NTSC 149, 379
O
OpenCL 387
Overlap transition 293
Overwrite 124
P
Paint animation templates
creating 201
uploading 203
Paint Designer 20
using 200
PAL 149, 379
Particle Designer 223
Particle effects
3D depth 230
adding 221
adding objects 225
images 225
keyframes 232
modifying 223
motion 232
position 226
properties 227
range 226
uploading 235
PhotoDirector
accessing 154
Photos
adding 124
aspect ratio 150
CyberLink PowerDirector Help
428
Photos
cropping 151
editing 135
effects 191, 194
enhancing 153
fixing 153
importing 57
importing 360 58
keyframes 155
Magic Motion 195
PhotoDirector 154
shape 152
transitions 289
PiP Designer 204
PiP effects
3D depth 210
adding 198
aspect ratio 208
chroma key 209
creating new 198
customizing 199
ease in/out 208
fades 211
keyframes 215
motion 211
motion blur 214
opacity 208
overview 20
position 206, 208
rotation 208
size 206
transparency 208
uploading 219
PiP objects 20
Playback
loop 43
Playstation 332
Plug-ins 74
PNG
masks 268
Postfix 289
Power Tools 164
PowerDirector
system requirements 5
versions 3
PowerDirector Live 3
Preferences 379
capture 67
Prefix 289
Presets 154
Preview
3D 34
quality 30
rendering 43
undocking window 33
window 28
Produce 323
batch 345
overview 324
preferences 388
range 43
Product Improvement Program 389
Profiles
capture 67
Progressive video 149
Projects
aspect ratio 49
CyberLink Cloud 55
exporting 52
express 25, 106
429
Index
Projects
inserting 61
library 52
overview 49
preferences 388
producing 323
reusing 52
saving 49
templates 106
R
Range selection 43
Real-time preview 30
Removable disk 372
Render preview 43
Replay 98
Reverse 98, 164
Ripple editing 124, 125, 198
overview 123
Rooms 18
Root menu 350
disable 352
Rotate 164
Row-Interleaved 34
S
Scenes 350
detecting 142
Screen recorder 66, 107
Screen snapshots 30
Search
library 24
Send backward 359
Set 3D format 59
Settings
burn 377
capture 67
Shadow file
MultiCam Designer 78
preferences 379
Shape 152
Shift progression 302
Side-by-side 329
Single thumbnail 368
Single trim 142
Size limit 67
Slideshows
creating 10, 134
designer 13
music preference 12
time-lapse 16
Slow motion 167
Smart fit 372, 374
Snap to reference line 30
Sound
dB meter 314
level meter 314
Source format 59
Speed
audio 164
effects 98, 167
Split 140
Spotlight 181
SRT 320
Stabilizer 97
enhanced 153
Stereo 379
CyberLink PowerDirector Help
430
Stop motion 100
Storyboard 47
Subtitles 319
3D depth 321
extracting 320
formatting 321
importing 320
menu page 350
MKV 320
positioning 321
Supported formats 57
Surround sound 372, 374
SVRT
overview 400
utilizing 323
Symmetry 228
Sync
by audio 133
MultiCam Designer 77
Syncing 313, 383
System requirements 5
T
Tags 24
Technical support 415
Temp file 373, 376
Templates
projects 106
Theme Designer 82
Thumbnail index 352
Tilt shift 191
Time info 162
Time limit 67
Time shift 98
Timecode 379
Time-lapse 16
Timeline
adding markers 38
behavior 37
overview 36
scale 383
track overview 36
Title Designer 239
Title effects 237
3D depth 254
adding text 245
animation 255
aspect ratio 250, 255
ease in/out 250, 255
images 245
keyframes 261
motion 258
motion blur 258
opacity 250, 255
particles 245
position 246, 250, 255
properties 247
rotation 250, 255
scale 250, 255
size 250, 255
transparency 250, 255
uploading 264
Track
motion 171
objects 172
Track manager 44
Tracks
adding 44
431
Index
Tracks
overview 36
Transition Designer 295
Transitions 289
alpha 295
audio 292
behavior 293
creating 297
cross 293
editing 297
inverting 307
modifying settings 294
overlap 293
Transition Designer 295
uploading 311
Trim
audio 146
video 142
True360 1, 33, 50, 183
TrueTheater 3D 164
TrueTheater HD 153, 155
TrueVelocity 1
TV
capture 64
format 149
safe zone 30
TV format 379
U
Ultra HD 325
Undock 33
Unlink 73, 141
V
Version table 3
Vertical video 49
Video Speed Designer 167
Videos
adding 124
aspect ratio 49, 149
blending 189
capturing 62
color effects 154
ColorDirector 154
content aware editing 19, 135
converting for portable device
328
converting to 3D 164
cropping 165
denoise 155
detecting scenes 71
editing 135
effects 191
enhancing 153
extracting audio 73
fixing 153
frame rate 30, 379
importing 57
importing 360 58
interlacing format 149
keyframes 155
layers 189
motion 157
muting 161
opacity 157
CyberLink PowerDirector Help
432
Videos
presets 154
producing 323
reversing 164
rotation 157
rotational camera shake 153
shape 152
speed 167
stabilizer 97
sync by audio 133
syncing audio 130
transitions 289
trimming 142
unlinking audio 141
uploading to CyberLink Cloud
328, 331, 334
virtual reality 58
View Designer 183
Vimeo 334
Virtual reaility
Facebook 343
YouTube 343
Virtual reality
converting 183
importing video 58
playing videos 33
producing video 328
projects 50
rendering video 328
Voice clips
adding 128
mixing 314
recording 316
trimming 146
Voice over 316
Volume
keyframes 157
VR 50
W
Water reflection 191
Wave 228
WaveEditor 162
Waveform 130, 313
Web support 416
Webcam 65
White balance 155
Workspace
creating new 49
expanding 27
overview 18
X
Xbox 332
Y
Youku 342
YouTube 334
360° video 343
Z
Zoom 32

Navigation menu